¥ on
LAB DAILY
Filmed & Processed by the
Library Photographic Service
University of California
Berkeley 94720
ll Reduction Ratio —110—
=z pes
==
Oo
i
spa
= Bee
ag
Ce
li fle
I
No
On
I
MICROCOPY RESOLUTION TEST CHART
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS-1963-A
Ja LLL LLL UL LLL m LL
mi Th hm mf Tm Tim
DOCUMENT SOURCE:
Le LA
"HE MASTER NEGATIVE (FROM WHICH THIS REPRODUCTION WAS MADE,
'S STORED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF THE LIBRARY PHOTOGRAPHIC
SERVICE, ROOM 20, MAIN LIBRARY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA,
JERKELEY, CALIFORNIA 9 4 7 2 0
FOR ADDITIONAL REPRODUCTION REQUEST MASTER NEGATIVE NUMBER
0 2
HAND-BOOK
OF
COLLOQUIAL TIBETAN.
HAND-BOOK
COLLOQUIAL TIBETAN.
A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO THE LANGUAGE
OF CENTRAL TIBET.
IN THREE PARTS.
BY
GRAHAM SANDBERG, B. A,
CHAPLAIN, H. M. BENGAL GOVERNMENT; AUTHOR : ‘“ MANUAL OF SIKKIM-BHUTIA.”
@ulentta:
THACKER, SPINK AND CO.
1894.
Oriental
Library
pL
26/3
A.
w PREFACE.
e@on-
The present work is designed to afford not only a
complete guide to the Vernacular cf Tibet Proper, but
also considerable technical information to the travel-
ler in that little-explored land. The Tibetan territory
is computed to hold a population of six millions,
sparsely distributed over some 650,000 square miles ;
and the time is said to be approaching when these
extraordinary regions will be laid open to the enter-
prise of the explorer, the missionary, and the trader.
In the days, then, that are to come, a knowledge of
the idiom of the inhabitants will be a necessity.
Up to the present date, no grammar of the collo-
quial language has been placed before the public.
Jaschke, indeed, in his learned works, has fully dis-
sected the old classical language; but the modern
speech differs so materially from the literary vehicle,
both in vocabulary and in grammatical structure,
that a proficient in the latter might in vain attempt
to hold converse with the native of to-day. The
famous Moravian linguist, however, has brought to-
gether in his Dictionary great store of facts concern-
ing the spoken tongue, particularly the Western ; and
that store has proved a treasure-hoard to myself in
these pages.
It is the lingua franca of the Tibetan Empire
which has been analysed and codified in this Hand-
book ; not the dialectic forms spoken in corners of
CALCUTTA : — PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.
1894.
A ———————
V1 PREFACE.
the country, as in LAdak, Lahul, and Sikkim, but the
general Vernacular current in the heart of the land,
and which will carry the traveller from west to east
and from north-east to south. Besides availing my-
self of materials already published, I have had the
advantage of close intercourse with two men formerly
resident in Lh4sd. Those two I freely consulted. A
stay of three months in Darjiling last year, where I
made the acquaintance of Tibetans from various dis-
tricts, afforded much further help.
Three Parts are here attempted. First; the gram-
matical circumstances of the colloquial have been
minutely set forth, with copious examples on every
page. Secondly; a body of useful conversations has
been prepared with especial view to the peculiar
incidents of Tibetan travel. To these have been
added many technical lists, bearing on the Religion,
Natural History, and Geography of the land ; and, as
much of these collections is new, it is hoped they
may prove valuable. Thirdly; the Compendious
Vocabulary, in Tibetan and Ladaki, contains an assort-
ment of such words and expressions as it was thought
would prove most useful and useable. Alternative
renderings have been generally avoided as productive
of bewilderment. A long illness, let me add, has
caused the postponement of the publication of this
work, but the result of the delay has been a complete
revision of the whole.
SUBATHU : Paxsin] GRAHAM SANDBERG.
August, 1894.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
—
PART I.
GRAMMAR OF THE COLLOQUIAL.
Page
CHAPTER I.—SOUNDS AND SYLLABLES 9
VoweLs—CoNsoNANTS—THE TONE PiTcH IN
TIBETAN—SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES.
CHAPTER II.—THE ARTICLE . 20
CHAPTER III.—NOUN SUBSTANTIVES 22
A.—ForM AND ETYMOLOGY. B.—DECLENSION
oF NOUNS.
CHAPTER 1IV —ADJECTIVES... ves we 82
CHAPTER V.—CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS 39
43
CHAPTER VI.—THE VERB .. ver aoe
SECTION A.—FORMATION—SUBSTANTIVE VERBS.
B.—THE VERB ACTIVE.
C.—TuE VERB PASSIVE,
»”
CHAPTER VII.—PRONOUNS ... _ i.
CHAPTER VIIIL.—ADVERBS ... oe “er ves
CHAPTER IX.—POSTPOSITIONS “ .-
CHAPTER X.—CONJUNCTIONS
CHAPTER XI.—DERIVATIVES AND FORMATIVES
CHAPTER XII.—IDIOMATIC PHRASES
CHAPTER XIIL.—COMPOSITION ‘or on
PART IIL
PHRASES—CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES—
TECHNICAL LISTS.
NOTES ON CERTAIN LETTERS ve oe vee
Brief Orders co
Everyday Questions and Answers ...
Asking the Way re ror ‘oe "ee ot
D.—IpiomMatic AND CoMPOUND VERBS.
81
92
97
103
108
114
120
131
134
136
139
1
i
!
i
viii TABLE OF CONTENTS.
The Weather
At an Inn, &c.
Mountaineering
Paying and Receiving Visits
Cooking Utensils
Articles of Food in use in Tibet
Preparing and Eating Food ” oe ‘es
Over the Kanglachhen Pass between Wallung and Tibet ...
Time—Age—Seasons ... vs
Trees and Plants of Tibet
Fauna and Avifauna of Tibet
Sporting in Tibet
Shopping in Lhasa
Visit to Kinkhording
The Scavenger Beggars
Lakes, Rivers, Boating ...
Exclamatory Phrases
Medical Terms
Monies, Weights, and Measures ...
Titles and Personages in Tibet
Religious Edifices and Adjuncts thereof
Tibetan Mythology I.
Buddhist Sects .
Etymology of Place Names in Tibe*
PART III.
VOCABULARY.
ENGLISH—LADAKI—COLLOQUIAL OF CENTRAL TIBET—LITERARY
TIBETAN ves
APPENDIX.
MONGOL-TARTAR WORDS AND PHRASES
PART I.
CRAMMAR OF THE COLLOQUIAL.
THE TIBETAN GRAPHIC SYSTEM.
—e EAI ET
SIMPLE CHARACTERS.
Tenues. High-toned Low-toned Nasale.
Asprratee. Aspirate.
mm Ka Rr Kha all Gha KR’ Nga
oD
© Cha & Chha E’ Jha 9 Nya
5 Ta q Ta
ZI Pa J Pa J Bha N Ma
a) Dha § Na
3 Tsa & Tsa E" Dz'a A Wa
A Sa 9 Sha § Zha = Za
xX’ Ra A" La QR’ Aa AW Ya
5 Ha WW a
Each consonant carries with it the vowel a, as indicated above,
changed to e, 7, or 0, according as © & or ~~ is marked over the
consonant, and into u, if ~» is marked underneath.
. . ov -
PREFIXES.— In numerous words, if any one of the five letters, = N\ J
Nor CW stands first in a syllable, it is termed a Prefix, and is silent, the
letter following being sounded as initial. In all syllables comprising three or
more characters (reckoning doubles and triplets as one only), should one of
these five stand first it may be known to be a Prefix. In all two-character
syllables the first letter is never a Prefix, except when the second letter bears
-
-~
a vowel mark or is a double or triplet (as in NX 5 QQ 7,
ar 2m
sounded do, de, di, ta.) If the letter following a Prefix is a Low-toned
Aspirate, then the latter loses its aspiration and becomes an ordinary Medial.
v 1 . —evra v
Thus, Sli sounds dhag, but JA day ; AN “ghot, but FIN gor.
DUPLEX CHARACTERS.
(The actual pronunciation given in bracketted Italics.)
1. Y subjoined ; as J) Kya (kya) RB Khya (khya) ar Ghya
(kya) g Pya (chya) yg P’ya (chhya) g
Bhya (jhya, or chya) § Mya (nya).
R subjoined ; as TI’ Kra (ta) AR Khra (fa) J] Ghra
(dha) " Dhra (dha, or ta) q Pra (ta)
x Pra (ta) q Bhra (dha, or ta) § Mra
(mra, or ma) y Sra (sa, or shra) % Hra
(shra).
L subjoined; as [| Kla Al" Ghla & Bhla a Za a
Rla Qla. All sounded La, except &
which makes Da.
R superscribed; as J] (ga) (ka) R (nga) E' (ja)
5 (wo) 5 (0) § (do) § (ma) A
(ba) & (ma) I (tsa) BE (dza).
w J Go) F (ga) F (cha) F (GO)
YT (ta) 2 (da) A (pa) 7 (ha).
as § (ka) F (90) F (go) § (nya)
y (ta) & (da) y (na) N (pa) ¥
(ba) SN (ma) ¥ (tsa).
Note.—~The superscribing letter is not sounded (at least in Tibet Proper),
but where it surmounts a low-toned aspirate, the latter, as will be seen, loses
the aspiration.
THE TIBETAN GRAPHIC SYSTEM.
em EFT
SIMPLE CHARACTERS.
Tenues. High-toned Low-toned Nasalce.
Asprratee. Aspirate.
mT Ka Rr Kha ay Gha KR Nga
© Cha ® Chbha BE" Jha 9" Nya
5 Ta g Ta J Dha & Na
A Pa J Pa J’ Bha N° Ma
I Tsa & Tsa BE" Dz'a A Wa
A Sa TJ Sha § Zha = Za
Xx’ Ra A" La AQ Aa WwW Ya
5 Ha Wa
Each consonant carries with it the vowel a, as indicated above,
changed to e, 7, or 0, according as © & or ~~ is marked over the
consonant, and into u, if ~o is marked underneath.
- + - pv -
PREFIXES.— In numerous words, if any one of the five letters, = N A
NN or [A stands first in a syllable, it is termed a Prefix, and is silent, the
letter following being sounded as initial. In all syllables comprising three or
more characters (reckoning doubles and triplets as one only), should one of
these five stand first it may be known to be a Prefix. In all two-character
syllables the first letter is never a Prefix, except when the second letter bears
-
-~
a vowel mark or is a double or triplet (as in NEN 5 QAN RY,
La ‘ ies |
gounded do, de, di, ta.) If the letter following a Prefix is a Low-toned
Aspirate, then the latter loses its aspiration and becomes an ordinary Medial.
N ee -— re
Thus, ST sounds dhag, but JA dag ; AN _ghot, but HN Goi
DUPLEX CHARACTERS.
(The actual pronunciation given in bracketted Italics.)
Y subjoined; as T° Kya (kya) RB Khya (khya) J)" Ghya
(kya) g Pya (chya) gy P’ya (chhya) g
Bhya (jhya, or chya) &' Mya (nya).
R subjoined; as T Kra (fa) AR Khra (fa) H| Ghra
(dha) 2 Dhra (dha, or ta) q Pra (ta)
a Pra (fa) q Bhra (dha, or ta) y Mra
(mra, or ma) y Sra (sa, or shra) 5 Hra
(shra).
L subjoined; as [| Kla A] Ghla & Bhla a Za &
Rla Sla. All sounded La, except a
which makes Da.
9. R superscribed; as J (ga) (ka) K (nga) E (ja)
5 (wo 5 (0) § (@) § 0a) J
(ba) &' (ma) 8 (tsa) E (dza).
as ml (ka) F (nga) TF (cha) 7 (ja)
YT (ta) 2 (da) Ff (pa) 3 (ha).
as MN (ka) MH (ga) F (nga) & (nya)
5 (ta) & (da) x (na) F (pa) ¥
(ba) £2) (ma) x (tsa).
Note.—The superscribing letter is not sounded (at least in Tibet Proper),
but where it surmounts a low-toned aspirate, the latter, as will be seen, loses
the aspiration.
TRIPLICATE CHARACTERS.
M Riya (kya) T° Rghya (952) E' Rmya (nya) J Skya
(kya) Ff Sghya (gya) F Spya (chya) F (ya) 3 Smya (nya)
a Skra (ta) A (da) N' Sdhra (da) 3 Spra (ta) y Sbhra
(da) gy Smra (mara). 2
Again must be noted that a surmounting letter deprives the
low-toned aspirate of its aspiration. Thus ol sounds dha, but
a
soun
m ds da.
FINAL LETTERS; &c.
Al" is styled second final after H| E" ° and & and is then
silent ; as in HRA kap, ARN dang.
XI" as ordinary final either sounds 7, or being dropped modifies
preceding vowel ; as GN nai or ne, Ear chhot, SRE ds.
5 final is inaudible, but modifies preceding vowel ; as 55 ne’
& as final is sounded, but, like 5 modifies a into e, o into
and » into # H| followed by Al", as second final, is usually
dropped prolonging last vowel ; as FAT na, NF §hi
~~
The inherent a of any final is unheard save in one-character
syliables. ql or N' as finals sound % or 1v a
= r p respectively : ARH
lakpa, FR gyop-
Where J" prefix is followed by A" as initial, both are silent ;
. - , N -
as RIAN" 4, ARR" wing. RFR yid.
Tq’ as particle sounds wa ; Q" A’ a as initials wa, wi
y) mitials wa, wu, wo.
a, Fo A SAS NSONN NE Sel
ir
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER L.
‘SOUNDS AND sYLLABLES.
— 8 2 —
The pronunciation of Tibetan words differs greatly from
the orthography, and in the chief colloquial idioms there
are many letters and combinations of letters which have lost
their primitive sounds. That in earlier times the words
were generally sounded as they still continue to be spelt
seems plain, from the fact that at the present day, in the
remotest fastnesses of Tibet, and, curiously, where the po-
ad, the spoken language adheres more Or
pulace cannot re
This is the case in
less closely to the original spelling.
Skardo, north of Kashmir, as well as in the wild mountainous
tracts of Amdo on the Chinese border, provinces 3,000 miles
apart. The decay or change of pronunciation is to be found
g as initials or finals, as well
principally in letters occurrin
eo Sanskrit characters, out of
ag in letters compounded, as ar
two or three others.
Our present treatise deals solely with the speech in general
use. Accordingly, in these pages all words shall be spelt as
sounded ; and therefore, also, there can be no
they are now
the pronunciation of words
heed here to explain the rules for
written in Tibetan characters.
2
1
0 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CONSONANTS, 11
The sounds occurring i i 1
following :— urring in the main colloquial are the i + another half-tone, occurring immediately before the
letters m or d, the latter consonant as a final being
VOWELS. then often hardly audible. May be popularly des-
, the short a. b cribed as the letter “u” pronounced in an affected,
* honk a, beard usually as the English » in sun,” mincing manner ; but it 18, of course, a regular
be gh nm some words approaching to the a im vowel sound in several continental languages : heard
man,” “sand,” &e. in Miller in German, and in few in French.
: the longer a, which shall al
nounced ate in ¢ father.” ways be marked, pro- 3 CONSONANTS.
. agin‘ kettle.”
: the prolonged a, sounded almost 3
J as a double or iterat } ’
a, both with the Ttalian sound; perhaps ho go | . as the aspirated I in Hindustani ; and in many parts
second a in our ¢ papa.” of Tibet it is sounded as the ch in © loch,” or
J generally carries the short sound of an TR . . : as the Russian X.
: - nglish e in : . .
such words a gen,” i mend ;”’ but when the final 4 g: always hard in pond, as in “« gone.” As a final
etter 0 8 yi er 3s Both, nat Js our English sh 08 Lg we gr in Jiese pages we
) ° 1e Italian e in ‘ ché,” 1 ave printed g as inal, it sound k.
’ as J in ordinary talk, and will be understood
answering to our ai in such a word as praise.” 1 . nearly
: frequently as the English short ¢ in the word ¢ pin.” always if so sounded. But we shall discriminate
Thus we hear in Tibetan rin price,” min is PD i its occurrence; defining it as gh in the English
But as a final, it takes the orthodox sound of the i « ghastly.” As initial only. Ex: ghd-pa “where
letter © as heard in most European languages (mostly heard as kd-pa).
or nasal n. Is a single letter in Tibetan and is
namely, that of English e in “he,” “me,” &c
common as the initial letter of words. To attain
: usually as our 0 in “tone,” polo,” &c.; and rarel |
’ 2? : : . “ge
] the pronunciation of mg, when used as initial,
as our o in ¢¢ pond » ot.” & .
ending in ng, ’ eo Wy Ces except in words d the B lish +d “1 oer”? d th
’ ng went,” tsong onion,” first sound the Kinglis wor junger,” and then
’ try to say the mger without the hu, eliminating
sounded as in our word ¢ song.”
much of the g sound. As final, ng is very short
: long o occurs only as an initial in Ti
: as a ibetan. Its sound
pe the long “a,” is somewhat peculiar, and us if apd aint
bw separate pronunciations of the single vowel ; asin” church.”
followed one another, and were almost slided the
one in 0 ie other. Perhaps 0-6h might represent i : s the English j in ¢
sound, but often heard as wo. 1 Fo t ne em
3 7. aspirated asin ansl,
5: when o is immediately followed by eithe i !
original spelling, it assumes (his figsad hy os i . uttered like the initial sound in our words ¢ neuter,”
mon Sonn in German and Danish, and heard in “newt.”
oo Dera words as pew. As the d of the original . the dental t, a8 in ¢ tumble.”
the in ox origraphy fat b 4 of oy liable, . aspirated f, not as our th, but as thana, thora, in
. e frequen ound i 1
I g ! : y Hindustani.
Be wyop~ehTiung, olloquin’ betan words. ] . dental d, a8 in « dunce.” As?a final, is in pronuncia-
’ * .
: always ° tion nearly always dropped. However, in these
a mand as the English “00.” As an initial cases, we shall indicate its place by an apostrophe :
] thus to’pa for todpa, yo’ for yod “is.”
« peach hither.”
an aspirated form of ch, as in
¢ judge.”
» but often sounded as ch.
12
dh :
bh :
lh:
sh:
TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
aspirated d. In practice we advise the sound of an
ordinary unaspirated ¢, which is sufficiently correct.
as in ““ nut.”” Both n and d, when either occurs as
final in any syllable, modify the preceding vowel;
changing «a into e, o into 0, w into i. Thus piin
“brother,” nyen yong (for nyan yong) will hear.”
as in ‘“ port.” As final often for b; while on the
contrary, as initial, in Eastern Tibet is changed
into b occasionally.
not heard as English ph (f), but with distinct
aspirate sound.
as in bone. As final letter generally sounds p.
had best be pronounced as our p ; but really slightly
different and different in Tibetan orthography.
Thus bhe-uw “a calf’ sounds pe-u, and bhu-mo
“girl” sounds pu-mo. We shall generally print
bh where it occurs, while advising the sound of p.
as in “mat; where it occurs before p it really
represents n in the original spelling.
only an initial, and heard as the fes in our words,
“ plates,” “rates.”
the same letter aspirated ; as in our ¢ cats’ heads.”
a rough z, sounded with d as in the English ¢ adze.”
as in “yell,” w: asin “wander.”
as in ‘“ rather,” but is never rolled.
as in “lamb.” Where we have placed it as a final,
it is often inaudible, and always changes a preced-
ing a to e¢ and w to ii. In the capital of Tibet, the
l as final is said to be always heard.
heard really as kl, or as the Welsh initial LI. Thus
Lhdsa sounds Hlisa. However, we print lh in
these pages in order to coincide with the Tibetan
spelling.
these letters take the ordinary pronunciation ; but
the depth of tone with which they are sounded
differs in different words and affects the whole
word. See pp. 15, 16.
the ordinary aspirate ; never a silent letter.
13
THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN.
and as this is theoretically, and
the correct pronunciation, we
s ky; but frequently it 1s
ky : sounded as written,
often in practice,
shall always print it a
heard as if ty.
khy : to be printed thus, but often sounded ty.
to be printed thus, but often sounded dy.
cur as initial sounds i he
ich i age begin wi e
p hich in the written language
io i” p’y, and by, Zesectively, ny Hprasen ie
? . 3 po a .
lern pronunciation of the latter combin
" sound Ls generally distinctly heard after he 5 iy
and jh in all such words; e. g.» hye’pa o make,
¢¢ do,” chhyir-tu © for,” because of. i
In some parts of Tibet the p, ph, and b sunaymers
in these words, and not {he Anomsiouy ih & : 8 A
. the only change being the omissi e .
Ribot vino is as commonly heard as chhyvmo,
plila as chhyi-la ; whilst P’i-ling *¢ an Englishman is
in much more frequent use than Chhyi-ling.
CEREBRAL LETTERS.
d. and dh occurring as cerebrals, and pro-
y ¢© ; i
the teeth as the ordinary forms, but with
ainst the roof of the mouth.
our Enclish words torn and talks is really a cerebra
; a 11ff from the t in ten, &c. As is customary, these
and differs tr 3
sounds in the following pages will be pn yg 5! , g, aud 0)
r in | 1 vri -
ur se words which 1n the w ;
They only occur 1n tho 3 alti as
on Ts initials bearing a supscibed : e. 8 bras 3
~ y » v 1 .
sounds dai. However, according 0 A Pe Mg dn
Rockhill’s ¢ Land of the Lamas,” 1t would Ss {
Pr are in use in Lhasa. Of this use I am partly satisfied.
9Y :
chy, chhy, and jhy : these oc
We find t, 5
nounced, not against
their sound thrown up ag
THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN.
: 2
Chinese, &c., certain ¢ tones,
As in Burmese, Annamese,
have become recognised as
that is, a certain pitch of voice,
attached to the pronunciation of words.
instances the different pitch, or tone, serves to
ich otherwise would be sounded alike.
In many
discriminate words wl
14 TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
In Tibetan the tone depends altogether upon the particular
letters which happen to occur in the original spelling as the
two or three initial letters of any word. Though the letters
particularly the first consonant, may be silent Ta iy
tion, their presence or absence in the Tibetan spellin
regulates the fone and is thus really felt. Pe
In our transliteration we cannot exhibit the spelling or
note the unpronounced initial consonant or consonants but
we shall, where requisite, mark the fone of a word vonaliin
from such spelling. :
In Tibetan there are properly three Tones. These are the
High-pitched, the Medial, and the Low Resonant.
As the majority of words are uttered in a fairly high
key, we shall not as a rule distinguish the High-pitched
from the Medial or ordinary tone ; but where useful for dis-
crimination in words commencing with certain letters, we
shall make use of the sign \” above the first letter of the
word to mark the higher pitch. The Low Resonant fone
will be identified by the superscribed sign ~ on the initial
The High-pitched tone is rendered by an elevated treble
or feminine style of voice, continuously sustained at one
pitch; and the Medial being scarcely lower, that must be
the key in which the ordinary flow of words ought to run
merely subduing the voice to the Low Resonant tone which
is guttural in character, whenever a word or words proper
to that tone are introduced. If one is on the alert to otice
the variation of tone while listening to two natives in con-
verse, the exact distinction of voice will be at once distin-
guished and can be readily applied and reproduced.
The initial invariably gives the tone for the whole word
Taking three different words, each according to our collo-
quial mode of representing sounds spelt precisely alike, we
may note that, being shewn with the same initial, the onl
way of indicating the tone in print will be by the use of a
THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN. 15
above-given signs. Thus, we have ser says,” ser “a nail,”
and ser gold.” Inthe original spelling there is the follow-
ing distinction in these words: zer says,” gzer < g nail,”
and gser « gold;” and that spelling determines in truth the
present tone in use for each.
Ser, “says” 18 pronounced in Low Resonant tone
er,
. » yangts'e clay cup, yang-li hi Anh
lung wind, marpo red, sha flesh. » yang-tu bide or skin,
All words beginning wi
: g with the letters kh, chh, p’ ,
are high-toned in a pronounced dagres, ’ > Po and t ’
SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES.
1. Primarily the language of Tibet is a monosyllabic
tongue, every syllable being ordinarily a word of definite
meaning. However, in later times, a decided tendency
to polysyllabism has been steadily developing itself Be
sides new coinages for the purpose of expressing new and
complex ideas, which have been formed by linking two or
more monosyllabic words so as to make an artificial pol
syllable, the tendency has been exhibited in another v :
For all things in common use there existed and do exist ine
ple names, each a word of one syllable. Nevertheless | th
colloquial has by degrees grown (so to speak) dissatish 1
with these primitive designations, and has succeeded
expanding a large number of them into words of two sylla
bles. Moze curious is this predilection, because apparently
the original names were in most cases amply sufficient o
discriminate the various objects indicated. .And the pheno-
menon of the modern tongue preferring the longer words
Seems still more incongruous, when we fiad even in modern
writings, the old plain monosyllables generally adhered to
Doubtless the change in the pronunciation of the sim ler
forms has had something to do with these accretions Pe
the written language, words which are now sounded alike
are spelled differently. At the beginning and end of word
are still written certain letters which formerly were ‘o-
nounced but now are silent. These additional letters. (in
the case of initials, now styled ¢ prefixes >’) imparted a ay
tinction in sound to words which from the second or third
SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES. 17
letter onwards were identically spelled. The process of
atirition which has been going on in the pronunciation of
the language, whereby time has gradually worn away the
sound of the letters beginning and terminating words, has
approximated to one another the sound of innumerable
words, which in spelling and in former pronunciation were
sufficiently discriminated.
Another element of confusion arises from the fact that
certain collocations of letters have lost their original sounds
and are row pronounced as if they were spelled with
letters totally different. Thus the letters by, py, p’y, are
now heard as if they were jhy, chy, chhy. We cannot
in this place enter further into the subject; nor need
we illustrate our remarks by examples. Nevertheless
enough has been said to make plain that two processes,
directly opposed to one another, have been long operat-
ing in this remarkable language. By wear and tear and
carelessness, and for the saving of trouble which would
result from the avoidance of sounding difficult combina-
tions of consonants, words originally sufficiently distinctive
have been reduced to such shadows and skeletons of their
former selves as to be in many cases indistinguishable the
one from the other. On the other hand, in order to coun-
teract this process of denudation, and to escape from the
inconvenient consequences of it, further syllables have been
tacked on bodily to the older and half-wasted forms. Thus,
while the syllables have been attenuated down to a minimum,
rendering sufficient variety impossible, compensation has
been sought, and confusion to some extent eluded, by con-
joining syllables and producing by this combination the
variety which the denuded monosyllables no longer afforded.
So it comes to pass, through the foregoing or other
causes, that the Tibetan colloquial is no longer monosyllabic
Lut MOSTLY MADE UP OF WORDS OF TWO SYLLABLES. One ex-
3
Ea «
aan — ERENT TRI
18
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
ample : In written Tibetan Sud is ¢ the nose,” Rud is < tl
ear;” but, as initials, S. and R. are no Toler sounded ; w
thus Nd becomes the word for each of two very different f w 1
features. To prevent confusion in speech, N¢ « ear,” ike
the particle wa. But Nd-wa means also to be sick,”
Accordingly, at length, in the modern colloquial, N# « ve ip
has developed into Ndmchhok. Nevertheless in rit yo
word ‘“ ear’ we should still use the older forms py o
Rna-wa ; while for such compounds as ¢“ear-ring”’ wo © ah
hear nd-kor, not ndmchhok-kor. Analogously Na “n :
has at length been developed into Nifu, and even md
In words of two syllables the accent or stress is laid. pon
the second syllable, except when such second s lab] s ono
of the servile particles pa, wa, po, or wo, or whom os 2 no
minative affix ghw or bhu is appended, or even ie 0 wo
In these latter cases, the first syllable carries ti acoent,
Thus we hear ddwa ‘the moon,” not dawd. 10 aecent
2. In Tibetan we find a large number of primitive m
syllabic words to which have been affixed certain | hort
syllables, each consisting of no more than two letters ; .
short syllables seem removable often at pleasure thot
altering the meaning of the word affected. To noun I
verbs one of two of these short syllables ma Wry
Gither pa or wa. When affixed to the root of 4 n Bs
particle does not usually change the meaning of tl od
but when an adjective is conjoined with the nor go,
frequently find the particle dropped. In the collo iy ”
guage the prs is not so often dropped as it is in the on
anguage. owever, when a compound word is created b
iy ys au, the particles (if any), are savariably
; ma a
removable, When either pa or we I a a
root, it may indicate either the Infinitive mood of the rord
or a verbal noun, or else the participle. Thus the oy py
p——
19
SYLLABLES AND PA RTICLES.
takes the particle pa; and jhye'pa can mean “to do,” or
«the making,” or “doing,” according to circumstances.
The employment of these servile particles, on the other
hand, with ordinary nouns and adjectives, has come to be
governed by pure custom and to be subjected to no general
rule. With certain nouns and adjectives they are always
heard; whilst with others they have come to be either
optional or else neglected entirely. Finally, many substan-
tives are pure monosyllables to which no particle or other
syllable is, or has ever been, annexed.
Nore ox Pronuxciarion.—In Tibetan a final letter usually
undergoes some modification. Where a syllable ends
with the letter «“g,” it mostly takes the sound of “Kk,”
though in the following pages Wwe have printed this
final sometimes “g”’ and sometimes “k.” So also
with the letter «b,” which as final sounds as our “p.”
Where “d” is the last latter it is nearly always in-
audible and thus we have invariably omitted it, but
at the same time this elision has been every where indi-
cated by the use of an apostrophe. Thus jhyed-pa
«to do is invariably heard as jhye’pa, and so in these
pages do we print it.” Both “Lk” (g) and “p” (b) as
finals are also often elided ; thus pik-lep “bread” is
usually heard as if pa’le’.
Final “s” is never heard in Tibet Proper, where
it is either bluntly dropped or (and generally) assumes
the sound of a quick « i.” Thus the name of the chief
province of Tibet is written pus. The «“d” and “b”
are held to annihilate one another, leaving the word as
us only. Now, in Central Tibet the name of the pro-
vince is heard as ur, in Southern Tibet as U, and in
Ladak only is the final letter sounded and the name
pronounced Us. It should be noted, however, that if
the letter preceding the final “8” is a consonant, the
cg” is simply dropped and no i’ sound heard.
When the first syllable of a dissyllable ends in *“n »
and the second syllable begins with p” or “b,” the
«pn * gounds as ‘‘ m.”
Lastly, all vowels, save those marked long, are sound-
ed very short: men as our “men .” rin as our “pin.”
TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
CHAPTER II,
THE ARTICLE.
—E ET —
1. In the Tibetan colloquial, both of the so-called Articles
are to be heard in constant use.
The Indefinite Article, in : brother. Jha : tea. Hlam : boot
ik : aye. L om : box. Gang : hill. Khyim : hou ;
a fire Jung : wind. Ming: name. Luk : sl or,
Ch : v er. Do: stone. Dul: journey. Ti: ’ knife
wg: tree. Jhyd: bird, Lak, hand © Dies Lote
. / : oat.
The above are naturally some of the simplest and most
commonly occurring words in the language.
. ot the particles found conjoined with the roots of nouns
ie first variety are pa, wa, and a. These may hardly be
FORM AND ETYMOLOGY. 23
«aid to be used or not used at pleasure; but when any
adjective 18 employed with the noun, the particle belonging
to the noun is sometimes dropped, though its retention is
always permissable :—
Sam-pa: bridge. Kang-pa: leg. GQom-pa : monastery.
Mia-pa : mist. Dé-wa : the moon. Ngur-wa: red duck.
P’or-pa: cup. Kyd-wa : oar. To-wa : victuals.
Pik-pa: pig. Chhar-pa : rain. Ti'-pa : belly.
Ti-pa : smoke. Rau-a: 8 fence. Chhu-pa : over-coat,
Khau-a: snow. Ko-a: hide-boat. T’o-a: hammer.
Another series of substantives assume a second syllable in
po, wo, and bo—affixes which in composition are occasionally
dropped :—
Le-po : a basket. Dhé-wo : buck wheat.
Te-po : an axe. No-wo: younger brother.
Tok-po: a friend. Chhu-wo : a river.
Gyal-po : a king. Re-wo : yak-skin canvas.
Ting-po: a pipe. T’¢h-bo : the thumb.
Tang-po : @ beggar. Da-o : comrade.
Provincially the affix po is frequently heard as bo; e. g-,
Puai-bo for Palpo: a Nipal man; pombo or even bombo for
pompo : any official or head man—used also as form of
address: Pombo ¢ Officer,” Sir!” Again, wo often seems
to lose the w sound, as 10-0 for mo-wo, and pd-o for Ppd-wo
« dare-devil.” Many nouns in po denote distinctly the male
sex. Added to the participle, po expresses the doer of an
action : lab-pa-po, «the speaker.”
Certain substantives take ma Or mo—3a non-removable
affix :—
Nyi-ma : the sun. Jhye-ma : sand. Tdb-mo: a fight.
Lo-ma : a leaf. Chi-ma : a tear. Long-mo : alms.
Wo-ma : milk. Zi-ma : eyelashes. Rol-mo: music.
chief monk. Dhe-mo : the elbow. GQong-mo : evening.
La-ma :
Chong-mo : thimble.
Ping-kyu-ma : a Kite. Yor-mo: a sail.
In general, be it noted, mo indicates a feminine noun; but
the above examples are not of that class—a class to be
illustrated hereafter.
|
i
ib
|
t
|
{
24
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Other sets of particles, similar }
bso, chia +— p 8, similarly attached, are kd, Lhd, ghd,
Chhi-ka or . i 1: pi
Clhila fothing. Jogi: piste (on cloth)
Jed. . : ©
Le ka : work, a task. ~~ Chem-tse: scissors
a vd: Smo. Ya-tse : a duck
Giin-kd : winter. Dzé-tse : smok 1 C
Log-d : lightning. Ken-za : nirense,
Lm ines pathway. Pé-chhd : book or
Long td : guts. Lap-chha : talk, a chat.
ang-serkiui : crevasse. Toss ood particutars.
Fal)-ghd bough. La-chha : sealing Wax.
: yo-ghd : usband. Lo-chhd : woman's chatelaine.
0 these may be added examples of words taking ap-
pen ices regarded as diminutive affixes, though the effect
in question is not always apparent :— ’ ”
Pu qu: a child. Tong-bhu : a hole
Lu-gu ‘ lamb. Sham-bhu : cap.
4 g-gu : pigeon. Sing-bhw : mare’s milk
yu-gr: pen. Dhung-bhu : love
Ung-gu : lamp. Ts'ul-lu : fat.
A finger. Kyal-lu : cloth bag
os gu : kernel. Ts al-lu : a cock “
A : uncle. Twr-ru : a foal.
A mg-hi : cradle. Khye-u : infant
Sku : the nose. Le-u : cha ster
ok the chin. Pe-u : calf, i.
Dhil-bhu : bell. A-yu (or a-yo) : puppy.
S— Originally a monosyllabic language, the modern style
would seem to prize compound forms. Thus the second or
compound class of nouns, including dissyllables and tri
syllables, is being continually augmented. Such words a
yllables, . ‘ds are
either ik ect compounds of two or more distinct words crude
y conjoined to express some complex thing or derived idea :
0 else they are mere paraphrases and euphemisms, signify.
ing simple things, which have at length crept into ordinar
use, superceding the ancient and more direct monosyllables,
In the subjoined examples we shall not discriminate between
the regular ¢ ;
e regular compounds and the paraphrases, merely adding
FORM AND ETYMOLOGY. 25
that some of the latter are of ancient lineage, and that no
simpler word for the thing indicated in such cases has been
ever apparently in use :—
Ndm-chhol or) ty ooo. Mé-tok : flower.
Am-chhok : ’ Shom-dap : leaf (large).
Ndm-tsul : the nose, muzzle. Jha-tsi : rat.
Menda : gun. Tsi-tsv : mouse.
She-dang : anger. Kéng-Sak : a pipe.
Sha-nye : lead. Dang-rok : neighbour,
Sha-kar : tin. Men-shar : girl.
Gle-long : monk. Shiim-mar-pa : lamp.
Am-chhu : physician. Lek-bham : a volume.
Lolk-nyo : spoon. Shing-ta : cart.
O-mo-su : stocking. Sa-lep : brick.
Vang-mik : ~~ room. Pdk-lep : loaf of bread.
Dhong-khyer : town. Gye-kar : window.
Yul-ts'o : village. Mik-yang : generosity.
Pur-nyi : trap. T’q-md-khd : ~~ tobacco.
The derivation of some of these, and other compound words
Such are me-tok © fire-button ” (Hower),
(room), mik-yang broad
ts’o-lak
is very quaint.
khang-mik < eye of the house ”’
eye” (gemerosity), si-lep flat earth” (brick),
« lake’s hand” (a creek), nyi-Ser nail of the sun’ (sun-
beam), sem-chen possessed of mind” (an animal), p’dk-suk
« gecret push” (bribery).
Deliberate compounds are of course very numerous, and
no instances need be specified ; however, as a general rule,
it may be accepted that every syllable of a compound word
in Tibetan has a distinct meaning. This rule may be even
extended to proper names and the names of places. Thus
Pemiong-chi monastery in Sikkim is really Pema Yangtse
« the offering-bowl of lotos-flowers.”
4.—GENDER. A large number of nouns possess both a
masculine and a feminine form. The discrimination of
gender is generally indicated by the variation in the servile
particle ; although at the same time it must not be forgotten
that the mere presence of an affix, significant usually of
4
26
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
male or female sex respectively, does not in Tibetan invariably
convey the notion of any particular gender. Many substan-
tives terminate with the feminine particle mo which have
none save a common gender :—
My :
Khyo-po :
a man.
husband.
(or Khyo-ghd.)
Pu-tsa :
J hd-pa :
Lang-to :
A-p'd :
Yab :
Na-wo :
Gii’po :
Po-yak :
Gyal-po :
Yi-pa :
Réi-po :
Gur-po 3
Ta-po :
Chyil-pa :
boy.
cock.
bull.
father.
father.
host.
father-in-law.
male yak,
king.
male lad, offspring.
an old man.
a crooked man.
horse.
thatched hut.
Mo :
Khyo-mo :
Pu-mo :
Jhd-mo :
Bhd-mo :
A-ma :
Yum :
Na-mo :
Gii’mo :
Dimo :
Gyal-mo :
Mo-vyi :
Réi-mo :
Gur-mo :
Ti go’ma :
woman (general
term bhii’me’).
wife (usual term
kyer-mén ).
girl.
hen.
COW.
mother.
mother (honorific
terms).
hostess.
mother-in-law.
female yak.
queen.
female child, girl.
an old woman.
a crooked woman.
mare (also gi’-ma
alone).
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
Kyermén chi’ : A wife.
Nom : Kyermén chi’ : Avoe -
Gen : Kyermén kyu: > wis
Dat: Kyermén la ts ol by ay .
8: Kyermén or Kyermen (a: .
Boa her na (or tsame) : On or at a wife.
: ( ife.
Ablat : Kyermén ne (Or le) : Pow au
n ky : a wife.
Agentive : Kyermen ky : y
— This common word is often heard sounded as if 1b
(N. B.
were Kimmen.)
A slight variation is made in the affixes attached x ie
Genitive and Agentive cases when the di decline 2
in the letter k or ng. Thus ghyok hit a OR ht
comes ghyok-ghi: © of a cannon, Jog 7: ih
cannon.” So also chhdng : “beer; ch a
beer;” chhing-g/a : <« hy beer.” Where the ” wi
terminates with a vowel, the same two cases are also : 2
as in the subjoined example :—
male dweller in a
} Chyil-ma : female ditto.
Bhe-to : bull-calf. Bhe-mo : cow-calf.
Pal-po-pa : man of Nipal. Pdl-po-ma : woman of Nipal.
Bhi’pa or Bhi’mi : Tibetan man. Bhi'mo : Tibetan woman.
Ming-po : brother of a girl. Sing-mo : sister of a man,
Shar-pa : young men. Shar-ma : young women.
Poré : male kid. Mo-re : female kid.
Pape ®E) father and his Mdm’ FHT) mother and her
offspring. offspring.
B.—DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
1. In the Tibetan tongue the relationship of the noun
to other words or, in grammatical phraseology, the different
cases of the noun, must be expressed by means of short
syllables styled Postpositions, placed immediately after the
word to be declined. A Noun Substantive may be thus
arranged in the form of a Declension :—
Méabjhd 8h’: A peacock.
k.
: Mdbjhd Sha: A peacock.
hy Ml hi yi or Mabjht : Of a pasnock,
Dat : Mabjha la bi i. de
: Mdbihd or Mabjha ta : k.
Locat Mit jh na (or tsdna) : On or At a peacock.
rs ] From a peacock.
Ablat : Mdbjhd ne : 2
Agentive : Mabjhd yi : By a peacoc
ove, Jaeschke adds what he
made use of ab
To erm « into,” “unto; ” but
terms the Terminative case, implying y
ith it 1 lloquial idiom.
have not met with 1t 1 CO
a those words In which the final vowel is 0, we have ts
Genitive oi, as jo-mo: “2 milch-yak,” jo-mot : « of a mile -
ak.’ If the word end in i, the Genitive usually takes yi,
bat in words of two syllables ending in 4, we often hear ys :
y 3 . 2? AA : a
2 » khyi-yi: of a dog; gya-!
e. a., khyi : “a dog, | 8
cha 2 yi fickyi « of a chair.” With a final e¢ the Geni
y v
28 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
tive requires yi, while the vowel u takes i alone, as fe :
“the fire,” 7mé-yi: «of the fire; p’u-gu: “a child,” Pp u-
gu-i: “of a child.”
The Article di when it follows the noun makes a Genitive
in either yi or kyi. We frequently hear di-kyi : of the.”
The Vocative case differs from the other cases, in that it
is preceded by an exclamatory syllable and requires no post-
position—Kye limd : “ O lama!” Ho-kye kyapgin: <0 pro-
tector | We tok-po : ¢O friend ;” “ Well, friend!” Accent
or stress is usually laid on the last syllable of the noun in
the Vocative. Often the prefixed syllable is dropped in
quiet address : Lhachdm, t'wje chhe : « Thank-you, lady!”
2. Tue Pruran Numser is not always formally expressed
in Tibetan. Whenever the substantive is accompanied by
any numeral or by such adjectives as ¢sgome,” < all,”
“many,” the use of which naturally implies a plural signi-
fication, then the singular is invariably heard. Otherwise
the Plural affix may be added to the word either as #s’o or
as chd (chdk) and sometimes as nam :—
Pi-ling-ts’o : “* Englishmen.”
>
Gen: P’i-ling-t'soi :
Dat: P’i-ling-ts’o la :
Accus: P’i-ling-ts’o la :
Locat : P’i-ling-ts’o na :
Vocat: Wé Pi-ling-ts'o :
Ablat : P’i-ling-ts’o nai or ne:
Agentive : P’i-ling-ts'o :
Of the Englishmen.
To the Englishmen,
The Englishmen.
In the Englishmen.
O Englishmen !
From the Englishmen.
By the Englishmen.
As to the alternative affix chd, it is added mostly to
inanimate nouns—tokise: table,” toktse-chd: tables.”
3. Usk or THE CasEs.—a. The Genitive is employed to
signify both possession and quality, and when it is in any
way a part of the subject of a sentence the word in the
Genitive stands first in the order of words in the sentence.
As expressive of Possession we find the usual construction,
29
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
i. e., the boy’s dog” is the dog of the boy,” ors Job fs
Tibetan rendering is in form closely like the Par ish order;
Putsd-yi (or Putsé) khyi di: © of boy the dog. tian
B. Where the Genitive is a Genitive of quality § asst
the character of an adjective. This Genitive fe PE
precedes the noun which 1b describes. Ex: ngul- i u nr
« o silver image 3°’ shing-ght khyvm : “a wooden ouse ,
Bh’kyi Tha : ser-dok for ser-kyi dog: © g
. ‘
ene phrases can also be expressed by means ° [is
formed from the respective substantives (Chap. AX, ) to
y. The Genitive seems, furthermore, to be resortel >
in order to indicate a less obvious relationship than : a °
mere possession. Thus ¢« an ear-ring >’ is nad-kor, eon ee
from nd-yi kor; a‘ water-tub”’ or tub for ater is ch w
Som; a‘ day’s wage,” 18 iyin-la from ry nn
kong from num kyi rong = ¢ an oil basin ; nak- Lum . n
Adk-ght bhumpa (“fla sk of ink ’’)=‘“inkstand;” an °
forth. In this manner in fact a large number of compoun
; ucted.
Te Dative with la is found after verbs of giving,
shewing, and speaking. Thus we hear :—
Give the dog water.
Mi-la lam di teng-nang : Shew the man the way.
4 : Speak to him gently.
ho- po lap : I pie
Bo virang-ghi ming lap : Tell the Sahib your name.
Khyi-la chhu ter :
In the foregoing examples we must note khyi-la “to the
dog,” mi-la (or mi-po-la) to the man,” kko-la to him,
og, >
Jusho-la to the Sahib.”
g
f
|
i
|
30 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Motion towards is seldom expressed colloquially by the
Dative. The ordinary style is with some compound post-
position (the Tibetan preposition) such as #ukpa unto,”
“up to,” or fsd-ne meaning ‘near ;’’ the use of the latter
being precisely analogous to the use of pas in Hindustani
and being linked like pas to the noun by the Genitive affix.
(See Chap. VIII, 3. Examples). However in such phrases
as these la is frequently heard :—
Gompa-la song : Go to the temple.
Khyim-la song : Go home, (vuly., “ Nang-la song.”)
Further remarks upon the use of la, as a Locative rather
than a Dative affix, will be found in Chapter VIII, 2.
e. The Accusative requires no affix in sentences having
a remote as well as a proximate object; e. g.—
Ngdrang-la woma nang : Give me the milk.
(Woma is here the proximate object placed in the Accusative.
ngarang-la = to me.)
Again where the remoter object is unexpressed :—
shing khur shok : Fetch the wood.
td-po du t'1 : Lead the horse.
However the Accusative, when it is the object of any
direct action, takes the affix la: e. g.—
(1) Kho-yi ta-la dung-ki-duw’ : He is beating the horse.
(Lit: Kho-yi by him, td-la the horse, dung-ki-du’ is
beating).
(2) Dhe-la likpa ma t'uk : Don’t touch it, (Dhe-la = “it,”)
Or where it is the object of any passive feeling :—
(3) The mother loves the son: Amd-yi pu-la tse-dung jhe.
(tse-dung jhe’pa = ‘“ to love”).
(4) Remember me: Ngd-la sem-la ngei!
(Lit: Nget be sure, sem-la in mind, ngd-la, as to me).
But we hear
(5) Go di gyak : Shut the door.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 31
to be used instead of the
bs whether the verb be in
This important rule
les above) is fully
». The Agentive case ought
Nominative with all transitive ver
the Present, Past or Future tense.
(see (1) and (3) of the last four examp
explained in a later chapter.
Em
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER IV.
ADJECTIVES,
err ENE LT eens
1. The adjective almost invariably follows its noun
In the common speech of the people. Very frequently in
literary Tibetan, however, we find it placed before the
noun it qualifies and, when in that position, instead of
agreeing with the noun as to Case, it invariably takes the
Genitive Case. To place the adjective immediately pre-
ceding the noun is also pefectly allowable in collo Pl
Tibetan, but such order of the words is only occasionally
resorted to, though when ut vs practi ot
practised the adject
then be heard in the Genitive. Joctive must
2. When the adjective—as indeed it nearly always
does—follows the substantive, it receives the inflexions
which would, otherwise, belong to the substantive. In
other words, the case-signs are then attached to the ad-
jective instead of to the noun-substanti ich it i
ee antive which i-
ne Thies oe ich it is quali
Nam miin-po ch’ : A dark nigh
os ° ‘ht.
Putsa tsok-pa-i vak dz : The hand of a dirty boy.
(Note : The order of the words in these sentences is exactly
the reverse of tl i rg . :
the.) of the English orders: e. g. “ Boy dirty of hand
Dhe’-mé chhempo di-yi mik serpo di : The yellow eye of the large
bear.
(Here the adjectives used are chhe
the ad; : > »mpo and serpo. The definite
article di being used with the adjective hemo Te na
ADJECTIVES, 33
article and not the adjective receives the Genitive affix. As in
Tibetan composition the Genitive-words generally stand first in
the sentence, we have here also in the Tibetan an exact reversal
of the English order of the words :— Bear great the of eye yellow
the.” This reverse order does not obtain in all or even many
instances.)
Di lo-ma lenchen-kyi sd-la shd’-dhu du : The leaf down on the wet
ground.
(Here lenchen * wet,” the adjective qualifying sd * the ground,”
is placed before its noun and therefore stands with the Genitive
affix. Note, also, the article belonging to lo-ma is repeated so as
to lock in with it all direct enlargement or expansion of the
subject.)
3. When it is necessary that the plural number should be
expressed otherwise than by implication, the plural particle
is attached to the substantive and not to the adjective : Mik-
cha serpo “ yellow eyes .? Mi-ts’o hampachen : greedy men ;”’
ta-po-ts’o Rakpo karpo black-and-white horses; td-po fak
td-po kar : « black horses and white horses.”
4. Nearly all adjectives in the colloquial which are not
derived from substantives are found with the particle po
attached. Sometimes this termination may be dropped as
in the last-quoted example; but this elision is more frequent
in the written than in the spoken language. In certain
particular adjectives the affix po is varied to mo when
used with a feminine noun ; but frequently no notice of the
gender is taken and the adjective in po is coupled with a
feminine substantive. On the other hand, a number of
adjectives used indiscriminately with either masculine or
feminine nouns carry the affix mo which then bears no
sexual signification.
The following adjectives are known to vary the affix ac-
cording to the gender of the noun to be qualified :—
Marpo—mo : red. Chhorpo-mo : handsome.
Ndkpo-mo : black. T'0-0 Tomo : angry.
Karpo-mo : white. Ringpo-mo : tall, long.
S
34 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Ohhyukpo-mo : rich. Dhungpo—mo : cautious, retiring.
Sarpo-mo : young, fresh, Chholpo-mo : licentious.
un-polluted. Sharwa—mo : blind.
Rilpo—mo : round. Ulpo—-mo : poor.
Shdwo-mo : lame.
But these adjectives, terminating in mo, are common in
gender :—
G4-mo : ~~ middling. Sem-kyo-po : disappointed.
Le-mo : good. Ship-mo : thorough, minute.
She'mo: strong. Ngo-yangmo : gay, sportive.
Yangmo : light (not heavy). Sab-mo : smart, spruce.
Démo : well, happy. Den-mo : naked (also jem-pa).
Ts’emmo : hot. Dhak-mo : clean (also dhakwa).
Dhimmo : Warm. Stlmo : cool.
Dhongmé : cold (also dhongwa). Kyurmo : sour.
Dhalmo: calm, quiet, still. Ngarmo : sweet. fluids).
Ldamo : easy (of a task, &c.) Gharmo : thick, dense (of
Bolmo : soft, yielding. Tamo : thin (also “pow-
Sra-mo: hard, solid. dery,” “finely
divided.”)
5. There are many adjectives which do not take the
affixes po or mo. All derivative adjectives are simple roots
with such paraphrastic syllables as chen: possessed of,”
chhok, «fit for,” annexed. (See Chap. XI, 4 « and B.)
Those formed from substantives by annexing chen make a
lengthy list; and if the opposite qualification has need to
be expressed the syllable chen is replaced by me’, which
signifies without,” ¢ free from” :—
Shengchen : broad. Khoi-chen : important.
Shengme’ : Narrow. Khoi-me’ : unimportant.
Si-chen: brilliant.
Si-me’ : dull, obscured. Gydkme : thin, meagre.
Nyd’chen : durable, well-made. Ts ulchen : just.
Nyome' : fragile, flimsy. Ts'ulme’ : unjust.
Rin-chen : precious. T§erchen : uneasy, anxious.
Rin-me’ : worthless. Ts'erme’ : mot anxious, easy.
Gydlechen or gydkshd: fat, stout.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 35
6. Amother series of adjectives, colloquially much favour-
ed, are re-duplicated forms, which generally express continu-
ous or flowing action, or qualities of that easy or undulating
nature :—
Lhap-lhup : loose, unconfined. Seng-seng : weak (of tea, &c.)
Ril-ril : oval. Leb-leb: flat.
Kor-kor : round. Ts'im-ts'im : dazzled.
Hrab-lrip: dim, glimmering. Yor-yor : aslant.
Jam-jam : smooth. Gop-gop : stiff, powerless.
Sam-sum : low (in sound). Wiale-wdle : clear, distinct.
Shong-8hong : hollow, excavated. Gur-gur: crooked.
7. When the adjective is used as an attribute, the affix
po is occasionally omitted :—
The pomegranates are fresh: Sendu di sar yin (sar, not sarpa).
The flower is red and yellow: Me-tok di mar dhang ser yin.
Khyi di chhe yin or khyt di chhempo yin.
Gong di chhung yin (“price ”” is also rin).
The dog is large:
The price is small :
8. The adjective can be rendered more intense by various
words or syllables placed before it: hdchang, much, very,
too; rab-tu very, especially ; tsa-wa-ne, quite :—
The path is very narrow : Lamkhi di hdchang t d-po re’.
The horse is too fat : Té-po di rab-tu gyakpd yin.
The bridge is very slanting: Sampa di hdchang yorpo yin.
The knife is perfectly blunt: Ti di tsa-wa-ne no-me’ du’.
Sometimes the word hd-chang like fsa-wa assumes the
ablative affix nai or né:—Khorang hé-chang-ne chhor yin :—
He is very handsome.
Other intensives to the adjective are vil (meaning “round”’)
and chhe (meaning much,” great”). These, however,
follow the adjective :—
A horse quite white: Td-po kar ril.
Very muddy water : Chhu nyokpo chhe.
The pass-top is very indistinct : Laptse dhe hrab-hrep chhe dw’.
A perfectly flat plain: 1" ang leb-leb ril ch’.
36 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
I am quite lame and very tired: Ngdrang la khong ril dhérung
hdchang-ne t’ ang-chhe-po jhung.
Note.—The last sentence runs literally: “to me has arisen
(jhung) to be quite lame and very tired.”
9.—COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
a. The expedient for making comparison of the quality
of things is akin to the method of the Hindi language to
the south of Tibet, and to that of the Mongolian language to
the north of Tibet. It is brought about by means of a
certain arrangement of the words of the sentence and by
the introduction of the postposition le, meaning ¢ than.”
To give an example :—
Tibet is larger than Sikkim : Ddi-jong le Pi’yul chhem-po du’.
Examining the Tibetan we find it runs: Ddi-jong le
« than Sikkim,” P#’yul Tibet,” chhempo “large,” dw’
“is.”
This order of words must be strictly observed, otherwise
the comparative intention will not be evident. Another
example :—
The sun is more brilliant Dd-wa le nyima di §i-chen du’.
than the moon :
Again, the order runs: Than moon, the sun, brilliant is.
This stirrup-strap is longer Zhem-ma le yop-t'ak di ring (or
than the other:
He is honester than you :
ring-po) du’.
Khyirang le kho shama du’.
To-day is finer than yesterday : Dang-le dhering le’-pa du’.
When the comparative degree occurs apart from any
compared object, the words Dhe-la, ¢ than that,” may be
introduced for the sake of perspicuity :—
A firmer ice-ridge : Khyak-sam dhe-le tempo chik.
A more honest priest: Lama shd-ma lhak chi’.
SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 87
B. The superlative degree is usually paraphrased into an
universal comparative. So in the sentence: * He is the
tallest,” we should hear, Than all he tall is.” But
« than’ would be now rendered by nang-ne instead of by le.
This peak is high; that peak is higher; that other peak
is the highest: Di zoktse di o-a dw; dhe-le di wip da
to-wa du’ ; ts’angma nang-mne voktse Shem-ma di t0-sho dw’.
N. B.—Di means “this,” or “that” according to Tibetan
phraseology, if it represents the present object of reference. Any
past object of reference is denoted by dhe, whether we 1n our
English colloquial style it “this” or “that.” ts'angma nang-ne
means ‘ than all.”
Another popular mode of indicating the superlative degree
is compassed by adding the syllable shot or sho to the
adjective. And thie is often used without introducing
«than all.” Thus :—
That temple is the most Di gompa di Po'-kyi-yul kyi rak-
famous in Tibet : chen-shot du’.
This animal is the smallest : Dhiid-do di chhung-sho dw’.
Lhésa is the greatest city : Lhdsd dhong-khyer chhe-shot dw’.
That sheep is the whitest : Luk dhe kdr-shé du’.
Note.— When shot is appended, the affix po of the adjective is
always omitted. Also, the arrangement of the words in the
sentence is not of importance when shoi is employed. Akin to
shot is the word chhok, often confounded with it, which means
«the best.” Chhok is also added to adjectives to form an empha-
tic superlative. In comparing, however, yakpo = *‘ good ” and
ydk-sho or tdk-sho = “best.”
y. For such comparisons as involve the connexion ‘so—
»
as,” e. g., “so great as,” “so good as,” ‘ as far as,” see
post, Chap. VII, 4, iv. v.
38
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
ADJECTIVES WITH SUBSTANTIVES.
Chhu-pa lonpa :
Shuten bolpo :
Pu-mo ya'po :
Na-ku marpo :
Pugu nying-jhémo :
Chi’ pe’ kyurmo :
Shim-shim dhi’chen :
Ldma chhempo :
Go chhung-ngu :
Mo-yi chhung :
Menshar khe’pa :
Chhu dhang-mo :
Chhu dhang-po :
Lam ton-khen yerpo :
Solwa nyukchen :
Khydalpa bimpo :
Sokma kampo :
Kyermen t’o-mo :
Mz-po t'o-0 :
Lamkhd §hengme’ :
Me-tok kar-po :
Khau-d ling-po :
Pe-chhda numtsi :
Shei-hor rinchen :
Putsa hurpo :
Nyd-ra dukchen :
Jol-t’a dzepo :
Jha karbo :
Tukpa chutchen :
Woma rul :
Ta yipchen :
Tu shimpo :
Gyd-o ringpo :
a wet coat.
a soft seat.
a good daughter.
red nose.
darling child.
sour lemon.
delicious sweetmeats.
great lama.
small head.
little girl.
clever maiden.
cold water.
clear water.
cautious guide.
ceaseless prayers.
thick ice.
dry straw.
angry woman.
angry man.
narrow path.
white flower,
firm snow.
greasy book.
costly hookah,
sharp boy.
poisonous air.
pretty jolmo (a bird).
strong tea.
strong soup.
putrid milk.
fine (shapely) horse.
a sweet smell.
a long beard.
CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMERALS. 39
CHAPTER V.
CARDINAL AND ORDINAL
NUMERALS.
—ee ENE BY
1. In Tibetan the numbers, both cardinal and ordinal
can be used either as adjectives or as substantives. Used
in the adjectival sense, the numeral invariably follows the
noun which it qualifies; and, if there happens to be any
ordinary adjective likewise attached to the noun, then the
numeral is placed after such adjective :—
A-yu kyong-po sum : Three expensive puppies.
Wé-pdk-kyi §hdamo ngd : Five fox-skin hats.
[Here wd pdk is a substantive placed in the genitive; the literal
meaning being * five hats of fox-skin.”,]
-§hip-chu lep jhung : 440 lamas are present.
Lama §hi-gyd ;
dhang re-sum Yo :
Ang-ki di té-ts'o-sum dhang tong-t'a gye
The number is 38, 063.
ans the number; while 38, 063 is thus
[Here ang:ki di me and eight thousand and sixty-
expressed : Three ten thousands
three. Yi is the auxiliary.]
« the four,” the two,” “or both,”
. Such forms as
: ° the number:
&c., may be expressed by adding ka or po to u :
§hi-ka, myi-ka. Fractions by annexing chhd, as diin-chhd
«the seventh.” Multiplies by prefixing len, as len-nyv
« twice,” len-ngd * five times.”
3. The ordinals annex pa to the cardinal, except “ the
first’ which is dhang-po, as sum-pa third.” However,
<¢ thirty-first” is sum-chu chikpa, &ec., not sum-chu dhangpo.
40 t TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
In conversation it is usual not to employ the bare ordinal
alone, but to prefix the word ang-ki to each. Thus * the
eighth >’ is expressed as ang-ki gye-pa :—
Mi dhe khang-pa ang-ki dhang-po la do’ gi-yo’ : That man lives in
the first house.
Su ang-ki dhang-po lep t'up yong ; toi-dhang : See! who can get
first.
It is even prefixed to juk-shi’ or 8huk-ma ‘the last >’ :—
Mi §hem-ma dhe khangpa ang-ki juk-sho’la di’-gi-yo’ : That other
man lives in the last house.
4. GENERAL Remarks. — a. When two, three or more
persons or things have been mentioned, it is a common
custom to add the exact number of individuals or things
thus enumerated. For example we might have such a
sentence as: ¢ The father, mother, with two sons and a
daughter arrived at the town; » and, most probably if such
were spoken in Tibetan, after the last person mentioned the
numeral « five” would be introduced as indicating the total
number of persons referréd to: Pu nyi pumo dhang yab yum
ngd dhong-kyer la pep jhung (lit: © Father, mother, with
two sons daughter five arrived at the town >’), Again, when
the number would be otherwise obscure: “The woman
and her husbands (four) were turned out.” This, the exact
rendering of the Tibetan would indicate, not that the woman
had four husbands, but that she and her three husbands,
making together four, were ejected. So, also, if a woman
and her two children were to be mentioned : in Tibetan, we
should say kyermen dhang p’ugw sum = « Woman and her
children three,” meaning that together the whole numbered
three. This habit of speech causes Tibetan enumerations to
be not always obvious. Another instance: 8ang-bhu chhem-
po chhung nyi: ¢ large small degchies, two,” 1. e., « two deg-
chies, a large and a small.”
CARDINAL NUMERALS. 41
B. When alternative estimates of numbers are made, the
conjunctions are omitted: e.g. Sum §hi khur shok Bring
three or four.”
y. Itisa frequent practice to add the numeral chik “ one ”’
to any specified statement of numbers.
Thus we wight hear: Dhu-khd Chak-5am-la Tang-tong
Gye-por chherten gyd-tsi-gye chik tsik-pa re’ meaning
« At the Chaksam ferry Tang-tong Gyalpo built one hundred
and eight chhortens,” but literally “ built one (or “a ’) one
hundred and eight chhortens.” Again: Lima sok-nyi chik
pep Jhung One (or “a”) thirty-two lamas have come.”
The conclusion is that the best rendering of this superfluous
chik is by our indefinite pronoun some.” However chik
indicates a definite and not an indefinite number ; accordingly
when any doubt as to the exact number exists, the word tsam
follows the numeral with the meaning of ¢ about” or
“almost; e.g. luk sumchw tsam ¢ about thirty sheep.”
5 -CARDINAL NUMERALS.
Chik 3A] 9. Gu Sli
Nyi TRE 10. Chu-témba ISIN
oy 11. Chuchik.
Sum alNE 12. Chunyi.
~ 13. Chusum,
Shi Aq 14. Chupshi.
15. Chonga.
Loar 16. Chudhuk.
Nga 2 17. Chudiin.
18. Chopgye’.
’ 19. Chupgu.
Dhule XT 20. Nyi-sh,
.. am 21 . Nyer-chik,
Diin 9 22, Nyer-nyl.
~ 30. Sum-chu-t’amba.
Gye’ QAR 31. So-chik.
A 32. Sok-nyl.
0
—_ mre a A
eee eA — A ————— tt tere ee
42 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. FORMATION.
33. Sok-sum. 300. Sum-gya
33. Sok-s : gya.
34. So-shi. i 340. Sum-gya-ship-chu.
40. Ship-chu-t'dmba. 1000, Tong-t’a chik.
41. She-chik. 1001. Tong-t'a chik dhang
42. She-nyi. chik, ’
50. Ngé-chu-t’4mba. 2000. Tong-t'4 nyi
5. Ned-chik. 2161. Tongt'a my i. CHAPTER VI.
3 Tong-t’a nyi dhang
60. RE wn amba; or chik-gya-dhang-re-
e-sum. chik. VERB.
61. Re-chik. 2780. Tong-t’4 nyi dhang a THE
62. Re-nyi. diin-gya-tsa-gye’- a
70. Dito ain Himba. chu-tamba. 3 — ESS
1. on-chik. 5500. Tong-nea dh 4- 1
80. Gye’-chu-t’amba. bog chang ned
: , zy A SECTION A.—FORMATION.
8l. Gya-chik, 10,000. T’i-ts’o chik. i
82. Gyd-nyl. 20,000. T’i-t’so nyi. j semgert=
iy Gu-chnt amba. 86,000. Ti-ts'o Jum dhang a 1. In the language of the books we find the different
tong-t'a dhuk. ; modifications or tenses of the Verb expressed in two ways.
: , =_.. 100,000. Bum-chik. iu
100. Chik-gya-t'amba SA) 300,000. Bumts’o sum, E Sometimes the structure of the verbal root itself is altered
1,000,000. Sa-ya. i in order to produce these modifications, the spelling being
QF ANY” A Score : Khe-chik. 3 oo )
IA A Hundred: Gya-t'4k. x changed according to the tense exhibited. At other times
101. Gyé-dhang-chik. By Threes: Sum sum. i the required shade of meaning is brought out by means of
102. Gyé-dhang-nyi or Gyé- By Fours: Shi shi. 4 ye .
: i additional syllables—one or more—appended to the simple
tsa-nyi. Two each: Nyi-re-nyi-re.
200. Nyi-gya. ox each: Dhuk-re dhuk-re. | 1 root. Such affixes are either mere particles or else the
201. Nyi-gya-tsa-chik. wice : Len-nyi. 3 . ‘lin i .
210. Nyi-gyi-dhang-chu- Thrice : Len som. 1 various parts of some auxiliary verb, In the colloquial,
a this treatment with syllables affixed to the root seems to be
t’amba. 100 times: Len-gya.
220. Nyi-gyd nyi-shu. almost the sole way of dealing with the various phases of the
verb. The practice in the literary language of forming the
tenses by changing the spelling of the simple root is in a
few instances, however, resorted to in the colloquial.
The simplest form of the verb is, naturally, the bare root
unattended by any affix. However if we are to resort to the
ordinary European practice of presenting the Infinitive as
the primary shape, we must in Tibetan set forth each root
with a particle already adjusted.
The particle thus added to the verbal root for the pro-
duction of the Present Infinitive is invariably either pa or
wa, the former being affixed where the final letter of the
yoot is any consonant save r orl, while wa is used aiter
44 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
those consonants and after a final vowel. So many of the
final letters being dropped in the colloquial, the application
of this rule will therefore be not always observable in these
pages, our present scheme being the representation of the
words not as written but only as they are sounded. Thus
we have :-—
Jhye'pa : to do; Li-pa: to be left, to remain.
These are words which in the written forms have d and s
respectively as final letter of the root, and not as here a
vowel, and which therefore take pa instead of wa. The
specified rule, nevertheless, is easily traceable in the examples
subjoined :—
Yong-wa : to come. Lok-pa : to read.
Do-wa: to go. Lap-pa : to speak.
Nyo-wa : to buy. Pab-pa : to take down.
Sher-wa : to measure, Nyen-pa : to hear.
appraise. Chhin-pa : to arrive.
Jal-wa : to measure zing-pa : to fight.
(length, &c). P’ep-pa : honorific term for either
Sd-wa: to eat. “to come” or ‘‘ to go.”
Pul-wa : to give (hon.)
9. To view the elements of the formation of the verb in
the regular course of its development and elaboration we
shall properly deal next with the
SUBSTANTIVE VERBS.
Of these there are several forms in use, namely :—
Yixrea (sounded Yimpa): “to be »__the mere auxiliary.
Re'pa: to be ’—another auxiliary.
Yo'pa: “to be,” “to exist,” “to be present” (in a place.)
Du’ea (really Dukpa): ‘to be,” “to exist,”—most common in
‘Western Tibet.
SN
Cumi-ra: (NBA) “to be,” “to exist "—polite form.
Liias-rA (generally sounded Ld-pa) “to be” auxiliary employ-
ed instead of Yinpa addressing superiors.
SUBSTANTIVE VERBS.
MEe’pa : “to be not ’—negative form of Yi'pa.
Mé'pa: to be indeed ”—intensive variety of Yi'pa.
Mix-pA : “not to be ’—the negative copula.
«. The Present tense, Indicative, of all these verbs is
the respective root of each standing alone; and this root
is employed for all persons and both numbers :—
Thus: yin = am, art, 1s, are.
And so with Y&, Re’, Dv’, La.
Yin, however, is restricted in use to the connection of
the noun with an attribute whether adjective, noun or pro-
noun, and to its duties as auxiliary affix to ordinary transi-
tive and intransitive verbs :—
Khyak-pa dhe tempo yin : That (or The) ice is firm.
Ming di Dondup yin : The name is Dondub.
Ngdrang P6'kyi mu yin: 1am a Tibetan.
However, when yin is conjoined, as it often is, with
Dw’pa, we frequently hear such combination used to express
existence in a place, but chiefly in negative and interroga-
tive sentences :—
Pe-chha di dhe-pa min-du’: The book is not there.
The auxiliary Re’ is very popular and heard commonly,
but not exclusively, in negative sentences. Its general use
is as a copulative, like yin :—
Khyi di ngarchen ma re’: The dog is not fierce.
Di ngat ma r€’ : This is not mine.
Di-ni Pd'kyi pe-chha re’ : This is a Tibetan book.
Nevertheless we have
Ghande ré’ : How are you ?
N. B.— Yin is more commonly used with the lst person, re’ with
the 2nd and 3rd persons.
In positive sentences we find re as a pleonastic addition
to the verb yo’pa :—
Khorana md-gi-la yo'pa re’ : He is down there.
Y
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Su yi'pa re’ : who is here ? Kho-pa ghdru yo'pa re’? Where
are they ?
We can employ Yd’pa more frequently than any other of
this series, and both Y&’pa and Dw’pa (though primarily
verbs of existence) may always take the place of Yin-pa in
attributive sentences, though Yin-pa cannot be substituted
for them : —
Khopa Gyang-tse-la yo’ : They are at Gyangtse.
Ngd-la dhe-pa tokpo §hi’ yo’ : I have a friend there (7. e.
To me there a friend 1s).
Di §himpo du’ : This is nice.
Ha-lai-pa yo’ : Tt is astonishing.
Yam-ts'empo dv’ : kho ge’po min-dw’ : It is wonderful : he is not
an old man.
Dzd-ra di-la shu-gu mi yo’ : The shrew has no tail.
N. B—Y# is more commonly used with the lst person, du’
with the 2nd and 3rd persons.
B. INTERROGATIVELY, the use of the Substantive Verbs is
as follows :—
Yimpe or Yinnd :
Duw'kd or Yinduw or E du’: Is it, is he, are you ?
Yi'pe or Yo'dhd or E yi’:
Di-la ghande é yo’ : Why are you here ?
Mi-ts’o su yimpe : Who are the men ?
Di-pa khyi da du’ka :
Nyi'la lukts'o khdshe yi'dhd : Have you some sheep ?
Are there any dogs here ?
If re’ is the verb chosen (as it is often), then the inter-
rogative tone of voice is sufficiently significant :—
Khyi di §ang-khyi re’ : Is the dog a real mastiff ?
Torma-yi kargyen di ghd re’ : Where are the torma butter-orna-
ments 7
Khyo' la hd-lai-pa re’ : Are you surprised ?
The negative question forms are mindw’, ma re’, me’pe.
Alternative interrogatives are frequent; and the most
SUBSTANTIVE VERBS. 47
common of these are the phrases du’ka mindw’ and yin-dw’
mindw’ (usually ’indw’ mindw’) meaning “is it or not?”
Also yinnam mannam and re’tang ma re’, the latter attribu-
tively :—
Pe-chha di choktse wokla dw'ka Ts the book under the table
maindu’ ? or not ?
Khyi da dw'kd mindw’ ; tot shok : Are there any dogs ornot; see!
Is (he) here or not ?
Is it deep or not ?
Di-pa indw’ mindw’ :
Sap-sap re’tang ma re’ :
Di-ni ngdi re’tang ma re’ : Is this mine or not ?
Emphatically re’ is annexed to yo’pa, as in :—
Di li di tengla khau-a yi'pa re’, me’pa re’: Is there snow on the
pass or not ?
Khyirang-la di-ka yi'pa re’, me’'pa re’: ‘Have you it or not ?
Also re’ ma re’ and yi’pe me’ are other forms, the former
being only used with attributes :—
Dhenda re’ ma re’: Is it so or not ?
Gimpe nangla pechha-ts’o yo'pe me’ : Are there any books in the
gompa or not ?
y. The Past tense of all these auxiliary forms can be
represented by either yi’pa yin or chhi dw’ i—
Khyi-yi dok di ndk-po yi’ pa yin: The colour of the dog was
black.
Ngdrang mi ngempo §hik song : IT have been a bad man.
Kho dhe-tii §hon-§hon yi'pa yin : He was young then.
Pé-chha §hik dirw chhi dw’ :
Ngd-la khd-tsang d-lich yo'pa yin: 1 had a little yesterday.
There was a book here.
’
Na-ning Dok-ghur dd sd-chha le Were there any nomads’
yi'pa yimpe : tents in this place last year?
Naturally for our ‘has been,” “have been,” the past
tense of “to go” is employed, which is either chhinpa yin
or song :—
Khyirang ghdru song : Where have you been ?
48 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
But of events yi’pa yin is rightly employed, and “was”
in the assertive sense is rendered by that or by chhi du’ or
chhi yi’ ; as in di chhi yi’ kyang, tanda ma yo’: “though
it was, now it is not,” &e. Again, yin ld is another perfect
auxiliary as in Ddk-la kap yin la “1 have had the oppor-
tunity.” (Lit. ‘To self opportunity was.”)
However the Tibetan idiom seems to avoid as much as
possible the resort to preterite tenses in the substantive
verb when the latter would stand alone. Nevertheless,
although the past tense of the verb “to be” when unsup-
ported is very infrequent ; yet, in combination with other
verbs, as auxiliaries such forms are common and indispens-
able.
5. Where the Future tense of the verb “to be” is called
for, do-wa “to go” and yong-wa «to come” are used
as bearing the additional meaning ¢ to become; ” also jhung-
wa ‘to arise” i—
Dharing ts’ da-po yong : Tt will be hot to-day.
Khyirang yakpo yong-gyu-yin : You will be good.
Nydrang dher jlung-yonyg : I shall be there.
«Will be” is also rendered by yong la (lags).
Such constructions can often be put as the ordinary future
of an impersonal verb. Thus in the sentence ¢ I shall be
sick? we resort to the future of the verb «to suffer by sick-
ness” (ne’kyi $irwa) using the dative of the personal pronoun.
So also “I shall be hot” can be transformed into ¢ Heat
will come to me” : ngdrang-la ts’d-wa yong-gyn-yun.
THE VERB ACTIVE. 49
SECTION B.—THE VERB ACTIVE.
I. Present Texse.—a. This tense is expressed in its
simplest form by just the root of the verb deprived of all
particles, saving of course in compound or connected sen-
tences when there is annexed—as explained hereafter—some
continuative particle (Infra. XIII, § 3.)
Ex: Gyuk-pa: to run: PRES. TENSE: gyuk : runs.
The modern colloquial has in most cases adopted for use,
both as infinitive and as indicative present, the perfect root
of the verb as it occurs in the written language. Thus
sdod-pa and sdod are the literary forms of the verb ‘to stay,
to remain,” in the infinitive and present; but the colloquial
has taken the past tense bsdad for these purposes, and has
dadpa and dad for «to stay » and ¢ he stays,” pronouncing
them however in accordance with the modern rule de’pa
and de’. (See: Chap. I, Note.)
B. But when we come to place before the present tense
(or other tenses) of a transitive verb some pronoun or any
other noun, we find there is in Tibetan no such thing as a
nominative case governing a verb and no such construction
as a nominative being used with a transitive verb. In fact
our conception of an ordinary simple sentence with subject,
predicate, and object, has properly no place in the Tibetan
mode of speech.
That which in European languages would be regarded as
the subject and which would be placed in the nominative
case is regarded in Tibetan as the agent by which a certain
action or condition is brought about and is placed in the
Agentive or Instrumental case, whilst the verb assumes
almost the signification of a participle or a verbal noun to
which, in the tenses other than the simple present, some
auxiliary verb is added. The object is put as with us in the
accusative. Thus the sentence: He wears a cap would in
Tibetan be turned in this way : By him a cap a wearing ts.
7
Bo i dR ==
1
"
+
if:
i
|
hs x n
x Fh eS
SS
as wa =
re tre I.
Cobian.
50 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
However, as Tibetan grammarians regard “a wearing
is” as the present tense of the verb ¢ to wear >’ and would
not render the verbal noun “a wearing” always in this
same manner, our theory of construction may be a mere
speculative nicety, nevertheless we should translate our
sentence into Tibetan Khorang-gi Shdmbhu ghon ; and from
thence merely deduce the practical rule that with a Tibetan
transitive verb the nominative must be rendered by the
agentive case.
Moreover—as if to render our remarks still less important—
it must be admitted that in loose easy speech the agentive
affix is frequently dropped and the noun or pronoun appears
as though it were the ordinary nominative. Where the
pronoun is not important to be expressed, it is altogether
omitted : Shdmbu ghon : “he wears a cap.” Furthermore,
with verbs of coming going or thinking the agentive case is
not used.
y. Another form of the Present tense and one perhaps
in more common employment than the mere verbal root is
produced by the addition of the syllables ghi y& or ghi dw’
to the root. This is a sort of narrative present which, with
a view to distinguish it from the simple indefinite present, we
term Definite Present tense. It is as common with us as
with Tibetans, under the form: “I am—ing.”
Ex: Sd-wa : to eat: §d-ghi-du’ : he is eating.
The similar forms ghi yin’ or ght re’ are nearly as frequent ;
and in Bastern Tibet the use with re’ supersedes that of dw’
completely. Framing sentences with these appendices, we
say :—
Ngdrang Norbhu-gang mdru do~ 1 am going down to Norbhu-
ghi-yin : gang.
A-dhung-ghi dhe-po tol-ghi-dw’ : The sa’is (horse boy) is un-
fastening the mule.
mp EE El UI
THE VERB ACTIVE. 51
Of this tense we may subjoin a specimen in orthodox form,
using the pronouns in the Agentive, as the verb * to beat”
is a transitive one.
InpicaTive Moob.
Definite Present Tense.
Singular. Plural.
Nydrang-ghi dung-ghi-ys® (or yin) : Nydts'o-ghi dung-ghi-yi’ (or
I am beating. yin): We are beating.
Khyorang-ghi dung-ghi-dw’ (or re’) : Khyits'o-ghi dung -ghi-du’ :
Thou art beating. You are beating.
Khorang-ghi dung-ghi-dw’ : (or re’) : Khopdi dung-ghi-du’ :
He is beating. They are beating.
8. A third kind of Present Tense is likewise in vogue.
It appears to be resorted to in order to indicate that an
action is just on the very point of being carried into opera-
tion. It seems appropriate to class this notion as a Present
rather than as a Future action ; the idea being that it is too
imminent to be considered in any sense as what is ‘ about
to be ”’—the motion and its announcement, as it were,
starting simultaneously. We style the expression of this
idea the Present Imminent Tense. Perhaps it signifies «1
am just doing so-and-so,” quite as frequently as it means:
“I am on the point of doing so-and-so.” The Tibetan
equivalent is expressed in two ways :—
(1) By the addition of the word kap to the root of the verb
and annexing thereafter yin or yi’ for the first person and re’
or du for the other persons.
(2) By affixing the syllable ging (really IHX’) to the genitive
of the Infinitive of the verb, annexing also auxiliaries similarly
as in (1).
In Lhésa (2) has superseded in the colloquial the first
method which, however, continues to be followed in
epistolary composition. Kap (really skabs) = ¢ chance,”
“ means,” ‘ opportunity.”
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Present IMMINENT TENSE.
Singular.
Ngé do-wai ging yin: Iam just going.
Khyi' do-wai ging re’ : Thou art just going.
Kho do-wai ging re’ : He is just going.
Plural.
Ngé-ts'o do-wai ging yin : We are just going.
Khyi'ts'o do-wai gang re’ : Ye are just going.
Kho-pa do-wai ging re’ : They are just going.
The precise meaning of Ngi do-wai gang yin or Nga do
kap yin would therefore be «I am starting’ :—
Bring the horse up to the door: Ti di gya-go t'uk t's shok !
I am just bringing it: Di t's kap yo. }
The sun is setting : Nyima gai-pai gang re.
The milk is on the point of Woma lii’pat ging re’.
boiling over :
Make tea : The water is about Soljha 85 chik : Chhu di khol
to boil : fap id Co
I am just doing some work : Ngd le-ka jhye’ par ging yin.
Are they starting now or not : Khopa tanda do-war gang re’ ma
re’.
(N. B.—The at in do-wai, gat-pat, &c., is sounded nearly like
ay in our ‘ way.”)
PAST TENSES.
(1) There appear to be several ways of expressing the
more or less perfected form of any action and the exact
shade of meaning indicated by the different methods em-
ployed is not ascertainable from native informants. The
more frequent shape which the past tense assumes is the
root of the verb with either jhung (sounded chung) or song
annexed as an affix. Certain verbs prefer jhung ; others
PAST TENSES. 53
song ; and no rule seems to determine the affix chosen,
custom deciding the usage with each particular verb :—
Shi-wa : to die; shi song : died.
Tsar-wa: to finish ; ts'ar song : finished.
T’ong-wa : to see; t'ong jhung : saw,
T’ob-pa : to receive, obtain ; t’ob jhung : received, got.
(2) The more emphatic sense, or perhaps what the French
would style the Past Indefinite, is best rendered by another
form, namely, the participle with yin annexed for the first
person, and du’ or re’ for the second and third : e.g., chhyin-
pa~yin : Idid go; chhyin-pa-re’ : he has departed ; dzang-pa-
re’; has sent; t’ob-pa-dw’: did get. Choice of past forms
often depends on the person involved. Thus neither jhung
nor song seem used with a 1st person; so, “I arrived ”’ is
Nga lep-pa-yin and never Ngd lep jhung ; but he arrived ”
might be Kho lep jhung.
(3) Other forms seem to indicate rather a Passive meaning,
though often used for more emphatic expression of the per=
fect tense active :—
a. The root with yi’ or dw’ added : dzang dw’: was sent,
Nf = PTY I +
has been sent ; to Sai yi’ (F FNNJ') has been eaten.
B. Sometimes du’ is annexed in addition to song : shi
song dw’ : has died, is dead :—
Loma t'amché shing-ne bok song The leaves have all dropped
du’ : from the tree.
y. To the gerund in nas (ne), yo’ is added. This appears
to require a rendering approaching our Imperfect Tense :
Dul-ne-yi’ : 1 was walking, have been walking.
8. Final completion of any operation is expressed where
necessary by the addition of #s’ar dw’ or zin du’ to the root
of any verb :—
Pumo di le-zhw khor kyap zin du’ : The girl has done spinning.
54 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Khopa to sdi tsar du’ : They have finished eating.
Dhd-rung kho to sdi t'sar mi dw : He has not yet finished eating.
Tsar pa-yin (1st person) ; ts’ar-pa-re’ (2nd and 3rd) are
occasionally heard here instead of ts’ar dw’ ; also, negatively,
ts’ar-pa-me’.
(4) There exists in Tibetan a regular form of Imperfect
Tense, but which is not resorted to on all occasions when we
should use that tense. It is a curious circumlocution, but is,
1 am assured, in common use in Lhasa. Itis formed by add-
ing to the verbal root the expression go-sdm-jhung Or go-sam
gong meaning literally «did think must.” Ex: Khorang
shing la dzak go-sam song-te mar Sak song : As he was climb-
ing the tree, he fell down. |
A lengthier form is go-sam-nat chhyin-pa : e. g. Tumling
la do go-sam-nai chhyin-pai nge pui-mo dap jhung : In going
to Tumlong, my knee was hurt.
(5) Sometimes a perfect inflection of the verbal root is
current; it is then generally conjoined to pa yin: e.g.
§ai-pa-yin has eaten; fyoi-pa-yin has bought.
FUTURE TENSE.
There are two particular forms for this tense both in
common use; either yong or gyu yo (yin or du’) 25Y be
added to the root of the verb: Ayo yong ¢ will buy; »? flang-la
do-gyu yin : “1 will go home ;” khyo di-la ts’ong-gyu-dw fea
mindy’ : «will you sell it or not? kho tanda gyel-gyu-yo-:
«pow he will slip.”
Sometimes the Infinitive alone is employed, as In :—
Ngé-ts'o la chhd-ghang nyo-wa : What shall we buy ?
Khyi'la ghang jhye’-pa : What will you do?
But. it will be seen, the nominative changes to the dative
>
case.
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 55
Very commonly we notice the Present Narrative taking the
place of the Future, e. g. Do-ghi-dw’ used for Do-gyu-du,
as is the English practice also.
The negative form takes me’ as the final syllable; occa-
sionally we have min :—
Mé-gi-la to ma dhang ; dhenda Don’t look down; then you
khyo'rang gyel-gyu-me’ : will not fall.
With the affix yong the negative particle is me :—
Kyapgin di dhdrang ge-long-ts'o la jalkhd nang mi yong : The
Protector (i. e., Grand Lama) will not give audience to the
ge-longs this morning.
N. B.—The rule, generally so rigid in Oriental speech, that
if the dependent clause of a conditional sentence have the future
construction so also shall the antecedent clause, is not commonly
observed in Tibetan colloquial. Take such a sentence as this:
“Tf you always read at night, you will certainly injure your eyes,”
In Hindustani every native would turn the first part of the
sentence “If you always shall read, &c.” Contrariwise, the
Tibetan would express the future only in the second clause as we
do in English, thus :—
Ke-si khyi’ ts'en-la takpa-reshi jige dok na, nenten mik-la Suk
gyak-gyu-re’.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
a. The simplest form is the mere root, which in some cases
bas the central vowel altered. Occasionally we find a
special word is in vogue. To the root, whether altered or
not, may be always appended chik or shik, sounded quickly.
This is the more imperative style of demand. However the
traveller will do well to remember that Tibetans are not so
amenable to cart commands as are the natives of India. A
real order, nevertheless, requires chik.
B. Several politer forms are used among equals and these
are by aggregation rendered still more precative when ad-
56 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
dressing superiors. Thus the following alternative appen-
“dices may be added to the root in lieu of chik : —
(1) Ro; (2) Ro chik—often contracted into Roch; (3)
Ro nang ; (4) Ro dzv’ ; (5) Nang chi’; (6) Ro jhyi-shik !
These all imply the sense of our word ¢ please.”
In Western districts, instead of chik, the word tong is
used, and instead of the polite forms a second word zhu 1s
appended, Ro z
Central Tibet.
Examples :—
Wash the horse:
Lay the child down on the
cushion :
Give me two rupees for the
dog :
When your work is done,
come to me:
Please shew me the way :
Please send three rupees with-
out delay :
Come with me the whole way :
hw is also heard in lieu of the Ro nang of
Td-po di tu Shik.
P’ugu ch’w'ten-la nya’ne 8hok !
Ngd-la khyi-i chhyirtu gyd-tam
nyt nang ro nang!
Rang-ght le-ka ts’ar-ne nge tsar
pep ro chi’!
Lam di ten ro dz!
Gyd-tam sum tanda lamsang
tang roch.
Ngd dhang nyampo lam kang-gd
la p'ep nang chi’!
Ro alone added to the verbal root is generally enough;
or zhu in the West and in Ladak. The causative verb
Jhye’'pa
is frequently added to the Imperative to give
emphasis: Shing luk jhy?’ : put on wood.
Y-
annexing tang or dhang (really “and
e. g. Di to §o dhang : Eat this;
or the Imperative word ;
T tang : See! Look!
With certain verbs we find the Imperative formed by
») to the verbal root
With other verbs, shok (¢come ”) makes the Imperative.
5. As already stated, a number of verbs retain in the col-
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 57
loquial the special inflected forms which are to be found in
the literary language. The principal are these :—
Do-wa : to go imperative : Song !
Yong-wa : to come ” Shok !
Shakpa : to place » Sho! (guttural)!
Kkyakpa : to carry "” Khyok !
Ti-wa :
po ws : to see ” To dhang or Té shok !
Sry : to do, to make » Jhyi (pr. chyi)!
yelwa : to convey " Kyal! (or kyo shik) !
Khur yong-wa : to bring ’ Khur shok !
Khur do-wa : to take away ’ Khur song !
Twa : to lead y Tv shok ! !
$d-wa : to eat ’ To $0 or §o dhang !
ze’pa : todo, make (khonorific),, Dzo’ !
Ohhik-pa : to break " Chhok chak !
Tang-wa : to let go, send ’ Tong !
Dzek-pa : to climb ’ Ziok !
Tab-wa : to strike ’ Top!
Tak-pa : to tie ’ Tok !
Plap-pa : to put down, adjust ,, Pop!
Yi -wa : i
ar lang-wa : to rise up ' Yarlong! (“Get up”)
It will be observed that in the majority of the above, the
PARTICIPLES. .
a. There are two forms used to represent the participial
mood ; but there seems to be no distinction made Ym
the present and past participle, either form being employed
Whatever the time of action. The more correct form is
identical with the Infinitive, being expressed by the root of
the verb with the affix pa annexed, or after vowels and
final » or! the kindred affix wa :—
Ngdrang gyel-wa la d-nye- i
yo'pa yin : nye-po 1 was nearly falling (lit: was
8
near to falling).
58 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
More often, however, the colloquial adopts the affix khen
instead of pa or wa.
B. These participles are employed in composition LI
cisely after the fashion of adjectives; being used in the
e case when placed after the noun to which they
r in the genitive when preceding the noun :—
: The dog barking all night.
I observed the ox dying.
The man who struck me ran
over the bridge.
I fell down and braised the knee
which was formerly struck.
nominativ
are related, o
Ndm kang-gd hab-khen ky khyt du
Shi-wai lang-to tong jhung :
Mi-po ngd-la dung-khen dhe sam-
pai t'e’-lam la gyulk song :
Ngdrang gyel-ne di pwi-mo ngon-
tse dung-khen dhe-la dap song: “
The di is introduced in order to to mark off the partici-
pial clause more clearly ; but this usage is optional.
Where the conjunction that” would be resorted to
in Enolish, a participial construction is often found in
oO
Tibetan :— |
I did not see that the water Chhu di khyak-pa t'ong-pa-me.
was frozen : —
Lk - > jhung.
I knew that he was coming: Nga-i kho yong-pa she jing
i it wi ident that
From the foregoing examples it will now be ev fig
the whole participial clause can be handled and moved abou
bodily as if it were a single adjective qualitying the sub-
stantive.. Thence we are brought to the most important
“ " - . . . r Ne
function of the participial construction in Tibetan.
y. All relative clauses are expressed without the #20 of
relative pronouns by the substitution of the participial for
the relative construction. In these cases the verb is made
to take the form of a participle and the whole clause be-
comes one gigantic adjective qualifying the antecedent of
the relative clause. As before the whole clause being ter-
minated by the participle it may be handled and shifted as
foot : artici ino inflected according
any other adjective, the participle being ace 3
PARTICIPIES. 59
to its position with respect to the antecedent and the sense
to be conveyed.
Thus such a sentence as—
“The butcher who brought the sheep to the door of this house
stole my boots.”
Must be rendered somewhat in the style of—
“ The bringing-the-sheep-to-the-door-of-this-house butcher stole
my boots.”
“ Bringing-the-sheep-to-the-door-of-this-house > is, as it
were, the gigantic adjective qualifying the noun “ butcher; ”’
and the whole sentence in Tibetan stands thus : —
Khyim di-yi go tuk luk khyer-wdi shempa di ngdrang-ght Tham
kwi-ne khur song.
As the verb in every clause or sentence invariably occurs
as the final word, the participle in these cases alone receives
inflection. In the foregoing example, the relative clause
might just as readily be placed after the antecedent shempa,
the participle taking the nominative in lieu of the genitive
case. The article in this arrangement often occurs twice,
standing both before the noun and after the gigantic adjec-
tive or relative clause, thus: —
Di shempa khyim di-yv go tuk luk khyer-wa di, &c.
Let another example be taken :—
“The boy to whom I gave the dog was clad in a yellow
coat.” Before attempting to translate this sentence, it may
be conveniently transposed as follows—
““ The boy who by me was given a dog was cladin a yellow
coat.” We can now shape our gigantic adjective as The
by-me-given-a-dog ”’ and place it before or after the antece-
dent noun “boy,” rendering the sentence thus :—
Nydrang-ghi khyt §hik ter-khen kyi potso dhe-yi ko-lok serpo
ghyin-pda-di’.
Analysing our example, we have the relative clause with
its terminative word the participle fer-khen appearing in
60
the genitive case becaus
the qualified noun potso.
in the agentive case as the subje
(Ch. VL, § B. L. B,) and the verb ghyon-pa-
proach
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
e of the position of the clause before
Then we have potso di appearing
ot of the main clause
dw’ the nearest ap-
hich would seem the most
to an imperfect tense Ww
Ko-lok
neral meaning of the sentence.
appropriate to the ge
might be also dukpo ser.
serpo “yellow coat”
Another example :—
who did this : Ngdrang-ght menshar di-nt jhye’-
I praise the girl
khen dhe-la ti'-ra tang-ght yo’.
'Lhen is the quasi adjective following its
N. B.—Here di-ni jhye
d interposed between the noun and its
noun menshar a girl, an
article dhe.
But such a sentence as the following is correlative rather
than relative and requires the relative pronoun :—
1 did this: Ngdrang-ght su yang di-
khen-kyi menshar ld to'-rd nang.
alternative form—
I praise whichever gir la jhye’-
less cumbrous would be the
Or perhaps
hen la, &c.
Ngdrang-ghl menshar su yang jhye'k
pial forms will fall more conveniently
5. Other partici
f gerundial construction.
under subsequent illugtratious o
§ AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES.
ow. Gerunds of Occurrence.—Short dependent clauses indi-
cating the time or occasion of some general or particular
statement in a principal sentence are ruled by a subordinate
verb which in English takes the form of a gerund, or else is
erb introduced by the pronoun “when.” In
Tibetan such dependent clauses are terminated by the
simplest form of the verb to which the affix la or na is
ometimes the Infinitive with the same affix is
6.—GERUND
a simple Vv
annexed. S
resorted to in these cases.
GERUNDS AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 61
Several exampl i ibi
ae ples will exhibit the usage with gerunds of
On approachin i
g the horse, it Tdpo dhang ¢d-nyé
, ’ g t'd-nyépo do la
ha violently: dhdakpo dok-t’o p’ul jhung. :
. ning the voice, he looked Drd di nyen-pa la, kho chhi-lok
ack : § ,
tai jhung ; or kho drd dv nyen-
pa la, chhi-lok, &c.
When be stepped on the bridge, Sampa-i tangla dok bor-la
1 : hw
roke : chhak jhung. (dok bor-wa =
to place foot)
When you fire the rifle, I wi
, I will Mendd gyak 1 or
run towards you : t'ekya pn ay Mtn
(N. B—The i
. Bo-The Jeno are frequently omitted, as ngarang “1”
ii. A less obvious use witl is i
1 la is in short copulati
ativ
sontenecs where in Hindustani we should employ ot
ly participle; e. g. Go and pick it up: oy la
oe ! Go and fetch the girl: Song la menshar di a
shok | Wake up and light the fire : ny?’ si’la mé bl .
oot é bhar nang
, a is evidently only a derived use, as the la is annexed
o the verb in its imperative form, and therefore is hardl
analogous to the Hindustani idiom: Jakar dekh ,
uthake jao, &c. Shas sen
) i Frequently in accessory clauses commencing with
when,” instead of the gerund in la, we hear used th
verbal root with the adverb {tii or tu: ‘at the time of » :
. - a -
nexed. Bomgtimes also in those cases the participle in ho
in the genitive with #s’e-na added serves the same ee ”
¢ ose :
e. g. Leb-khen-kyv ts’ena, ke tang jhung < When he eta
’
he shouted out; ” or kho leb tui, ke tang jhung.
B. Gerunds of Mode or the verbal use in accesso i
cipial clauses. Properly the Gerund is mainly an YY part.
adverb explaining the accessory circumstances a Ea
ing any action; and thus we do right to lis a
62 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
wd
all those clauses which are an enlargement or explanation
of the principal predicate. These clauses are in English
interposed in sentences with the aid of the participles in
« ing” or « having—ed.” Such clauses in colloquial Tibetan
are rendered by using a gerund consisting of the verbal root
and the particle ndi (sounded almost as ne). Examples: —
Kho, du yur-le jhe’ ne, nyin-kang
gor song.
Ohé jung-ne (or ton-ne), Pi-
kyi ge-nyen du nga-la chham-
biil $hu jhung.
Having abandoned father, mo- Mi-po di yab yum no-o pang-ne,
ther, and his younger bro- chik-pu tak-p'uk nangla dé.
ther, this man dwells alone
He remained all day thrash-
ing the corn:
Putting out his tongue, the
Tibetan ge-nyen saluted me :
in the cave:
ii. Many sentences
be reduced into forms akin to the foregoing gerundial con-
are usually rendered by the aid of the gerund
sentence as I will climb up the tree
> being adapted for translation into
is
composed of co-ordinate clauses may
struction and
in ne. Thus such a
and fasten the rope,’
the form ¢ Climbing up the tree I will fasten the rope,”
easily rendered: Shing-la dzag-ne, tdk-pa di dam-gyw yun.
In fact it should be borne in mind that THIS IS THE ONLY
CORRECT WAY OF RENDERING ALL SUCH SENTENCES —
He took up the gun,
over the bridge, and has not
yet returned : ma jhung.
then you can easily pass over: khyirang le-ld-po-la gal chok.
to be translated by the gerund in ne, e. g. :—
Having been found stealing,
I dismiss you :
kehyd rang-la tol ter.
crossed Khorang mendd len-ne, Sampa
la galne, tanda par lokne leb
I will hold the bridge and Ngdrang-ghi $ampa-la zin-ne,
iii. The passive form of these gerundial clauses is equally
Ngé khy’rang ku-ma ku-khen
la nye-ne, gong-pa ter-ghi-yin ;
or Ngdrang khyi'rang kew-ma
ku-pa dhang te’ jhung-ne,
GERUNDS AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 63
iv. 1 i i
iv In copulative sentences, akin to those in ii
is likewise employed :— dl
a no k q
e
mannam ; to’ shok !
. Minor i iti i
; : ; " Interpositions in gerundial clauses often take
a gerund of another form. This i |
118 18 com posed of th
ne : e root, to
which the particle ching or shing is annexed, e. go. :—
S .
Th 9 * . Ee
© Chinaman having depart- Gyd-mi di lap-she dhin-me’ la
ed uttering vain abuse, the gyak-ching song-ne, Pi
ets laughed loudly : ts'ot ha-chha gyak sing we
. a as it ran away Nyen dv {dk wirtgding (or
eeding, fell down into the tak tar-ching) shor-ne dokpo-i
oree : ’ A
gorge t'engla dil jhung.
o. »
i winds of Sequence. The clauses governed by gerunds
us class imply some result di
3 irectly proceeding f
dependent upon thei Soy
r statements, and we of
” 8 ! y ve often find such
Sioa introduced in English by the preposition ¢ by.”
: © particle par or pe annexed to the verbal root is in Tibeta
" iv 3 3 :
the on for this kind of gerund, and it may be employed
in a «ww » h
iy ces which allege a reason for something hich
: Asser ed immediately as a result therefrom. Thus «b
pons so-and-so,” ‘because he did this,” &ec., all re ire
ons ( . uire
gerund in pe. As before, the usage may be best indi t
ed by examples :— or
By leaving the mi
aving milk on the Woma di # al
d 7 _ 9
fire, it has boiled over : Haale 025 01 oe
You left this stick 1
s stick, so I have Khyirang-qhi di t di
left th ° g-ght dv yuk-pa di bor-
ght it now : pe, tanda mge di-la khyok
Jhung.
Se . : .
end the oxen first, they will Ngdma lang-ts’o dzang-pé, dk
trample down the snow: ts’ol khau-a dz yo (ot
- 2 yong (or
a a. dok dung yong).
an away to Dongtse, be- Khorang §he’-pé
otse, be §he’-pe, D se uk
cause he was afraid : la des Seg
64 TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
-ght
in Chhu-wo gal-ching, rang-g
Having lost my baggage 1m wd - »
ro the river, I have chha-lak ghv’-la ive ng
ndithier tent nor bedding: rang-la ghur malchhd me.
ii. As will have been noted in the foregoing Sons
the use of the ordinary copulative and’ 1s 2 | 1 Po
ally avoided. Where in English two sen ences,
eessarily subordinate to one another, are linked together
cess gee
i” in transfering them into the Tibetan
J
:uneti lauses with
disjunctive c A few more examples are added :—
conjunctions 1n general.
The father pursued them and A-p'd di kho-ts’o-la etre
ecained his daughter : rang-ght bhumo yang
res ; nye jhung.
Meeting the Chinaman in the Hrak-la Gyd-mi dhang t’e’-pe,
ine. the brave Tibetan Pi’pa pd-o gt menda gyap-
fed bis gun and the China- pe, Gyd-mu dov song.
1 Rt he doe for biting the Ngdrang-ghi kchyi-la, bhé’pa di so
N : 0 t'ap-pai lén-la, dung song.
I tr man because he Dhdngpoyimped-Suk mi-po dhang
h t dzin hak jhung.
is honest:
Being intent on reading, the Dck-pa mang-po-la Song Hh
earance of the bear fright- mo jhung-ne, nyd-la dhepa
po jhye’ dw’.
ened me :
te i i ading, the bear appear-
. . « By being held in much rea 2, :
i y Lo being A qypenring by the bear’) to me a frighten
in
”»
SUPINES. 65
7. Surines.—This part of the verb, properly speaking,
is always an appendix to some other verb, being in truth
nothing else than an “extension of the predicate.” Tt is
chiefly annexed to verbs of seeing, coming, going, and
wishing. In Tibetan colloquial we find various methods of
expressing a supine.
a. Sometimes in offhand speech the mere Infinitive or
even the bare root : —
The rain has ceased to fall : Chharpa di bap chhé song.
I want to go: Nygarang-la do goi-pa-yo’.
Literally : “To me there is a w
anting to go,”’—do tallying with
the supine “to go.”
B. More frequently we meet with la annexed to the
root or infinitive, especially after verbs of motion :—
I go to make ready the victu- Nga to-chha tal-dik jhe’pa-la
als : do.
I came to see the monastery: Di gompa t'ong-la yong jhung.
Supines here are fal-dik jhe’pa-la and t'ong-la.
The beggar is coming to beg : Pang-go di long-la yong-ghi-du’.
v- Most correctly with gyu or else by means of dhindhu
and the genitive participle :—
Marpa-yi Dolma yong-ghi-du’
Ser-gyu t'oi-nai, dong t'uk-pai
dhin-dhu song.
that Dolma was coming,
Marpa, having heard it ne]
went to meet her :
N. B.—Here we have two supines “said” or “to be said”
expressed by Ser-gyu, and dong t'ukpai dhindhu meaning to meet,”
dong t'ukpai being the genitive of the participle. Literally we
may translate the Tibetan: *“ Marpa (in agentive case) having
heard to be said ‘ Dolma is coming,” went in order for meeting
(her).” Pronouns where obvious are omitted.
He gave it me to eat : Khé ngd-la di §d-gyu ter-pa-re’.
Nyi-ma nup nup la, khys-kyi
ngd-la ri-kyi teng-nai jon-gyu
ta-gyu yin.
see me approaching from
As the sun is sinking, you on]
over the mountain :
N. B—“As” “while”
verbal root.
9
are expressed by la with the repeated
66 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
In place of dhondiu, we frequently hear dhinla (ton-la) and
dhon dhdk-la (ton-tdk-la) :—
1 shall stay at home to read Ngd pechhd do
books: la nang-la gor-gyu-yin.
8. Frequently,
to gyu ; and in fact that is the commoner usag
1 am longing to eat these puffs: Ngdrang mo-mo di-ts’o 8a-gyu
la 8hem-ki-yin.
mised to thresh the corn Ngdrang sang-nyin du-la ge’
gyap-gyu la khe lempa yo’.
k-pai dhon-dhdk-
in expressing the supine, la is attached
e with gyu:—
I pro
to-morrow :
But, equally, we hear
1 wish to go home:
Have you learned to write :
Ngd nang-la do-gyu di’ -ghi-yo’.
Khys yi-ge di-gyu shet jhung-
nga ?
e. The practice with the Inchoative Verb is to place gyw
in the genitive :—
He began to bui
wall yesterday :
I am beginning to speak Tibe-
tan a little :
Always begin to work at once : Dhii-gyiin le-ka jhye’gyu-v go-
dzuk t'el-t’el-la.
1d the new Kho khd-sang tsik-pa sarpa du
gyap-gyu-t go-dzuk song.
Ngdrang Po'-ke’ tik-tse chi’ lap-
qyu-1 go-tsuk-ghi-yo'.
» is sometimes for convenience placed after
N. B.—* At once’
ther cases where two
the verb; see also this construction in 0
adverbs might occasion confusion.
Sometimes, however, the usage with gyu-
with an inchoative ; e. g.:—
He began to eat an hour ago:
la is observed
Kho to Sa-gyu-la go-tsuk-ne
chhu-ts'6’ chik song.
(Literally : “ From he beginning to eat, one hour has gone.”)
’ are both in use.
¢« Order
N. B.—Go-dzuk-pa and go-tsuk-pa “ to begin ’
z. In such expressions as ‘Tell him to go,”
him to send it,” &c., the supine would never be employed;
but instead two Imperatives—< Tell him-go !”’ &c.
NEGATIVES. 67
8. NecATIVE rorMs.—i. There are two negative auxiliary
Fore correspondent to yi’pa and yim-pa, namely me’pa
to be without,” ¢ not to exist,” and min-pa “ to be not,”
the simple connective of the attribute. The former ,
also be used as the negative connective, !
Ngd-la to-chhd me’ (‘‘ To me there
is not food.”)
Khye di ngarpo min.
I am without food :
The dog is not savage :
Sometimes du’ is annexed in the latter case :—
The girl is not pretty : Menshar di chhormo min dw’.
Here is an exam ive i
ple of the negative in a participi
relative clause :— : ini
Chinese are men without pity Gydmi-ts'o di nying-je me’pa-yi
(lit: Chinese are men who mi-ts’o yd’.
are without pity :”)
i, Two negative particles are in use with ordinary verbs
either in the case of the simple root of a verb or with the
compound forms :—
Mi is employed with the Present Tense and Future Tense.
Ma with the Past Tenses and the Imperative Mood.
oe negative particles in the case of compound verbs
should be introduced just next preceding the last syllable
of the compound :—
I shall not eat meat to-day : Dhe-ring sha §@ mi yong.
The men have not perished : ~~ Mi-ts’o lik ma jhung.
I do not see him : Nga kho-la mk mi td.
Where one member of the compound is yin or yo’, we
may substitute in negative forms mén or me’ :—
It will not be necessary : Got-gyu-men.
He will not do the work well: Le-ka §dkpo jhyd-gyu-me’.
Dha-de kho gyuk-ki-mén.
. iii, Important. In the negative Imperative, the Present
ndicative form of a verb, and not the ordinary Imperative
He is not running now :
68 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
is used. Thus, “ Don’t come . is Hy yong, not ma shok ;
¢ ’ ? ma §d, not to ma §o!
| 0 ’ oar . The simple interrogative form
of the verb is the same as that in literary use; 1. e., the final
letter is re-duplicated and the syllable am affixed thereto:
but the final m is usually silent :—
Has he arrived ?
0 1h -nqd :
Lep jhung-ng Will he come ?
Yong-gyu-yinnd :
: 5
Dhdrung khys' to Sai ts'ar-rd : Have you finished eating yet !
B Where an interrogative pronoun is introduced, the
additional syllable is unnecessary (though sometimes used),
and the pronoun is then generally placed immediately before
the verb :— _
Khyo'kyt singmo ghd-ru do-ghi- Where is your sister gomg
Yo:
Di su yin:
Di-pa su yi’ : | |
In a sentence of past signification, in which an in-
| 7 | . . .
terrogative pronoun occurs, the verb is always used as in
iti : Tense :—
he Infinitive Mood Present |
oH a di su-la ter-pa? To whom did you give the cup
Ks nam leb-pa yim-pa ? When 41d you come (arrive) fi
A curious construction is resorted to in sentences of presen
and future signification the gerundial affix pas panned gas
) being appended to the auxiliary terminants of those
Who is this ?
Who is here ?
or pe
tenses :(— _
Khyv'-kyt singmo ghd-na do-ghi Where 18 your sister going!
yo'par ? Co |
© Khyo i-ge ti-gyu shin-ghi-yd’pe : Are you le ming to
) ) : Shall we go to-day
Dhering do-gyu-yrmpe : aE
Khyo' la ghang jhung-wa : What is the matter wih you
Khorang-ghi khdshe go-yi’ pe: Does he want some . ;
Kho-la so Suk gyak-ghi-yd’-pai: Has he got toot vaehe |
S$. Quite a different method of expressing the interroga-
ive is also to be met with. No syllable is appended to the
arning to write ?
t
J
INTERROGATIVES AND NEGATIVES. 69
verb; but, instead, a short abrupt interjectional particle
sounded eh or ¢, is interposed before the utterance of the
final verb :—
Yul-ngen é jhung ? Is a tempest arising ?
Di dong-pa la nd-ts'ang é yi’ : Are there lodgings in this
village ?
Ddk-la Tamkhen chi yi'pa é yo’: Am I to have a guide ?
Dhi-p’en é ma tsar : Is it not finished by now ?
e. A curious expletive, sounded 0-co, is often heard added
on to interrogative sentences, chiefly negative ones, evidently
intended to impart a persuasive turn to the question. In
common talk it may be said to answer to our won’t you,”
“ will you,” at the end of any hortative injunction : —
Mdndro, o-go : Don’t go, will you ?
Yong-gyu-yimpa, o0-go :
You will come, won't you ?
Khyi-la ma tang, o-go :
Don’t let go of the dog, will you?
Ling-po jhe’-la chhing, o-go : You'll tie it up securely, won’
you ?
Maingu, o-go : Don’t cry, will you ?
Remark : The practice of re-iterating the verb in negative
imperatives is common. Thus do mdndro is as frequent as
mandro.
10. Use or “ Nyona.”—The employment of this verb is
peculiar. Nyong-wa means primarily to taste” and hence
comes to signify “to experience—undergo: >’ whence it
seems to have been gradually utilised as an auxiliary in
cases where a sense of perpetuity was to be imparted. Ac-
cordingly myong is now used as a suffix when the general
meaning of “never” or “ever” is to be indicated ; but
its use is confined to sentences employed in the past sense
and more commonly in the negative :—
Ngérang dhéru song ma nyong : I have never been there.
Nygen-la ngd pechha @angpo jige 1 have never read so many
dok ma nyong dhendar : books before.
Ngédrang-ght yd si ma nyong : I never did eat fish.
EE —————— rT — a ”
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Khyo'kyi dzo chhempo dhendai Did you ever see so big a dzo
§hik tong é ma nyong : (yak) as that ?
Khyi'kyi ts’ wr-la nam-ydng yong Have you ever been here
ma nyong-ngd (m) : before ?
11. Porentia. Moon.—The ability or possibility of carry-
ing out an action, or of compassing anything, is expressed
in literary Tibetan by adding the verb Nus-pa, «to be able,”
to the root of the active verb affected. The verb Nus-pa
is thus added inflected in any required tense. In the
colloquial this verb, sounded nii-pa, is still heard, but other
potential auxiliaries are oftener resorted to; e. g. Chok-pa,
and T’ub-pa (sounded T u-pa). Anyone of these may be
affixed either to the verbal root or (less commonly) to the
gerund :—
Nga tanda do chok : I can go now.
Khyi-kyi Piling ké lap chok : You are able to speak English.
Ngd-rang dhii-gyiin jhye’ wii : I can always do it.
Khorang khd-sang yo chok ma He could not buy it yesterday.
song :
Nye tdk-la dzdk t'u-ghi-me’ :
Khys' nyin-sang laptse t'ong tw You will be able to see the pass-
yong : top to-morrow.
B. When the potential assumes an interrogative form,
the potential auxiliary nearly always takes the future tense :—
Khyi' p'd-ghi-ru gyukshd 16° uw Can you run there ?
I cannot climb the rock.
yong-nga :
(N. B—In Lhasa, gyukshd 15’-pa ‘““to run ” is often said in-
stead of gyuk-pa.)
Do chok yong-nga :
Dhe dzak t'u mi yong-nga :
Su ang-ki dhangpo lep tuyong : ~~ Who can get first ?
But the future is not used in such as these :—
Khyi-rang-ght Pé’-yi(k) lo t'u- Can you read Tibetan or not ?
ghi yo'dhang me’ : (lo-pa or lok-pa *‘ to read.” )
Kho khd-sang 8d chok song-nga : Could he eat yesterday ?
Can you go?
Cannot we climb up it ?
THE POSSESSIVE VERB. 71
y. Such expressions as * what you can” and “ag—ag
you are able,” can be rendered by the form ghang chok-pa : —
Ghang chokpa nang ro dze : Give as much as you can
Nygd ghang chokpa gyokpo chhyin- 1 went as quickly as I could
pa-yin : :
id ghd-ru chokpa dzok §hi’: Climb up as far as you are able
Khyo’-rang ts’a-po ghang t'u-pa Drink it as hot as you can
tung : :
Nga mangpo ghang chokpa top I will get as many as I can
yong :
Khyo’-rang ghd-dhii chokpa do As soon as you can, it is time
ren du’ : to go
Another verbal form equi 1
quivalent to chok-pa is found i
Ts’vk-Pa, to be able :— 2 21
Can he see us ? Khorang-ghi ngd-chd-la t'ong
ts’uk-ka ?
As the traveller journeys west of Shigatse, he will find both
these potential auxiliaries entirely replaced by 7Tub-pa
which word is also often heard at Lhasa. pe
12. THE POSSESSIVE VERB “TO HAVE.”—As in
most of the Oriental idioms, this forin requires to be express-
ed by a circumlocution. The construction is either th
common one of “To me, him, &ec., there is; or that in
vogue in Hindustani: ¢ Near me, him, &ec., there is.” With
pronouns, the former is the ordinary usage i—I have a horse :
Ngdrang-la td chik y3’. With % noun-substantive the
latter construction is more general: —The child has a prett
face: Di p’ugu-la dong ts’ arp yo’ or Di p’ugu tsinas dony
&ce. when tadnas is used, it would be nore correct to place
the preceding noun in the genitive : Limd-yv tsdnai ngul
ts’angma dw’ : < Near the Lama all the money is’ = « _
Lama has all the money.” vd °
The Past construction requires 45 auxiliary Jhung dw’
e. g. nda-ning ngd-la §hamo sum jhung dw’ : “Last er
7
72 "TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
three hats.” Again: ‘Because I had a little business,
therefore I could not come: ngd-la le-ka tiktse jhung-pe, dhe-
ne yong t’ub ma song.
13. OPTATIVE FORMS.—The sense of ¢ must,” « ought
to,” &c., is expressed in a manner akin to the French il faut
with the dative of the agent. The verb used is go-pa
be necessary *’ which is always employed in the persona,
form preceded by the root of the verb affected, the agen
being placed in the dative; thus “I must go” 1s Adres
la do go; and “I must go home’ would be ngdrang-la
khyim-la do go (lit: To me to home to go 1s necessary. )
Go-pa also means “to wish,” “to want; ” and ! I want,
&c. must likewise be rendered with the dative as just stated.
Thus “I want a guide >> would be ngdrang-la lamkhen chik
go ; ’ = khorang-la
go-pai ts’ong-zok chu-li yo’ (lit: Merchandise to him which
is necessary is apricots” N. B. go-pai ts’ong-zok is partici-
pial construction).
Another verb, not unlike go-pa in sonnd, namely kho-ws
is frequently preferred in the above phrases. Often this
word takes the expanded form kho-jhe’ yi’pa ¢ to be in want
of”? or “to want,” or ‘to be needful to’’; and still re-
quiring the dative :— oo
If you want the dog, please Nyi'-la khyv di kho-jhe’ yi na
send 13 rupees: gyd-tam chusum tang ro Shu
(or tang ro dze’).
I don’t want it: Nydrang-la kho-wa me’. |
The kinds which you wanted Khyi’la kho-jhe’ yd’pai rik di
cannot be bought here : dir nyo ma chok.
Sometimes the future is heard : —
I shall not want to travel at Ngd-la ting-sang dul kho-gyu me’
present : (or goi-gyu-me’).
CONSPECTUS OF PARTS OF ACTIVE VERB.
Present Tenses : Nyo :
Nyo-ghi-du’ :
Nyo-kap-du’ :
Past Tenses :
Nyo jhung :
Nyo-pa yo’ :
Nyo-wa: to buy.
INpicaTIVE Moon.
(I, thou, he, we) buy.
am buying, is buying, &c.
am, is, just buying.
(I, thou, he, they) bought.
has, have, bought—did buy.
Imperfect Tenses : Nyo-go-sam-jhung : was buying.
Nyo-tap-yin :
Future Tenses : Nyo yong :
Nyo-gyu-yin :
Nyo-war dw
or Nyo-wa-la du’
Nyoi shik !
Ma nyo!
Nyoi ro nang !
Nyo shyt chik :
Nyo ro jhyi chik :
Nyo chuk :
Potential form :
Optative form :
Participle Present :
Participle Past :
Gerundial forms :
Supine forms :
was just buying, nearly
buying.
(I, he, you) shall buy.
shall be buying, will bu y.
} shall probably buy,
Imperative Mood.
Buy!
Don’t buy !
Please to buy !
Cause to be bought !
Please cause to be bought ; or Please to buy.
Let him buy,
Nyo-chok ; or Nyo-ni’ : Can buy.
Nyo goi : Ought to buy.
Nyo-wa or Nyo-khen : Buying,
Nyo-nai : Having bought.
Nyo-la : On buying,
Nyo-pai : By buying,
Nyo-ching : In buying.
Nyo-nyo-la : While buying,
Nyo-gyu : To buy, to be bought.
For buying: in order
(or dhindd-la) to buy.
Nyo-war dhondhy :
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
SECTION C.—THE VERB PASSIVE.
1. In the Tibetan idiom little provision seems to have
been made for expressing the verb in a distinctive Passive
sense. Such grammatical niceties as occur in European
languages whereby, for example, we should be able to say
« The corn has been eaten by the horse” as discriminated
from The horse has eaten the corn” are not attended to
in this Eastern speech. Nevertheless, as we have noticed,
the whole Tibetan verbal scheme is moulded on what might
be termed the Passive construction, and that even in
sentences of most active transitive significance. Accordingly
in the sentence just instanced, the form would be literally
akin to our Passive phrasing, i. e., ¢ By the horse, as to corn,
an eating was.” But, for all practical purposes it is evident
that—as already indicated —we should treat these forms as
if they were pervaded by Active verbs.
9. In Tibetan, however, when neglect of a special dis-
tinguishing form for the Passive would allow the exact
meaning to be conveyed to remain ambiguous, even then
the Active construction is often resorted to. Thus the
sentence, The girl’s heart is unpolluted with sin” is
heard rendered kyin-kyi menshar-kyi sem-la ma go ¢¢ Sin
does not taint the girl’s heart.”
3. Nevertheless when no agent is introduced into a sen-
tence, we cannot avoid making use of a Passive form in
English. Thus we must say : The corn has been eaten,”
no other turn being possible for such expressions. And so
likewise in Tibetan. Whenever assertions of that class are
required to be made, we shall find the Tibetan verb frequent-
ly assuming a particular shape by the annexation of the
auxiliary dw’ both in present and perfect tenses. Ld (really
lags), an elegant synonym for dw’, is also employed. For
the perfect tenses however dw’ is preceded by the root of
PASSIVE FORMS. 75
the verb #s’ar wa «to complete, finish >’ and sometimes th
Pout of a synonymous verb zin-pa. Thus Du di 84: ts’ar du’ .
the corn has been eaten,” though we pave heard it t : ol
loosely Du di §a song. To the use with the above i
we may, we think, apply the term Passive Voice. a
The Present of this Voice is rarely required ; but such
phrases as “I am injured,” “I am beaten.” hon u 1
the sense of “being injured,” ¢ being beaten ” im 5
present time, can be best rendered by the gerund in — Jt
du’ or li appended. Thus for te’pa * to believe in,” the
compound te’pa jhye’pa is preferred; and instead of gyi’pa
“to repent,” the compound gyi’pa jhye’pa “to make re-
pentance.” Many instances occur in our Vocabulary. We
have seen that to emphasize the imperative form of verbs,
Jhye’pa is frequently added as an intensive, though quite
pleonastic (ante V. B. 4).
Then, also, there is the idiomatic use in certain phrases.
Nang-dhik = the inner Ego, the inner self; from which we
draw the idiom nang-dhdék jhye’pa to perceive,” to take
heed of.” Kham-chhu = the lips; from which we draw the
idiom Zham-chhw jhye’pa to bicker,” ‘to quarrel.” Nyd-
mo = near; whence is derived the phrase nyémo jhye’pa
“to love, be attached to.”” There are many similar forms.
COMPOUNDS WITH JHYE PA.
A numerous class arises by the help of the ordinary
causative verb sEYE’PA to do, make—as is the case in many
P’aknyen jhye’'pa :
Diim-ma jhye’pa :
Kab-kyon jhye’pa :
Yur-le jhye’pa :
Ziin jhye’pa :
Ke-chhd jhye’pa :
Na-len jhye’pa :
Kurim jhye'pa :
Le jhye’pa :
Kha-ya jhye’pa :
Khékpo jhye’pa :
Khok-t'uk jhye’pa :
to play the eaves-dropper.
to take counsel with.
to upbraid.
to thrash (corn, &ec.)
to tell a lie.
to have a talk.
to give shelter to, to lodge.
to worship, make * pujah.”
to work, labour.
to co-operate with.
to be in difficulties.
to be anxious.
78 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
to scatter.
to thunder.
to cure.
to learn by heart.
to trick, defraud.
to promise.
to take pains.
to retreat.
to state fully.
to prepare to start.
to supplicate.
to oscilate, swing.
to beckon, signal to.
to knock out of the way.
to argue in favour of (object
placed in Gen.)
Ohhdk-chhdk jhye’pa :
Dir-dir jhye’'pa :
Sot jhye’pa :
Nyam-len jhye’pa :
Shdp-shop jhye’pa :
Shal-8he jhye’pa :
Kaduk jhye’pa :
Gydp-lok jhye’pa :
Gye-pa jhye’pa :
Do-gyu jhye’pa :
Shu-long jhye’pa :
Yom-yom jhye’pa :
Yapmo jhye'pa :
Shuk jhye’pa :
Mi-pang jhyepa :
B. A less extensive series of compounds depend upon
another common verb Do-wa to go.
Thus in preference to the primitive verb p’ampa to be
defeated,” the modern custom makes use of pam do-wa,
literally «to go to be defeated.” Again, in lieu of p’ung-wa
« to sink under” “to perish,” we hear p’ung do-wa.
This auxiliary joined to the gerund of another verb im-
plies reason to expect that any action or event will come to
pass. Thus in the example: The Pass most likely is
blocked,” we add do to the gerund of kdk-pa “to be hin-
dered,” saying Ld di kdk-ne do. We even append it to itself
in such a sentence as: «I think I shall go ”—Ngdrang do-ne
do.
y. Another auxiliary of this class is chuk-pa, which,
however, partakes more of the nature of a causative. It is
likewise heard in the sense of ‘to permit,” to let”: —
Boil the potatoes : Sho-ko di khol chuk !
(or: Get the potatoes boiled.)
Allow me to walk in front: Ngdrang-la ngen-la dul chuk.
COMPOUND VERBS, 79
8. A common appendix occurs in the use of Sir-wa “to
undergo,” which is used in a variety of phrases indicating
what is felt or passively experienced. Thus, instead| of
na-wa “to be ill,” we generally hear ne’kyr Sir-wa lit. «to
suffer by sickness ; again, dhang-ghi $ir-wa to be cold.”
« Perhaps the most characteristic of these formative
verbs, and one of very varied application, is to be met with
in the emphatic word Gya’kpa which when standing alone
bears the signification “to throw.” In several districts
of Tibet the word assumes the form GYaBPA Or Gydp-
pa; and west of Tishi-lhiimpo the latter form is the nil
most commonly heard. This auxiliary is conjoined to sub-
stantives only ; and has so extensive a range that in combi-
nation it affords quite a remarkable series of expressive and
vigorous compound verbs. In composition the verbal por-
tion alone is inflected, the preceding noun to which it i
attached remaining unaltered.
The following are the combinations more frequently
occurring; gyakpa or gyap-pa being interchangeable accord-
ing to the custom of any district :—
Lu gyakpa :
Hdz gyakpa :
Hara gyakpa :
Du-la ge’ gyap-pa :
Hire gyakpa :
to sing a song.
to exaggerate.
to throw dice.
to thrash corn.
to pile up a corn-stack.
to fire a gun.
to traffic.
to consider one’s plans.
to sculpture or emboss on walls.
to singe (e. g., a horse).
to shout.
to jeer at.
Mendd gyakpa :
Zong gyakpa :
Doz gyakpa :
Burko gyakpa :
Shop gyakpa :
Boira gyakpa :
O-sho gyakpa :
Um gyakpa : to kiss.
Wur gyakpa : to make a noise,
-
a ——— i —— ———
80
Lo gyakpa :
Yikik gyakpa :
Par gyakpa :
Hlempa gyakpa :
Shi-da gyakpa :
Arba gyakpa :
Sa-bin gyakpa :
Dhakha gyakpa :
Suk gyakpa :
Ts gyakpa :
Lap gyakpa :
Higka gyakpa :
Yukpa gyakpa :
Ghur gyakpa :
La gyakpa :
Nyi-chhol gyakpa :
Tak gyakpa :
Dhéingka gyakpa :
Lé'mo gyakpa :
Ding gyakpa :
Kha-Fiin gyakpa :
Pi-tsuk gyakpa :
Monlam gyakpa :
Zin gyakpa :
Dhong gyda gyappa :
Td-shdk gyakpa :
Jak gyakpa :
Go-la suk gyakpa :
Salpo gyakpa :
Gomba shik gyakpa :
TIBETAN
GRAMMAR.
to cough.
to hiccough.
to print.
to sew a patch.
to whistle.
to cast lots.
to sow seed,
to shoe a horse.
to hurt, injure.
to paint.
to chatter.
to sob.
to flog.
to pitch a tent.
to surmount a pass.
to walk in one’s sleep.
to achieve fame.
to count.
to imitate.
to suspect.
to pretend to have lost.
to kneel.
to pray.
to make pretence.
to seal.
to give a kick.
to rob (violently).
to have a headache.
to make bright.
to found a monastery.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 81
CHAPTER VII.
PRONOUNS,
— NEL —
1.—PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
o. We find a variety of personal pronouns of synony-
mous meaning in use in Tibet; some of these, however,
being current in certain provinces only.
TT Genitive or .
Nominative. Possessive. Accusative. Agentive.
Nya : Nge or Nygdichen | Ngd-la Ngd-yi or Ngé
Ngdrang : Ngdrang-ghs Nydrang-la N, Sirangeght
Dik : Dik-ki Dik-la Dak-kyi
Kho-wo : Kho-wor | /
Nyatsok : ceva eee,
Ap’o-nga :
$ret rrr arsenate | eet ert erent ene ane
IL. | of me, mine. me, to me. by me.
Khyo' : | Khyo' kyr Khys' 1 5" ky
yo, hyo’ yo’ la Khyo' yi
Khyo' rang 2 | Khyo rang-ghi Khyorang la Khyirang-ghi
Khye' : Khye' kyu Khye' la Khye' kyi
Ny?rang : Nyi’-1ang-ghi -rang-ghi
Nopohi 9-9 Nyi'-rang-ghi
You. of you, your. you. by you.
Kho : Khot & Khochen | Kho-la Kho-yi or Kho
Khorang : Khorang-qghi Khorang la Khorang-ghi
Khong : Khong-ghr Khong-la Khong-ghi
He. of him, his. | him, to him. by him.
11
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
ie SNS ———
inative Genitive or Accusative. Agentive.
Bominative. Possessive.
ichd ichak-ki
ichdk : ichdk-ki Ngdchik-la Nydchak-k
Nn No Ngats'o-la Ngats’o-yi
Khowo-chdk : eeerraneae Ngé'-kyi
Nyé-ts We . us, to us. by us.
-wa Kho-wa-yi
‘ho-wa : Khowachen Kho-wa la Z
oe 2 Kho-pachen Kho-pa la Kho-pa-y
Khochdk : Khochak-ke Khochdk-la Khochal -ki
Khong-ts'o: | Khong-ts'ov Khong-la Khong-ts’'o
-dak : Dhe-dag-ght
bhe is. of thom. their. | them, to them. by them.
B. Genper aNp Numer. In the application of the
foregoing pronouns there is not much attention paid to the
gender of the persons or things represented. There 1s,
nevertheless, a feminine form for kho-wo I,” where the
speaker is of the female sex, namely Kho-mo. ere
usually no distinction made between “ he gad she ;
but the latter pronoun occasionally is differentiated by sub-
stituting for the ordinary kho, the feminine monosyllable
i he.
mo “she.” The neuter “it” can be expressed by dh
The diserimination of number, mOTe0Ver, is avoided except
where any ambiguity would arise. It will be observed that
chdk and ts’o are the plural affixes, either of which may be
added to the singular pronouns of the 1st and 3rd persons.
Where feasible we find ngé or ngdrang used equally to
“we” as well as “I”; and kho, khong, &ec.,
express ;
: However wngachdk, khochdik,
oo ’
frequently signify they. ¢
&e.. are in common use also, and must be chosen whenever
’y i
stress is laid upon the number of persons indicated.
: “I” is
y. First Person. The most popular word for
—_— — mesma.
ee p—
I —————————————
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 83
ngdrang which is used in common converse much more
frequently than ngé. The possessive form mine” is
generally ngichen ; whilst “my” and « of me” are usually
rendered by ngdrang-ghi or ngdv (nge). Jaeschke says that
kho-wo is often used by a superior personage in easy con-
versation with his subordinates :—
That meadow is mine : Ne-ma dhe ngdchen yi.
My fox-skin hat is new : Ngdrang-ghi wi-shd di sarpa du’.
Let us pitch our tent near the Trdk-ki damdhu rang-ghi ghur
rock : gyak-yong.
God will give us help : Konchhoa-kyi ngichdk la ram-
da nang-gyu du.’
I loved the child when I saw
t'ong-l irang-ght kho dzd-
him on his birthday feast : orga ngdrang-ght Kho. dz
Le ming-tém-mo la pugu
wo jha yo’.
Give me a receipt : Dik-la £'6-8in chi’ nang ro nang.
Dik means really * self ” and is a common word for the
first personal pronoun both in speaking and in letter-writing,
being mostly employed in the objective case for ¢ me.”
Another term for “me” used chiefly in correspondence but
also in talk, is one of assumed humility. This is the term
fen or {en-rang (X§ p’ran or J&R" p’ran-rang) mean-
ing “insignificant one.” Thus in a letter :
“I send you my good wishes” would be rendered T"en-
rang-ne rang-ghv semkarpo p’ul jhung, i. e. < From your hum-
ble one his goodwishes are sent.”
T"en-chhung and t’em-bhu are likewise in vogue.
2. As to the use of rang-ghi a word must be here inter -
posed. It answers precisely to the apna of Hindustani
speech and stands for my” “your” “his” whenever
these possessives refer to the nominative or acting subject
of the sentence :—
I will bring my gun: Ngdrang rang-ghi mendd khyer
yong.
——— TE wn Ee ———— —— a
er ——— rr cE ——
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
He will bring my gun: Khorang ngdr mendd khyer
yong.
Khorang rang-ghi mendd khyer
yong.
He will bring the gun with Khorang mendd di rang dhang
him : nyampo khyer yong.
Begin your work at once: Rang-ght le-ka tanda t'eltu go
dzuk :
He will bring his gun :
8. Seconxp Person. The common word among equals for
“you” is thyi’rang, which frequently sounds to the ear as if
it were spelt yo’rang (Chap. I, page 13). In the dative,
khyo’-la seems to be more usual than khyd’rang-la ; thus: —
Ts'ong-wai dhon-dhu khyo’-la Have you any eggs to sell P
gong-qa yo’'pe :
Possessively this term is the common word also : —
Khyi'rang-ght ming ghang Ser- What is your name ?
ghin-re’ :
Di pugu di khyd'-kyi yo’ pe: Is this child yours?
e. However, in formal conversation with strangers, and
in addressing anybody with politeness, the words ny?’ and
ny?’ rang are generally employed :—
Ny2’ ghdne yong : Whence have you come ?
Ny’-la dhon Shik yo'pe : What is your business with
me ?
(Have you any business ?)
Nyi'rang-ghi khyim (or nang) Where is your house ?
ghd-re’ :
Kusho, nyi'rang ngd-la sem-la Sir, do you remember me ?
nge pa’ :
Another honorific term is said to be khye’. It is not so
often heard as the plural form khye’-ts’o, used in addressing
a deputation or company of people. Also khye’chdk.
e. Tuirp Person. The usual term is khorang, and both
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, 85
“he” and “she” are expressed by the word. In certain
districts we have heard mo employed for ‘“ she,” but never
kho-mo. The possessive feminine is sometimes mot, whilst
the masculine is rarely khoi, the form ¢ his” being generally
kho-rang-ghi. Kho-wa is said by Jaeschke to be a special
term for ¢ they ;” though kho tso is the word brought
to our notice as the usual plural: but we have also Leard
kho-pa : —
Kho-pa nyt p’irlok jhung du’ : Both of them were outside.
Kho-la song lap : I told him to go. (Lit: “I
told him ‘go’ ”
The neuter it’ as a nominative is never expressed ; and
when occurring in the objective case, resort is made to the
demonstrative pronouns, e. g. “He shot it” would be
““ shot this” or ¢ shot that.”
All the personal pronouns are frequently unexpressed when
the sense is apparent, the verb alone being spoken.
2—DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
a. The simplest forms are di this, dhe that. When
reference is made to anything just mentioned dhe is invari-
ably used, never di ; and so, likewise, when what is to follow
is referred to without using a noun, di is always the
pronoun selected. Thus a person, referring to what he has
just said, would in Tibetan never say: “I mention this ”’
but ‘I mention that.” So, too, with respect to place,
“this” and “that” are not used so loosely as they aie in
English speech. The demonstrative pronouns follow the
noun they qualify, and are declinable. Thus :—
Throw a stone at that tree: Shing dhe-la do gyop !
B- In the province of Tsang and in Sikkim, we have
wudi or audi and p'idi in use for “this” and * that
86 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
respectively ; moreover these pronouns then precede the
noun {—
Who is this girl ? Audi pumo ghang yi'pe ?
y. When the pronouns stand unattached to nouns, they
often take the affix ka or ga: di-ka = this, this one ; dhe-ga
that, that one. In Tsang the affix ni is added in the
same way.
Which do you want, this or Di-ka dhe-ga, nyi'la ghang got
that ? gyu ?
8. Tibetans make use of forms of the demonstrative pro-
nouns which enable them to discriminate with considerable
nicety the exact position of any object they wish to indicate.
Thus, di = this, close by ; hd- gi = that, just yonder; p’d-gv =
that, much further off, that far away; yd-gi = that, up there;
md-gt = this down below. When used with any nouns, these
compounds generally precede it.
That (over there) is mine: Pia-gi nga yin.
Sometimes in these cases di or dhe is likewise used for
perspicuity :—
Run to that house (right over P’d-gt nang dhe-la gyuksha
there) : 0’ tang (or 10’ dhang ).
Turn down that path (just Hd-gi lamkha di kyok song.
yonder) :
2. The plural affix is attached to the demonstrative pro-
noun and not to the substantive, nam and ¢s’o (sounded
ts’u) being the common affixes ; chd(k) is not often heard in
Ui:—
Take off those dogs : Khyt dhe-ts’o t'i song !
These men are a little late to- Dhe-ring mi di-nam tiktse gor
day. song.
OTHER PRONOUNS. 87
Where we have ¢ these,” « those,” apart from any noun
we hear di-nam, and dhe-dék or dhe-ts’o.
3—INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
These are used as adjectives and in the modern colloquial
differ considerably from the older forms. Little more than
n |» 3 1 . . 2 .
enumeration is needed: Dd: “any; Fhd-she (FIN).
<¢ . -
some; * ghangmo: “the whole;” £amehd (never iin)
, ..
or ts'angma “all:> kin « every ;”’ re and re-re each -
§hii- ma : others; Shem-ma another.
These can be employed alone or with nouns :—
Toktse-v tang-la ngai pe-chhd da Ave any of my books upon the
dw'ka mind’ : table or not ? ’ )
Tanda Peltu khd-she nang-la Some had gone home at once :
chhyin-pa-re’ ; onkyang £am- but all those living near s
ché tsa-ne nai-pa dhe sd-la on the ground. |
de yi’:
at
4 —INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
(1) In asking questions, the interrogative pronoun must
stand in the sentence immediately next before the verb
and therefore nearly at the end of such sentence, Those
1n common use are the following :—
Ghang : which, what; Su : who ; Kipd or Ghi-pé and Ghd-ry -
where ; Ghdnde (sounds Kdndé) : how; Qhi-dhui (sounds kd-tii)
when ; Ghd-ts's : how much, how many ?
All these are capable of declension ar
’ nd th 3
the further forms ;:— us we obtain
Ghang-la : why, for what ; Su-yi (vulgarly so-ky) whose ; Ghang-
ne : from what, from which; Su-la: to whom ; GQhd-ne : whence :
Gha-la : whither ; also a special form in Ghd re’: where is ?
88 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
a. In this connection, the difference between the use of
yin and yo’ may be illustrated yin being the more copuala-
tive auxiliary, such a phrase as Sw yin could not be taken
to mean “who is there,” which requires the use of the verb
yo’-pa meaning “to be present,” “to exist,” as wellas “to
be” accordingly Su yin means who is he” and Su yo
means ‘who is there ;”’ again, Su re’pa yinna : ¢¢ whoever
is it.” B. The interrogative affix to the concluding verb is
seldom necessary where the interrogative pronoun is used.
When 43’ concludes the sentence, the affix is often added,
which is likewise the case with yin, the interrogative forms
of which are yo pe and yimpe.
Sometimes a plural form of the pronoun su occurs, name-
ly su-su, e.g. Khye-pa di su-su yimpa: Who are those
traders ?
ii. When the pronoun ghdng has to be made use of in an
adjectival sense, it stands in the sentence immediately after
the noun and next before the verb, e.g. mgd-chd lam ghdng
do ghi-dw’ “which way are we going?”
A variation of the position occurs in a few special instan-
ces, as in the phrases: Kho ghang yul-pa leb-bhd : From what
district does he come ? Khyi ghang ts’e-la do: At what time
do you go? Gha-ts’s is used adjectivally in such sentences
as: Tashi-lhiimpo-ne Lhdsd la td ring tung gha-ts’o yo’dha what
distance is it (how far is it) from Tashilbiimpo to Lhasd?
5—RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
i. The most common method of expressing relative clauses,
namely by means of continuative and gerundial particles, has
been already fully explained and illustrated (ante Chap.
VI, B. 5, 7.)
ii. There remains to be indicated the rare form of con-
struction where our European method is resorted to. More-
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 89
over, in many instances relative pronouns are used in combi-
nation with the gerundial construction. Lastly, there is a
correlative use of the pronouns, of frequent ened,
Ghang, su, nam, are the relatives and correlatives in use.
11. The ordinary relative construction may be chosen in
such a sentence as the following : —
Tou : .
Bring me the coolie who arrived just now.”
Such a sentence may be expressed in two ways—First
with the relative pronoun, thus : —
Ngd-la khurpa ghang tanda “Which
coolie arriving just
rang lep-ne tv shok : =
now bring to me.”
Or else, we might hear th
. e sentence tur .
this style :— rned somewhat in
Tanda rang lep-pai
khurpa The coolie arrivi :
dhe ngd-la ti shok : riving just now
bring to me.
Another sentence more precisely analogous in Tibetan
dress to our relative construction would be this :—
“The dog, which shewed its teeth savagely,
was fast .
tent pole.” astened to the
Here we might have the rendering : —
Khyi ghang rang-ghi so ngdarma ten-pa dhe ghur-ber la dam-ne yo’
I't will be noted, however, that the relative clause is inserted
between the antecedent to which it refers and the article
of such antecedent, the verb of the clause occurring as a
participle. Thus, save for this introduction of the relative
pronoun ghang, the sentence resembles the participial forms
already explained. Another example will suffice :—
The guns which belonged to Méndd ghang mi-ts'o la yo’ pa
the men must be given up : di tang go-du’,
iv. Those sentences known as correlative rather than
relative always require the introduction of the relative pro-
noun,
12
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
They will be best recognised by means of several examples: —
Potsoi dmd ghang yimpa . dhe She who was the boy’s mother
khd-sdng lep jhung : arrived yesterday.
Di ghang-ghi t'obpa ngd-la khur Whoever gets it bring it me.
shok :
Khkys' ghang dok-ghi-dw’ dhe hd- Do you understand what you
go ghi-duw’ : are reading ? (Lit: What
you read, that do you under-
stand ?)
Su-la pe-chhd di yi’ pa di-la dok If anybody who has this book
yong nd, ye-shei mangpo lop- will read it, he will learn
yong : much wisdom.
Khyi'rang-la t'song-wa ghang yo’ Shew me what you have to sell.
(Lit : What to sell there is
to you, that shew to me.)
pa dhe ngd-la ten-nang :
Su yang ngd dhang nyampo Whoever will come with me,
yong-wa dhe-la ngul-p’ok ydik- shall be given good wages.
po ter yong : (Lit : Whoever will come
with me, to that one good
wages will be given.)
Khyi'rang-la to-chhd ghdng yang Whatever victuals you wanted
g6-yi’-pa, dhe ger-ne yo’ : have been provided. (Lit:
To you whatever victuals
were wanting, that has been
provided.)
Khorang ghang jhye’-kyi-yi’-na Never mind what he is doing.
yang khye'mi du’ :
Jhye’-kyi-yd’ is the Narrative Present, ky: being used for
ghi after the elided d of jhye’.)
B. Not only is the demonstrative pronoun inserted after
the clause, but the article is also introduced Biter the rel-
ative pronoun in order to give a general or correlative sense
to the latter. Thus ghang di ¢ the what’ signifies ¢ what-
ever,” and su di ‘the who” or “ the whom ” is equivalent
to < whoever ” or ¢ whomever.” This method is one of the
commonest devices to express sentences of this kind in the
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 91
colloquial; and we should recommend to the beginner recourse
to it in the first place. Taking such a sentence as: “ I shall
wear whatever I like,” we shall transmute it into the form :
“To my thinking the what is, shall wear;?” i. e., Ngdr
§hempa-la ghang di ghon yong.
v. Lastly must be mentioned the usage where “ as” occurs
as a relative pronoun. We meet with the relative construc-
tion in a sentence of this kind: “Do as I tell you.” In
order to render this into Tibetan we must turn it « As I tell
you, so do,” or more literally, ¢ According to what I tell,
you according to that do!” Nydrang ghd nangtar Ser, khyo’-
rang dhe nangtar jhyi’ chik. In Rudok and the West, gha-
suk and dhe-zuk take the place of ghd nangtar, &ec. In
Central Tibet such a sentence is best rendered Nydrang ghdnde
Ser, khyo’rang dhende jhyi’ chik : * Like what I say, you like
that do!” In fact this latter phrasing is the more generally
heard. The expression ‘So far as you can” is turned :
until what until that ...... e. g., Khyi’-rang ghd-t'uk do
chol, dhe t'ul song.
Kho-la ghdnde qo yo’, dhende Give him what he needs.
ter chik :
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER VIII.
ADVERBS.
— eto
i. The Adverb can be formed from the Adjective by put-
ting the latter in the Terminative Case. Very few Tibetans,
however, make any distinction, in this class of Adverbs,
between the Adverb and the Adjective. Thus we hear gyo’po
in use for both “quick” and “quickly; ” gorpo for “slow”
and “slowly; sim-po for ¢ quiet” and ‘ quietly.” Pro-
perly the adverbial forms of these words should be gyo’por
or gyo’bar, gor-por, and sim-por.
When the Adverb is formed from a Participle or from an
Adjective of participial mould, the particle ze is employed,
as in tdl-bu-chen-ne ‘‘lingeringly.”
ii. Custom has singled out certain words for adverbial
use which are never employed as adjectives but which
decidedly are not Primitive Adverbs. Thus ghd-/ii’ ¢ gently,”
« goftly >> (Hind : dhiste) ; tik-nyomla “ evenly > ¢ equally ;”
ma-parpar-la : seldom.”
iii. ApveErBs FroM Nouns :—These are such as: kang-
tang “on foot,” khd-ne orally > (lit : from mouth), ’¢-ma-
la “at the end,” dong-la “in front,” first,” gydp-la < at-
the back,” ts’da-dhdk < hastily” ¢ hurriedly,” ddm-la close
by, near” (lit: at the bank), dhiii-gyiin (pr. ti-gyiin) al-
ways,” Shug-la ‘behind > (from $hug-gu ‘the tail ’).
iv. ApverBs oF Time.—Nearly all these are Primitive ;
but in some instances the original form has been augmented
ADVERBS. 93
in the Colloquial by the addition of various syllables. The
chief temporal adverbs are :—
Tinda (or tanta) :
Tanda teltu :
Tanda lamsang :
Tel t'el-la :
Ting-sang :
Ngé-mad :
Chhyimo (often P’imo) :
Nygen-chhe’ :
Ting-la :
Dhé wona-le :
Le-ne :
Je-la : }
Angki jukma :
Takpa réshi :
Kap-kap-su :
Re-shik :
Chik-char-la :
Hlengyai-la : ;
Dha-chi :
Dha-rung :
Dha-p’en :
Dhi-t'uk : }
Yang-kyar :
Yang-kyar-gang :
now,
immediately.
at once.
without delay.
at present (Hind : dj-kal).
early.
late.
previously, formerly.
later, hereafter.
since then.
afterwards.
last.
always.
sometimes.
a little while.
all together, simultaneously.
recently, lately.
still, yet.
as yet, until now.
again,
often.
To these may be added a numerous list expressing specific
times, but of which it will be sufficient to mention :—
Kha-sang : Yesterday.
Dhé-ring : To-day.
Dhd-rang : This morning.
Ts'en-la: To-night.
Ning : Day-after-to-mor-
Shé-la : Three days hence.
Gui : Four days hence.
Chhus : Five days hence.
Dha-lo : This year.
Sang-nyin : To-morrow. [row. Khdsang-lo : Last year.
Sangpd’ : Next year.
N. B—The commoner term for “this morning ” is dhd-rang
§ho-ge.
94
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
v. ADVERBS OF Prace.—Some of these are Primitive
roots :—
Di-pa :
Dei :
Dhe-pa :
Dher :
Ts’ ur-la :
Diru :
Paru: thither.
P’G-gi-la : yonder.
Ha-gi-la: just there, over
there.
Yd-gi-la: up there.
Md-gi-la: down there.
Kyen-la: upwards.
Shi’la : downwards.
Gong-la: above.
Me'-la : below
Di yen-la : at upper part.
Di men-la : at lower part.
Yar: up.
Mar : down.
} here.
} there.
} hither.
Gyap-la : behind.
Diin-la : before.
Kiin-la : everywhere.
Pdar-tsam : beyond.
Sham-la : lower down, fur-
ther on.
Gyang-la : afar off.
Nang-na : ~~ within.
Bug-la : inside.
Kyiltu : in the middle.
Pi-la: outside.
Tung-tw :
} near, close by.
T'sa-ne :
Rik-te : close together.
Hd-chhok : opposite.
Di-ne : hence.
Dhe-ne : thence.
Lok-ne : back again.
Par ts'ur la: to and fro.
T’al-le : past, on.
vi. ADveErBs oF MaNNER.—In addition to those directly
derived from adjectives as shewn above, the following should
be noted :—
Multar : accordingly.
Chikpu : alone.
Dhenda : like that; a’piece.
Mangpo: much, mostly.
Dinda : thus, so.
Rang-8hin : of its own accord.
Chhd-lam : rather.
Kyang-pa : only.
Ye-ne: quite.
Chhyi-lok : backwards.
Gyiin-la : continually.
Ts’angma dom- altogether.
ne :
Rim&hin : by turns.
Shenma : otherwise, ano-
ther way.
Ha-chang : too much, very.
Tii-gyiin ddpu : as usual,
Nenten : certainly, really.
Mu-ne : exactly, precisely.
Holte : loose.
ADVERBS. 95
vii. NgeATIVE ApvERBS.—All negative particles used
with verbs are naturally adverbs, and these have been already
explained and illustrated (VI, B. 8, ii.) Two or three others
require notice: fema (with verb) and Ja-re me not at
all,” re-ken “by no means; also nyong which, when pre-
ceded by ma and annexed to a verb in the past tense, has
the force of “never,”—but see VI, B. 10. However, with
the present and future tenses nyong seems to be inadmis-
sable, the expression tsé-wa-ne followed by the verb in the
negative being then resorted to :—
I shall never go again : Nga yang-kyar tsd-wa-ne do qyu
me’.
He never comes to see me Tanda kho ngda-la td-gyu-la tsd-
~ now: wa-ne lep-kyi-min.
[ shall never be afraid again : Nyda yang-kyar tsd-wa-ne she'ms
yong.
Ndmdng with a negative future or imperative also occurs :—
The body of the abbott will Khempo-t p’ungpo ndmdng tor
never decay : mi yong.
When you come to a chhorten, COhhérten-la lep-ne, yiii-ngoi-la
never turn to the right : nd-méng ma kyok.
viii. A number of characteristic adverbs in common use
are formed, as in the case of many adjectives, by re-duplica-
ted syllables. Sometimes in the second syllable a vowel
1s varied. Thus: ¢s’er-ts’er » often, time after time, zol-zo0l
anyhow, Sop-8op : topsy-turvy, r@p-rip awry ; also dimly,”
tap-tip upside down, chhdg-gha chhog-ghé all in a heap,
tap-tap-te or tap-tap-por : suddenly, sam sum : quietly, hrik-
brik : all around, shrang-shrang : alone.
ix. Certain adverbial expressions qualify with a sense of
indefiniteness proposed actions or past sensations. These
introduce in reality indefinite relative pronouns. We refer
to phrases of this sort: “so far as I can,” “go faras I
know.” One mode of expression is to couple ghang or jhi
96 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
to the requisite verb, and to introduce this clause immediate-
ly preceding the subject of the sentence :—
I will do the utmost (as much Jas nye’ ngdrang-ghi jhyd-gyu
as possible) : yin.
So far as I know he set out Ngdrang ghang she-pa khorang
yesterday : khdsang jhyon sony.
But see under Relative Pronouns (iv, y.)
Again fsam-§hik-la = as soon as ’’ :—
As soon as the sun sets, blow Nyima di gdi tsam-8hik-la né
up the fire: pu dhang.
POSTPOSITIONS.
CHAPTER IX.
POSTPOSITIONS.
—nl A ———
1. These, the Oriental substitutes for the prepositions of
European languages, may in Tibetan as in other tongues be
divided into two main classes, namely, Primitive Postpositions
and Derivative Postpositions. The Primitives, which are all
monosyllabic, comprise the case signs and a few others. The
Derivatives, which are mostly words of two or three syllables,
have been formed—often by an ingenious and interesting
process of evolution—from adverbs, adjectives, substan-
tives, and verbs. Many of the colloquial Derivatives are of
modern development and are never to be seen in books.
2. The Primitive Postpositions are the following : Kyi,
ghi “of ;”” La “to;” Na “in ;” Nai or ne, “from ;”’ Lag
or le “from among; Kyi, ghi “by * “by the agency of ; ”
Dhang ¢ with ; > Dhu, ru, tu, or su, < into,” unto,” ¢ for,”
The usage of these will require some illustration.
La, in the colloquial, is not only the sign of the accusa-
tive (contrary to the literary usage it is seldom the sign of
the dative) but also possesses the locative significations of
“at” and “on”? :—
Look at him : Kho-la toi shik !
I shall start at dawn: Ngdréung kydreng-la gyu yong.
Put wood on the fire: Me-la shing chuk !
The bird ispale on the breast: ~~ Jhyd di dhang-la kydkoré yo’.
Hide-boats float safely on the Ko-d Yai-ru Tsangpo-1 khd-t ok-
surface of the Yeru River : la ling-ghyi ding du.’
13
en TRE L 3
a
TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
Sometimes la carries the meaning of “in” :—
Throw the small fish into the Chhu-la nyd chhung gyop !
water :
I have headache (pain in the Nga-la go-la Suk gyak.
head) :
In assessments of price, &c., la corresponds with our
preposition ¢ for” :—
The book has been sold for 15 Pe-chhd di genden tangka chongd
Galden tangkas: la, ts’ong ts’ar du’.
Occasionally “from” and ¢ by” require this postposi-
tion :—
The finial fell from the chhor- 1 ok dv chhorten-la bap song.
ten :
Hold the bird firmly by the Dap-shok-la jhyd di ling-ghys
wings : dzin !
La used in the sense of “to” is confined almost to its
use before pronouns and after verbs of giving, saying, and
sending.
Na is rarely heard in Tibet Proper as a locative postposi-
tion; and when it correctly enters into the composition of
certain compound postpositions, la is often substituted.
Nar or NE has usually the pure ablative sense of ¢ from ;”
but likewise is found in the sense of “out of” and
“through ”’ :—
He sprang out of the lotos : Kho pema-natv jhung.
From Darjiling to Pemiongchi: Dorjeling-ne Pema-yangtse t'uk-
pa-la.
It is eight years’ ago: Di-ne lo gye’ jhung.
This postposition is discriminated from Lar or Lg,
which besides the special meaning ¢ than” (vide IV, 9, a,)
conveys the sense of from out’ ¢ from among’ :—
Choose me two sheep from the Khyu-le luk nyi ngdrang-la pe
flock : Jhye!
COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS. 99
Out of nine only three were Gu-le sum mempa (or ma-tok)
saved : BAY dei min du’.
Saved from the Queer-heads Go-lok-le £ar-ne yo’.
(robbers) :
Duane is not ordinarily classed as a case sign, though it
carries the meaning “with” in its most distinctive sense.
It is attached in particular to certain verbs (such as dhalwa
“to be separated * and delwa to meet ’) and is also join-
ed with certain compound postpositions.
As a conjunction it has a distinctive use, (Vide: Ch, X,
1.)
38. Derwative or Compound Postpositions:—The first quality
to be noted respecting these Postpositions is that the
majority of them govern the Genitive case. Accordingly
each of these must be linked to the noun, adjective, or par-
ticiple, which it affects, by means of another postposition,
to wit the Genitive case-sign. Much nicety is requisite in
selecting the proper postposition to express the intended
relationship with exactness and idiom. We have endea-
voured in the lists which follow to give the precise shade of
meaning attached to each in order to avoid, where possible,
double significations; and, with this view we have sometimes
omitted allowable renderings. assigning the sense more
commonly understood in colloquial usage. Many of the
postpositions are identical with, or have been derived
from, the corresponding adverbs. Some of this class have
been compounded by adding the simple case-sign to different
adverbs. In ancient Tibetan such affixes would be those
expressing the Terminative case; in modern times the Dative
or Locative case-sign has replaced the Terminative ; though
some of the forms familiar to readers of classical Tibetan
are still heard in modern conversation.
100 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING GENITIVE CASE.
Kha-wok : beneath. Ting-la : after (time).
Wok-la : below, under. Tondd-la : for (also ton-la).
Khi-t'ok-la: on the top of. Nang-§hin : like, as.
Tang-la : above. Nang-tar: according to,
Kong-na : in the midst of. Gdng-la : on, upon.
Sep-la : between (7. e. Dhindhu: in order to.
Hrak-la : }
Nang-la : in, within. Diindhw : before, in the pre-
Pla: outside of. sence of.
T’e kyd-la : towards. Ts ap-la : instead of.
two, &c.) Len-la : in return for, for.
Chhirtu : for, in behalf of. Kap-su : on the occasion of.
Te nyd : opposite to. Tsa-ne : at, near.
Tsu-rol-na : on this side of. Tsar : to, towards.
T’uk-pa : up to, unto. Do-ru: beside, adjoining.
Gdam-la : close to, up to. ~~ Wangdhu-shor-
T’d-nyepo: near. na : concerning, as to.
Mempe : except. Gyap-la : at the back of.
Par-la : away from. [of. Dong-la: in front of.
Parkha : on the other side Der-la : on the side of, (or
Jei-la : after (place). ‘“ face of.”)
POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING ACCUSATIVE CASE.
Shuk-la: behind, Pen-la: until.
Yen-la : over. Ngo-la : towards.
T°6 : above. Ten-ne: with respect to, as to.
Kor : about, regarding. ~~ T%siin : within, by the time of
Menchhe' : underneath, not so (in the sense of
far as. “not later than.”)
Penchhe’ : beyond, further Sur-ne: along, beside.
than. Chhok-la : in the direction of.
POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE
ABLATIVE IN DHANG.
Nyampo : with, together with. Dd-te: like, equal to.
Cha-su : containing, belong- Mi dd-wa : unlike, different
ing to. from.
COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS. 101
N. B—In the colloquial da or de (really ARN) has quite
taken the place of the literary word TN in the sense of “as,”
“like,” &c., especially in compounds.
4. Use or Compounp Postrositions.—These can govern
either substantives or adjectives or verbs. When governing
the latter, the postposition is placed at the end of the sen-
tence, converting it into a gerundial clause. Subjoined are
a sufficient series of examples illustrating both methods of
employment :—
You will find rain-shelter beneath ) Khyo'rang-ght dhdk bhong di-i
that rock-boulder: y khd-wok chhar-kyib nye-yong.
The path passes between these? Yd-gi-la chhorten dhe-v sep-la
lamkha di tal do.
Let us go up to the monastery : Gompd-yi gam-la do-gyu nang.
Don’t go beyond the tree tommy Mda-gi-la shing di p'enchhe’ ma
do.
chhortens up there:
there:
The road runs along the river-)
bank : §
Come after two days:
Lam dv chhu-dam Sur-ne gyu.
Nyinmo nyi-kyi ting-la shok !
This money is for your help: { "I A Khybrang-ghi ro-rim
kyi len-la du’.
I shall arrive in three days : Nyin sum ts'iin lep yong,
There is nothing but snow "] Yd-gi-la ghang-ghi mempe chang
there : min du’.
N ,, . 7 * on . ’
All except two have been found : ( yt kd-v mempe kin di nye’ ma
{ Jhung.
( Khyo-kyi mempe su yang to-
| td ma jhye’ kyi-du’.
Di ghur-ky! p'i-la gyuk tanda
t'eltw !
The shops are opposite the Cho- ; Sok-khang di Cho-khang-ghi t'e-
No one except you grumbles:
Go outside the tent at once:
khang : nyd nds song (*“ are placed”).
Khoi ts'ap-la ngdrang khyi
dhang nydmpo do-gyu-yin.
I will go with you instead of
him:
102 TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
It is different from that: Di-ka dhe dhang mi-da-wa du’
Ngdrang dhang nyampo Gyang-
-tse :
Come with me to Gyang se tse t'uk-pa shok !
Gi-khung-gi tang-l
Hang it up above the window : PI ge tang-la yar dak
On the occasion of the lama com-
ing, prepare pastry :
} Lama di yong-wdi kap-su, khur-
wa tdl-dhik jhyi chik.
Instead of walking quickly home, 4 orang myurdhu khyim-la
dul-wd-yr ts'ap-la, kydng-
you saunter along : put-wa-yr tsap-la, kyang
kyong jhye’.
Kho song-watv ting-la, sor-dub
di nye’-chhok min du’.
After he had gone, the ring was
not to be found :
Down there is placed a chhorten Md-gi-la chhorten dung-rii Mdng
containing many bones: }
The box containing books :
Dz dom pechhd dhang chd-su di
Regarding that, I will send il Sang-nyin dhe kor khyirang-la
to you to-morrow : lon p’ul yong.
This is not for him: Di-ka kho-i ton-la ma re’.
. . Di-ka nyirang-ghi kyermen-kyi
This is for your wife : { i oy
chhirtu yi’.
Two rupees to buy the calf (for) Gyd-tam nyi, pe-to Ayo-wdi
the purpose of buying): ) dhondd-la.
I will give this for that: Nyda di wi dhe-yilen-la p’ul yong.
{* -war dhondhu tdl-dhik jhyi
chik.
{ok ghang kor-la she’ kyin
Prepare to set out:
What is he talking about: dw’ or Ser-kyin-du’ or ser-kyin-
yo’ pe ?
They went in that direction (to- ) Kho-ts’0 dhe chhok-la song ov dhe
wards that) : Le
It came out of yonder cave :
ngo-la song.
Ha-gv p’uk p’i-ne jhung.
He sold it for three sho: f Klorang §ho sum la ts’ ong-ne
Take aim among them : Dhe-yi ftang-na bem-la gyaik.
dhang chd-su chik §hak jhung.
CONJUNCTIONS.
CHAPTER X.
CONJUNCTIONS.
— EES LT —
1. Those Conjunctions, which in English connect short
clauses to each other and likewise link together longer sen-
tences, are generally expressed in Tibetan by means of the
gerundial and continuative particles elsewhere fully ex-
plained. (See: Chap. VI, B. 6, 3, ii, and Chap. XIII, 3.)
However, our common copulative and” finds its coun-
terpart in the Tibetan dhanrg, which literally signifies * with.”
Thus, such an enumeration as ‘“ horses and cows and sheep
and goats” would in the Tibetan idiom be rendered: ¢¢ with
horses, with cows, with sheep, goats ” Ti-ts’o dhang, bhamo
ts’o dhang, luk-ts’o dhang, rdma-ts’o ; or, possibly, Td-ts’0
dhang bhdmo-ts’o, luk-ts’o dhang rdma-ts’o : “cows with
horses, goats with sheep.”
Although dhang is usually translated and,” the point
to keep clear in the mind is that it is really a postposition
meaning “with,” and therefore in such an example as the
foregoing dhang belongs, not to bhdmo-ts'o as if “and
cows,” but to #d-ts’o which precedes it.
2. In enumerations in the colloquial we mostly find this
copulative omitted for the sake of terseness; and the sen-
tence above would be spoken ti-ts’o bhdmo-ts’o luk-ts’o rd-md-
ts’o, or, more briefly still, t¢ bhi-mo luk rdma-ts’o or even td
bhd luk ri-ts’o, the one plural affix ts’ sufficing for the
whole of the items :—
Buy radishes, turnips and Ldpuk Ayungma yerma nyo shik!
pepper :
104. TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
I have lost father and mother: Ngdrang dp’d dmd ghi-la song.
(Lit: “I have gone inloss.”)
Give me three mules and two Ngdrang-la dhew sum dhang
jhomo : jhomo nyt nang ro dze !
I want to eat and drink: Ngd-la 8a tung gor.
I want both to eat and to Nyd-la Sa-gyu dhang t'ung-gyu
drink : gor.
When dhang is used in the copulative sense the accent
is thrown on the preceding word and dhang spoken shortly
and quickly.
Conversationally, where the conjunction needs to be ex-
pressed, the form dhdrung is frequently substituted for
dhang. Dhdrung, signifying more yet,” is used precisely
as aur is employed in Hindustani, both as “and” and as
“ more’ :—
The man aud his wife came : Mi-po dv dhirung rang-ghs
chhung-ro lep jhung.
Sometimes when both ”—¢¢ and > would be used by us, the
Tibetan places the two nouns consecutively with nyi-ka
« the two” appended, e.g. ‘The charges for both the men
and the yaks” would be mi yik-ts’o nyi-kai p’ok.
3. The contrasting or disjunctive conjunction can be
rendered by means of continuative particles. However two
or three set terms are to be met with.
a. In short sentences where the sense of “although”
is admissible the conjunction rung is employed. In such a
sentence as: I am permitted to eat mutton but not beef,”
we may turn it; “the weight” §dng-chi = * the light-heavy ;”’
“the thickness” bom-f’d = ¢ the thick-thin ; > “ the height ”
Pin-mén = “the high-low ;”” “one’s means” chhyuk-iill =
5 ’
““ the rich-poor;”” and so forth.
Other similar substantives are derived from adjectives by
the aid of the affix khye which itself signifies “ difference.”
FORMATIVES. 109
These are akin to those just enumerated ; e. g., thickness”
= bom-khye ; a habit or custom (lit : “the accustomedness )
= ghom-khye.
2. VErBAL Supstantives.—These may be formed by the
addition of li or tang to the verbal root; e.g., dok-tang
the reading, §a-tang the eating, ung-tang the drinking,
do-lz the going, the departure, ldng-lz (literally “the being”)
the state, the condition, &ec., &c.
1]
e
. The doer of an action is expressed by the syllable khen
added on to the verbal root, and such forms are of very
frequent occurrence. Thus: s颒-khen a slaughterer, murderer ;
dok-khen a reader, jhyd-khen the maker, bdk-khen a carrier,
coolie. Sometimes po is added instead of hen, but to the
Infinitive, not the root.
This syllable may be also appended to noun substantives,
when it serves to indicate one who has specially and habitually
to do with the thing to which it is attached. So we have
shing-khen the carpenter, lam-khen the guide, ts'em-khen a
tailor, td-khen groom, horse keeper, &ec., &ec.
4. ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM SUBSTANTIVES AND VERBS. a.
In the colloquial of Tibet the derivation of adjectives from
nouns is accomplished invariably by the use of the affix chen.
The process is very regular and of extensive application,
even the formation of ordinary possessives falling mostly under
the same rule. Thus we have: wang power, wangchen
powerful ; rik fame, rdkchen famous; rin the price, rinchen
expensive, valuable; sem the mind, semchen intelligent ;
nydk-nyik filth, Aydk-nyik-chen filthy ; lung wind, lungchen
windy.
In the case of possessives we find the genitive of the noun,
where it expresses the quality or substance of another thing,
rendered in the same way: e.g., dorjé serchen a dorje of
gold, or golden dorje; khyim shingchen a wooden house, or
110 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
house of wood; but at times we might hear ser dorje and
shing-khyim used for brevity with the same meaning.
The construction with chen is, however, frequently carried
still further, being used for all manner of possession and even
with the personal pronouns. So we occasionally hear dukpo
ldmdchen instead of ldmd-yi dukpo for ¢ the lama’s coat,” and
Shambu Punts’o-chen instead of P’unts’o-i Shambu, for
““ PPunts’o’s cap.” The pronouns “my,” “his,” &c., become
ngdchen, khochen, &c., as indicated in the table of pronouns.
B. The affixes chhok and nyen are appended to verbal
roots for the production of derivative adjectives, and indicate
fitness, capability, &c. Thus from the verb gdl-wa “to pass
over,” “cross,” we obtain gdl-chhok “passable” “fordable’:
Dongtse-v wokné Nyany Chhu From below Dongtse the Nyang
gal-chhok yo’ : River is fordable.
Ydrka-la Ghang-lé-chhen La di In summer the Kanglachhen
Jam-jdain qal-chhok jhung : Pass becomes smooth and
passable.
Di chhu di £ung-nyen yimpe ? 1s this water drinkable ?
West of Shigitse nyen is more commonly heard than
chhok ; whilst further east chhok is always used and nyen
quite disappears. Thus in Western Tibet we have Sa-nyen,
khyer-nyen, gdl-nyen, &c.; whilst in the province of Ui are
said Sa-chhok eatable, khur-chhok portable, do-chhok capable
of traverse, &c., Rung also occurs in the latter district as an
affix of similar import : e. g., tsong-rung saleable.
The negative formative in these cases is usually me’ sub-
joined in place of chhok, &c. Or else mi is placed first and
chhok attached as before. TT ung me’, mv ung-chhok.
y. The negative substitute for chen 1s also me’. Thus we
hear shekchen strong, shekme’ weak (lit: possessed of
strength,” ¢ without strength ;’’ shek or she’ being a sub-
stantive = ¢‘ strength ’) ; dho’chen tasty, dho’me’ tasteless.
Also go-me’ headless, and such like.
VERBAL EXPLETIVES. 111
8. The use with chen has already been shewn to be exten-
sive. It is further available in more complex formations.
Thus we find it combined with a double noun in such expres-
sions as jhyd-yib-chen “ having the shape of a bird >’ or “ bird-
J)
shaped; khyd’-rang-ghi yib-chen having your shape ”’ =
“like you.”
Indeed yib itself is almost a formative and occurs frequent-
ly with chen :—
That mountain is shaped like Pd-gi ri dhe lang-ghi go yib
the head of a bull : chen du’.
Yonder peak is like a Noi-jin P’d-gi ri-tse di Noi-jin gyalpo yib
king : chen yo’.
He resembles his sister : Khorang singmoi yib-chen yi.
It is like mine: Di ngdi yib-chen du’; or Di
ngdchen yib-chen yong.
5. VERBAL Exprerives.—The primary signification of the
verb is capable of modification by means of certain syllables
introduced or annexed. (i) Bhag is added to the verbal root
and indicates inclination to do anything, disposition to feel
anything. When used, the causative verb Jhe’pa is generally
employed in conjunction with it as an auxiliary to the primary
verb; a few examples will at once shew the occasions where
bhag can be resorted to :—
I am inclined to go on to an- Nygdrang-ghi dhdang-sa $hem-ma
other stage (of journey): t'uk do-bhag jhe’.
Khorang gyel-bhag jhe’.
If you don’t tread carefully, I Khyi tenpo mi kyo’ -par, khyd’'rang
He is going to fall :
shall be disposed to beat you : la dung-bhay jhe’-gyu-yin.
He is inclined to accompany Kho khyi'rang dhang nyampo
you : gyu-bhag jhe’.
(11) Dhd-te attached to the root of any verb acts as an
augmentative, signifying that the action is carried on to an
excess or at least in a degree greater than usual : e. g. ;—
He prays unremittingly : Kho kurim jhe’-dhd-te.
112 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
The snow is falling abundantly : Khau-a dv bhdp-dhd-te.
Women chatter incessantly : Bhwme’ lapchha gydk-dhd-te.
Thank-you much, I have eaten 1 ukje-chhe, wngdirang to 3§d-
abundantly : dha-te.
Please drink plentifully : T’ung-dhd-te jhyi ro chy!
A kindred augmentative exists in the particle nz,
which is used however in a different way. For the sake of
emphasis the verbal root is repeated and ne is inserted be-
tween the repeated syllables. We may render the particle
by such English expletives as “indeed,” assuredly,” &ec. :—
They indeed said so: Dhenda Ser ni Ser-ne yo’.
You shall assuredly go : Khyorang do ni do-gyu-yin.
It seems to be more frequently employed when some con-
trasting statement is about to be put forward :—
Though he indeed went, he did Khorang song ni song rung, de-
no good : mo chyo’ ma jhung or Kho-
rang song ni song-ne, ma le-mo
chyo-ne yo’.
(iv) Leisure or time to do anything is very conveniently
expressed by annexing the syllable long ¢ vacant time” to
the verbal root. Thus we obtain such a series as the follow-
ing which might be indefinitely extended :—
Sd-long : time to eat. Pep-long : time to come
Sim-long : leisure to sleep. Kyo-sang-la jhe’-long : time to take re-
Dok-long : time to read. creation.
De’-long : time to stay.
Ngédrang-la lap gyak-long me’: 1 have no time to chatter.
Gompa dhe-la tok §hik-long re’: Is there time to look through
that monastery ?
(v) Opportunity in the sense of a chance or occasion offer-
ing may be expressed by adding dp as an affix to the
FORMATIVES. 1138
verbal root; but though a favourite mode of speech with
individuals, it is hardly a universal locution :—
Kyapgin dhang jdl-kha nye’'t'dp Is there any chance of gaining
yo'pe : audience of (or ‘access to”)
the Protector ?
Pep-t'ap na, ngd-la lon nang If there is an opportunity of
ro chi : going, please give me notice
(send me word).
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER XII.
IDIOMATIC PHRASES.
— EEA LT
(1) A gerundial clause is grammatically speaking only
an expanded adverb and an adverb is a contracted gerundial
clause. Thus in Tibetan we often find the adverb expanded
into a gerundial clause :—
He was beating the horse very Khorang tak-po jhye’-ndi td-po
severely : dung-gir-duk.
Pull the boat slowly to the Kdle jhye'-ndi dam-tu ko-d di
shore : dong tang.
The literal translation of these sentences is :—
He, doing it severe, the horse was beating.
Doing it gently, unto the shore the boat pull.
(2) This mode of turning the phrase occurs also in such
expressions as “in such a manner,” “in the best way he
could,” “according to the king’s command ”’ :—
The girl climbed up the ridge Pumo-i ghang ts'uk kyi jhye’-nii
in the best way she could : gang teng la dzek song.
Note :—GHANG TS'UK KYI is a phrase in itself, meaning “by
what one is able” = “ to the best of one’s ability.”
The Regent is supposed to issue De-si di Gyd-wa Rimpo-chhe-i
orders according to the Dalai gong-par nang-$hin jhye’ nr
Lama’s wishes. kagyur nang-gyu nyam-pa-
yin.
(8) Our very common expression “IT think that’ is ren-
dered Ngdi sampa la tomy thought ;”’ also “I know that >
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 115
can be phrased Ngdi shei-pa la or when uttered in a warning
manner Ngdi khyen la :—
I think that it will snow to- Nydi sampa la tering khau-a di
day : bab-gyu-yin.
I think he will not stay here: Ngdrang-ghi sampa-la kho dir
do’gyu ma re’ (also Kho-wos
sampa la, &e.)
I know you will not come back : Nygdrang-ghi khyen-la khyirang
lok yong-gyu-ma re’,
I know that sbe went home : Nygdi shéi-pa la mo-yi khyim la
song.
The hermit considered his place Gomchhen-kyi sampa-la ngai sé-
was lonely : chha dv empa du’.
Similar also is the construction in phrases beginning “I
like ” which are turned ngd-i Shempa la or ngd-i dho-wa la
(““to my taste’); and again this is akin to the method of
rendering “I want” by go: and kho-wa. (See Ch. VI, B.
13).
(4) When it is desired to express the arrival of the time
at which anything should happen or has happened, &c., the
verb bdbpa (“to descend’) is invariably made use of.
Thus, for the phrase “It is time,” a Tibetan will say “It
has come down to the time of.” So, for “It is time to start,”
he would turn the phrase ‘ It has come down to the time of
going: Gyu-pdi dhui-la bdb-jhung ; or, using another form
of the participle : Gyu-khen-kyi gang-la bib song :—
(Khyirang-la ld p'inpdi nyin la
When the day for paying you bdb-we, kap-kyen df ghen-dhm
arrives, 1 will A shuk yong (HRN AGREES
this: -~
| SAFER)
. PI : « is 13 ~»
However, ren du’ is a vulgarism for « It is time to.
(5) The verb “to be” and the pronoun in the dative is
. »
he mode of expressing ‘to have,” “to possess,” as already
116 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
indicated ; but the construction with the dative occurs in
other phrases also, such as :—
Dhé-ta ngdrang-la dhelwa re’: 1 am busy now. (‘There is
business to me now.”’)
Dhéring ngarang-la ne’ yo’ : I am unwell to-day.
Pumo dhe-la shek-chhung yo’ : That girl is weak.
Dhe-la shek-kyi chhokpa yd’pe : Is that strong enough ?
(6) The Verbum loguendi takes the usual Oriental circum-
locution. When a message is sent or any direction given
what is to be said, the speaker projects himself into the posi-
tion of his deputy, using in the direction the exact person in
pronouns and verbs which he supposes will be spoken when his
direction is carried out. Thus, “Tell him not to come” is
in Tibetan phrased as “ Tell him © do not come ;’ > and “ He
told me he had seen you” would be turned ¢ He told me
‘I have seen him.” These two sentences in Tibetan collo-
quial would be :—Kho-la ma yong lap and Khorang ngdrang
dhe-la tong jhung lap song. (N. B.—Probably in the last
sentence dhe-la which we have used for ‘ him ”—really
“ that one ’—would be expressed as kusho-la “the Saheb 7).
Sometimes, however, our European phrasing of such sentences
is resorted to, and it is not unknown even in literary works
where, usually, the expression of the werbum loquendi is
still more formal.
(7) Not dissimilar is the usage where the solution of a
doubtful state of things is requested, and where we should
employ an interrogative “if” or “whether.” Thus, “See
if he is coming” becomes * See, is he coming?” Again
“Try whether the bridge is firm” becomes “Try, is the
bridge firm ?”’ In Tibetan, therefore :—Tov shik ! khorang
yong-ghi-yo’pe ? and Ts'6’ tot shik ! §ampa tempo é yi’? The
last sentence might be varied into Sampar ts’é’ tov shik ! tempo
¢ yo’ : ““ Make trial of the bridge—is it firm 7” Again :(—
Khorang lep jhung-ngd shin-gi **I do mot know if he has
ma re’ : come.”
HONORIFICS. 117
However, both the positive and negative alternatives are
often expressed in injunctions of this kind : e. g. :—
Make strict enquiry whether Ld di khau-di chur-wa-i kar-tdk
the pass is blocked with jhyi-chik !—Y@’pa re’ me’ pa
snow, or not : re’ ?
(8) It will not be out of place once again to direct atten-
tion to the predilection of the Modern Colloquial for expand-
ed forms, especially in the case of verbs. This usage is
adopted in certain instances solely for perspicuity, as :—
mik td-wa ; instead of td-wa : to see.
to §1-wa ; » ,, 8d-wa: to eat.
yi-ge dok-pa ; ’ ,, dok-pa: to read.
nyi’ Ayal-wa; ,, myal-wa : to sleep.
But in many cases, apparently from mere love of expan-
sion :(—
dho-wa ta-wa ; for dho-wa : to taste.
sam-lo tang-wa ; for sem-pa: to think.
gyuk-shd 15'pa; for gyuk-pa: to run,
ge’mo ghe’pa : for gi’pa: to laugh.
kii-ne khurwa :
} for ku-wa: to steal.
ku-ma kii-pa ;
Similar expansions are noticeable in such phrases as kd-le
khékpo re’ : it is difficult ” now used for the old form kd
yi’ ; dhdrang sho-ge * this morning” used for dhdrang ; tak-
puk “a cavern” for p’ukpa; chhu-t’o “lips” for chhu ;
&c. Again be’pa : “to try, endeavour ”’ is never heard now,
-
the present expression being tsin-dii (ISFRATN) jhye’pa ;
No
kyong-wa to help ”” is supplanted by ro-rdm jhye’pa ; whilst
numerous other examples might be instanced.
HONORIFICS.
(1) The custom of employing special words in lieu of the
ordinary expressions when addressing persons of superior
position remains to be briefly noticed. This usage, which
in the Corean language has reached the extreme of elabora-
tion, is likewise in the Tibetan tongue governed by systematic
Ne See
CRE ih
> 3 ry Te A ile
A a bb i BB a as
118 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
principles. Not only are the names of things changed on
these occasions but also the verbs and pronouns are affected,
the adjectives alone retaining their common forms. Moreover,
there are two departments of this respectful speech ; first, the
series of terms to be used in actually speaking to, or of, a
person of rank or sanctity ; secondly, a more limited set of
words employed when talking of one self, or to others of ordi-
nary position, wn the presence of superiors. The first class are
Honorifics, the second Elegancies.
(2) For practical purposes, a few of the more frequent
terms will be sufficient to acquire. Especially should be noted
the honorific forms of the pronouns; khye’ and nyi'rang
being used for khyd’rang, and nge’ as an Hlegancy should be
employed instead of mngdrang. However, in addressing su-
periors, the pronouns should not be used abruptly, but each
sentence or question should commence with the word Fkusho,
answering to our “Sir,” or in the case of a great lama the
better style 1s Jetsiin or Jetsiin Rimpochhe. When mention-
ing parts of the great man’s body each term denoting these
should have the syllable ku prefixed. The principle verbs
to remember are the verbs p’ep-pa meaning both ‘to come ”’
and “to go” and p’ulwa to express your ‘ giving” to the
superior while nang-wa denotes his ““ giving” to you. Also,
instead of the common jhye’pa, we have dze’pa as the honorific
and gy?’'pa as the elegant synonym used in polite talk between
equals. Other honorific verbs are the following, most of which
in the original spelling have either J or § as the mitial :—
Shu-wa : to address. she’-pa to speak (of superior
himself speaking).
§hen-pa : to desire. SUNG-WA
ghe’-pa: to laugh. §i-wa : to see (superior seeing).
shum-pa : to weep. sen-pa : to hear (ditto).
Shu-pa: to sit, stay. §im-pa : to sleep (ditto).
§heng-pa : to get up, rise, de-war sheg-pa : to die (ditto).
§he’-pa : to wish. sol-wa §hei-pa : to eat.
§hei-pa : to receive, accept. sol-wa : to dress, put on,
HONORIFICS. 119
So, also, with the honorific names of things which chiefly,
we find, commence with the letter s :—
Shak : day. u: the head.
Shap : foot. shang : the nose.
ghal : mouth, face. chhyak : hand.
Ship : flour. pu: hair.
Shok : the side. tuk : heart, mind.
sang-ma : food. sol-jha : tea.
One often hears ku prefixed in the sense of “your,” e. g.,
ku kham : “your health,” ku shdp : ‘your foot.” Before
utensils and eatables sol is put: sol-shd ‘ meat,” sol-bing
“ tea-pot.” As an elegancy, $hei is prefixed to eatables and
Shal to articles used in connection with the face ; thus :(—
Shei-pdk ‘“ bread,” §hei-kyem drink.”
§hal-sak “a pipe,” 8hdl-gyen * moustache.”
When reference is made to personal articles belonging to
the Grand Lama of Lhésa, or to his characteristics, the word
ser, “ golden,” is prefixed. So his “tea” is styled ser-jhd,
his “nose” ser-shang, &c. When he dies, moreover, they
say Shing-la p’ep song “he has gone to the field ;”” while of
a great man they would say de-war sheg song, and of any
ordinary person shi song ‘ he has died.”
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER XIII.
COMPOSITION.
——eleT—
1. Orper oF Worps.—The usual order of words in a simple
sentence is Subject, Object, Predicate. Of the words attached
to the chief substantive of the Subject, we note that any
Possessive or Genitive is placed before the chief substantive,
any ordinary adjectives immediately follow the substantive,
any numeral follows the adjectives, any demonstrative pro-
nouns, indefinite pronouns, or article follow the adjective or
the numeral if there be one. The same order is observed in
the component parts of the Object in any sentence. All
extensions of the Predicate precede the main verb. In any
sentence whatever, including gerundial and participial clauses,
the verb stands last.
In any sentence where the verb takes an impersonal form,
the dative connected therewith stands at the head of the
sentence, e.g. Woma-la serru gyak jhung : The milk has
become bad ;”’ or “To the milk badness has befallen.”
The interrogative pronoun is placed immediately before
the verb : e. g., Luk-ghi kang pa chhak-pai shempa di ghdna
yo’pe : “ Where is the butcher who broke the sheep’s leg 7”
Any expansion of the substantive, of the nature of a rela-
tive clause, may either precede or follow the substantive upon
which it is dependent. In the former case the participle of
the clause is placed in the genitive ; in the latter construction
the participle remains in the case of the substantive which it
follows, the article being placed after the clause. (See Ch.
V1, 5, y, N. B.)
CONTINUATIVE PARTICLES. 121
2. (GoverNMENT BY VERBs.—Many of the verbs in use of
transitive sense take as Object an uninflected Accusative.
There are, nevertheless, a certain number which require the
Object to be inflected by the addition of the affix la. The
case thus formed may be sometimes the Dative, sometimes
the Accusative, and at times even the Locative which rarely
in Central Tibetan assumes the ordinary Locative affix na.
Other verbs, moreover, necessitate the assumption by the
Object of the Ablative Case in dhang.
a. Verbs of giving, shewing, speaking, teaching, take the
Dative in la.
B. The following verbs, with others, must be followed by
the Locative in la :—8hdk-pa to put, place, té-wa to behold,
look at, duk-pa to strike against, dhe’pa to dread, gar-wa to
fasten.
y. The Verbs requiring dhang are de-wa to meddle with,
khd-# dl-wa to separate from, jalwa to wait upon, pay one’s
respects to, ’¢’-pa to meet, with a few others.
3. ContiNuATIVE PArticLEs.—In Tibetan composition the
finite verb occurs much less frequently than in European
idiom. The main clause or sentence is almost undiscoverable
in any long statement or paragraph. The whole style of
composition is a chain of gerundial and participial clauses,
depending only technically upon one another. The chain of
clauses or sentences proceeds continuously, each successive
clause in form, though not in sense, a sequence from the other,
until at length a final verb—by no means the most important
or main one in meaning—brings a break in the connexion.
In written compositions this style 1s more observable than in
lengthy spoken sentences, but the better-educated resort to
the participial or gerundial construction even in speaking.
All the affixes forming the different gerunds ennmerated in
Chapter VI. Section B, might be denominated with equal
accuracy Continuative Particles, for nearly any one from
16
roe.
gers
122 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
among those may be added to the concluding verb of each
successive clause to carry on the chain of connexion. Of
course where the construction, in signification as well as
in external form, is really gerundial, the choice of particle
annexed should be differentiated in accordance with the dis-
tinction of kinds of gerunds already set forth, and the sense
may in fact be affected by such choice. In addition to the
affixes already given, te and dhang may be mentioned as
Continuative Particles; te being added to the root of any
verb and dhang being appended to the infinitive ; or, in other
words, dhang requires to be connected with the verb to which
taste or random selection may have attached it by the inser-
tion of pa or wa after the root of such verb.
Example of use of Continuative Particles :—
‘““ The soldiers arrived at the city and remained standing outside
the gates. They were clad in yellow coats and felt boots, and wore
on their heads Lit’ang-shaped hats. By means of those hats we
knew they did not belong to the Lhasid Government; and were
afraid.”
For translation, we arrange the wording thus :—
“The soldiers having arrived at the city, remained standing
outside the gates. Being clad in yellow coats and felt boots, and
wearing on their heads Lit’ang-shaped hats, because of those hats,
we knew they did not belong to the Lhasa Government ; and were
afraid.”
Mikmi-ts’o dhong-khyer-la leb-nav gyalgo-i p’i-la lang-nai
de’pa dhang chhupa serpo bhe-pik-la ghyin-la dhe-yi go-la
Lat’ ang-yibchen Shdmo ghyin-par §hdmo dhe-yi chhyir-dhu
kho-ts’o De-wa Jong-la ma ti-wa ngo-shei-te ngdchdik tser
Jhung.
In the foregoing there is no finite verb, nor any but
gerundial construction, observable until the concluding verb
ts’er hung. However, in the English sense of the term, that
is not correct; de’pa and ngo-shei-te are in reality both of
CORRESPONDENCE. 123
them finite verbs which, after the Tibetan style, are conjoined,
each to the sentence following, by dhdng and te, respectively,
which are thus Continuative Particles, pure and simple.
So seldom are these Particles needed in the Colloquial,
that nothing further on the subject can be added here.
4. LerreErs AND CORRESPONDENCE. In modern letter-writing,
especially in commercial and domestic correspondence, the
Colloquial development of the language is clothed in the old
literary style only so far as the spelling of the words is con-
cerned. Thus if the rules for pronouncing the written forms
are applied in inverse order to the details of grammar and
vocabulary as given in this work, there can be no difficulty
in epistolary correspondence, provided the characters, printed
and cursive, are first mastered. The rules as to spelling
and pronunciation are explained elsewhere, and if the
printed characters, as there displayed, should be used by the
traveller or student in letter-writing, any Tibetan will at least
be able to read his effusions. To acquire the cursive alphabet
may be taken as a work of supererogation for tae majority
of those interested in this tongue. However, in Csoma
Korosi’s Grammar the various types of handwriting are fully
illustrated, and doubtless by practice fair proficiency in Tibetan
calligraphy would be easily attainable.
As specimens of the modern epistolary style, we transcribe
two letters received by the author, one from a Tibetan lama
of moderate acquirements, the other from a man well-known
as a Tibetan scholar. Naturally, we give these in the ordinary
printed character, appending likewise a literal translation of
each epistle.
LETTER FROM TIBETAN LAMA—
RAH RA AG FHA NGAN]
XH RAT GIR FA FET RRA
124 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
ra 5 aa RA 3) AFR AA ER Fy eR AIA
TERI FANE 3g 55 z= ARR RRA ME FERS aay
TRIGININIINY FIRST RITENRRYS
Raja) F 3 ASF NN AR RYE BA NBN RRA MR
Eton emt menor omelets
NYRR EI (ASFNELETART FIRHITLIN
— rs NN. PB v = v = wv vo ~~, . .
A RRR ARA SIRES NA NR AYR GI ARTA]
qa’ PRAANR IRN FT IG AYN EG WIR AYA
JHNGY AN GNA ER 9G FIFI
~~ - a ~~
WE YET ITI NS GN NAN NL ISN YA |
(Translation.)
To his Graciousness the Padre Saheb Lama—
Faithful and earnest wishes are presented from your humble
one that you are well in bodily health. Very, very great
thanks not only for preparing your former letter but also
for sending a letter just now. Here am I a lama well also by
the favour of God. Some eight or nine months ago, a man
here had a book by the Reverend Milaraspa ; but the book
was sold by that man for fifteen rupees (gyd-tang). 1 am
looking out for Milaraspa’s book for you once more. If it is
obtained particulars shall be immediately transmitted to you.
At present a man here will sell a copy of “The Skein of
Golden Precepts and Biography of the Lotos Teacher” (i. e.
The Padma Tang-yig), asking thirteen rupees. So if you re-
CORRESPONDENCE. 125
CN
quire it, please to send at once in a Money Order (NEWT: )
thirteen rupees. When I have bought the book from him, it
shall be sent as quickly as possible. Many salaams are offered
from your humble Urgyan Gya-ts’o.
[It should be noted that the Tibetan of the foregoing letter is
not in places strictly accurate. Thus, several times the Ablative
is used instead of the Instrumental Case. The use of {= with
-
QS should be remarked in both letters. ‘ Salaam,” too, is
not a Tibetan greeting. ]
LETTER FROM A TIBETAN SCHOLAR—
REAR TRY Regard SRR Zz” Ey ARR
SRSA]
BAY FIR NNER ANF RATER qaras
SRT) AReE FRET A Ragga
SNYNINAFRRIIIREFR|] ARIK RGERNEr
SRR RR Ag SEE AER Gas RR A SE Rar
ANE] NENG] NITES aN RAN Aa I
HEAR GRRE AF AFTRA Fc
RENAN EEN ARDS ENTRY I Tass
ARHENRNGATN | SWAY Mesa ais Faas
AEN GZ FR AT De SERA RF SE
SER FERAL TRA | SEWER BS Rea
126 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
RATE SR SHES AR RA SS Ian Bare Rar
RY GINE| GARNI FAS Fm
SjeREN]
(Translation.)
Down before the lotos-feet of the most precious lama the
Reverend Gerham Sendbergas, the friend of virtue who lays
hold on the 30,000 stainless observances of the chivalrous!
Respects be offered !| Having to-day received your letter
written from Katak, on the 8th day of the twelfth month—
many thanks. Here am I continuing still well in health and
profoundly anxious to render any services with the very
utmost attention.! Please excuse what is omitted? (z. e.,
what may be omitted in my proffers of service) ! You yourself ®
and your wife, the partner of your seal, the goddess mem
being well in bodily health and prosperously settled, it is
indeed well. With regard to your work—the book of the
Sikkim language, I have had occasion to examine it thorough-
ly. Your letter which you wrote on the 3rd instant has been
To-morrow a reply to it
sent here from Sir
[Notes on THE ABoveE.—l “With the very utmost attention ;” AEE
exw >
NEA RF AR
8 Literally NANA = “Vacant or intermediate space,” and hence
“What is left out,” and so is now always inserted after the polite expressions
and proffers of service which form the preface to every Tibetan letter.
It implies a request that what has been left unsaid through want of space
or inadvertence should please ( § ) be taken as meant to be written down.
No
8 HN signifies really “body,” and is used as an honorific form for
>
“yourself,” i.e., “ Your own body.” The ordinary word for “body” is AN
lus.
CORRESPONDENCE. 127
shall be despatched.! As to the kind expressions of
thought which, unwavering, come yet again from you to me,
pray accept my repeated thanks. Sincere? wishes and
compliments for happiness on the good date (i. e., Christ-
mas)? are offered.
~
! Mark here the future passive tense YRS ARN ‘“ Shall have
NA
-—
been sent,” or ‘ Shall be sent.” JA is honorific for EC as Xa is for
-
weg
“3VTy
2 FS N means, of course, ‘“ white,” and hence, in this phrase, may
be rendered ‘‘ pure’ or ‘ sincere.”
8 The writer of the letter, though not a Christian, very appropriately
and thoughtfully renders ‘Christmas Day,” in this decorous expression. |
PART II.
CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES
AND
TECHNICAL LISTS.
NOTES ON LETTERS.
CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES
AND
TECHNICAL LISTS.
—_—
NOTES ON CERTAIN LETTERS.
Wherever 6H occurs in these pages it will be best under-
stood (when spoken by Englishmen) if it is sounded merely as
K. Thus ghang ‘ what,” may be conveniently pronounced
kang ; ghd-pa, where,” as kd-pa. So also pH, though
correct, may be always sounded T, and indeed Dp is by natives
frequently sounded as 1. Thus dhin-la “for” (Hind : ke-
waste) is heard often as tonla, dhdté “now” as tdtd, (or
vulgarly tandd) ghdnde ¢ how,” may (though improperly)
sound kdnte ; and the common word dhang should be pro-
nounced tang.
So, too, JH, though correct, had best be spoken as is cH.
Thus jhd ‘ tea,” may be sounded chd ; but where the y
sound follows jh as in jhyd “a bird,” either jhyd or chyd
> often
sounds chye’pa, and even vulgarly as chyi-pa. We advise
may be used. The common verb jhye’pa “to do,’
chye’pa here ; imperative : chy? “do!” Again; we print in
these pages BH in words spelt in Tibetan orthography with
initial B; but we advise the invariable use of p for BH.
Thus Pé’pa “a Tibetan,” for the more correct Bhi’pa.
We have printed LH throughout, but as the letter is some-
what guttural, the h should be sounded before the I; so, we
say for Lhdsd, always Hldsi, and lham “a boot,” is Hlam
132 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
As to U1, E1, and A1, by which we have generally represent-
ed the elided final s in us, es, and as, these are not diphthon-
gal sounds; but though the ¢ is sounded separately, it must
follow the u, e, and a so quickly and lightly as to be hardly
audible as a distinct letter. In the case of Ar, the sound of
our diphthong a? in ‘ rain,” stain,” is approached, and
for convenience we recommend that sound, or that of the open
e. So yi’pai “is!” may be pronounced yd’pe.
Final 0 in short affixes sounds like w, as in ydkpo “good,”
tékpo “hard,” &c.
The vowel ein some words seems vulgarly to change to the
vowel i. Thus ngé she-ghi-dw’ 1 know,” is heard as ngd
shin-ghi-dw’ and jhye’-kin-dw’ “is doing,” is vulgarly pro-
nounced chyin-kin-dw’.
In Colloquial Tibetan the final letter of a syllable is gener-
ally very indistinctly heard ; and certain letters when occurring
as finals are completely dropped. Final 6 takes the sound of
k, and in many parts of Tibet is hardly audible, at least in
most words. Thus t'ukje thank-you,” sounds t’u-je ; ydkpo
generally yd#’po. Final B is changed to p, as leb-jhung
« arrived,” which is pronounced lep-chung ; but this final p
is frequently unsounded, as in #'u(p)§ong shall be able,”
pd (k)-1¢(p) “broad.” Where p is the last letter it is always
inaudible, save for an abrupt almost imperceptible breathing.
Accordingly, we have invariably omitted final d, at the same
time indicating the elision by an apostrophe ; e. g., jhye’pa
“to do,” for jhyed-pa. Final 1, though often heard in the
province of Ui, is frequently dropped, especially in Tsang;
e. g., Pdl-po, “a Nipalese man,” sounds Pd’po, or Pe’bo.
After u it modifies that vowel into i, as yi’ for yul “country.”
In Jaeschke’s and Csoma’s works, no distinction as to sound
is made between the letters ch and chy, chh and chhy, and )
and jy. As in listening to natives we have clearly detected
the y sound, we have generally in these pages indicated the
y-letter words where they occur. Thus jha (or cha) is “tea,”
NOTES ON LETTERS. 133
but jhya (or chya) is “a bird ;” chhe = “great” and “very,”
and chhye = “ flour,” chhung-wa = small,” but chhyung-wa,
« to take out >’ “remove ;”’ je’ pa = to forget,” but jye’-pa
= ““ to open.”
* [Where any difficulty is experienced in sounding the cere-
brals ¢, ¥, d, dh,—and one is very apt to sound the ordinary
dentals instead—it will be best to use tr, tr, dr, and dhr, in
their place. According to Mr. Rockhill this latter pronun-
ciation is the Lhésé method. Sarat Chandra Das and others,
who have actually visited Lhdsé, contradict this assertion ; but,
although we are decidedly opposed to Mr. Rockhill’s phonetic
system in general, we are bound to admit that we have fre-
quently heard the tr and dr used. Thus drdé may be said for
4 “the voice, wi-tro for wd’-to “light” mdndro for ma do
don’t go,” t’'rdk for Pak “blood,” &c., nevertheless, the other
is deemed the proper pronunciation by the educated. ]
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
BRIEF ORDERS.
Come here :
Come near :
Come back :
Come inside (or Come into the
house) :
Come to me :
Come along with me :
Don’t come to-day: come to-
Morrow :
Don’t come so close :
Go outside :
Go away (Be off) !
Go in front :
Go behind :
Don’t go so quickly :
Don’t go far:
Get up :
Keep straight (Hind: Sidha
karo) :
Make haste :
Run quickly :
Listen here (Attend)!
Give your mind to it:
Take care :
Don’t trouble me (Hind : Dik
mat karo) :
Catch hold of it:
Stop! Stop :
Remain here :
Stay waiting here (Hind :
Hazir raho) :
Sit down:
Ts’ur shok or Diru shok !
Ts’ anas shok !
Lokne shok !
Nang la shok !
Nye tsar shok !
Ngédrang nyampo shok !
Dhe-ring ma yong: sang-nyin
shok !
Dinda ts’dnai ma yong !
Chhyi-lok song !
Ha-la gyuk !
Ngen-la gyu (often Hen-la gyu) !
Shuk-la gyw !
Dinda gyo-po mdndro !
P’ér-tsam mdndro !
Kyére lang chik! or Yar long!
Khaddu chy: or Khaddu gyu !
Ts a-dhak jhyi shik !
Gya-po gyuk !
Tsur-la nyon 8hik !
Nang-dhdk jhyi §h3° (jhyi sounds
chyr) !
Rikpa jhyi; or Rik dim !
Nyd-la nydp chii ma p'i !
Di-la zzm ; also Di-la she’ !
Ghuk-ta : ghuk-ta!
Di-pa di’ shik! or Dipa gu!
Di-pa gu'ne di’!
Nd-la di’ or (politely, with
gesture): Shu !
BRIEF ORDERS. 135
Is it there or not—See :
It is time to go now :
Send him here :
Hold in your dog, please :
Throw it away :
Blow up the fire:
Set it down; put it up; lift
it up:
Fetch the horse here :
Bring me more water:
Bring the Sahib some tea :
Take away these things :
See where he goes :
Look over there—up there—
down there :
Give me that, please :
That’s enough (Hind : Bas) /
Take off your cap :
Don’t forget (Hind: Mat
bhulo) !
Keep in the middle:
Go inside the blankets :
Go and see:
Never mind what I said (Hind :
Kuchh parwa né) :
It is time to wake up :
Put it back again :
Throw this thing away :
Don’t make such a noise :
Go and see who it is :
Make ready to start :
Never mind the rest (what
remains) :
Don’t let it fall :
Now you may go:
Dhépa "tndu mindu—To shok !
Tanda do-ren du’ !
Diru kho tong !
Rang-ghi khyi-la zzm roch (for
ro chik) !
Yuk 8hok !
Mé pu!
Sa-la 8ho’ ; yar 8ho’ ; yb-te t'o !
Ts’ ur ta-po dv t'v!
Chhw dhdrung khur shok !
Kusho-la so’jhd khur shok !
Chha-khd di-ts’o khur song !
Gha-la do-war kho-la to shok !
Pa-gi-la—ya- gi-la—mid-gi-la to
dhang !
Nyga-la dhe-ga nang roch (for ro
chk) !
Shang yong ; or yong nge !
Shambhu tu !
Mdnjé! (last syllable abrupt)!
Kiltu §hog ! or kiltu chyi!
Midsen bug-la gyu !
Td-la song !
Ke-chha di ténla ma to’ !
Nyi’ se’par ren du’!
Di lokne §ho’ !
Chha-kha di yuk tong !
Wur dhenda ma gyap !
Su y6’pe ta-la song!
Do-gyu t'l-dik chyu!
Lhak-liiv la mz to’ !
Dri sak ma chuk !
Khyo' tanda do chok !
136 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Go and call him :
Tell him to come here :
Gyu-ne kho-la ke tang sho’!
Diru shok kho-la lap !
EVERY DAY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.
Can you speak Hindustani :
Can you speak English :
‘What is this called :
Speak in the Tibetan language:
What is the name of that hill :
I don’t know :
Do you know that man :
Do you understand :
He has a bad character :
Who is this boy :
Do you know :
It is not mine:
That is mine :
Is that for me:
Has he come yet:
Who knows :
Did you know :
What are you doing:
I know :
Nothing; Sir:
Why are you doing that:
Why are you asking :
I don’t understand ; did not
understand :
Don't forget :
I will not forget :
Khys' Hindi ké lap tup-ki-
yo par ?
Khys® Piling-ght ké lap chok-
pai ?
Di-la ghang Ser-yong ?
Ps’-kyt ké-la lap.
Hi-gi ri-yt ming-la ghang Ser ?
Ngé shen-ghi me’ (often : shin-ghs
md re’) ?
Khys® ma di ngo-she yo’ pay ?
Khyiérang ko jhung-nga ?
Kho-la shi-gyii’ Rgempa re’.
Pugu dv su re’ ?
Khys' shin-ghi-re’ta ? (shin is
really she’).
Di nga-chen ma re’.
P’agi ngdi yin.
Nygdz chhyirtu dhe-ga re’ ?
Tandd khorang lep jhung-nga ?
Su she?
She’ jhung-nga ?
Khyi' ghang jhe'-kyi-yo’ (or
chyi-ki-yo’) ?
Shin-ghi-re’.
Kusho ; ghang mindw’.
Khys' dhenda ghang-la jhe’ -kyi-
yi’ ?
Khys' ghang-la di-t'ok di-ki-
yo’?
Nga ké-chhd shin-ghi me’ ; ke-
chha she ma jhung ?
Ma jé-pa jhyi (sounds chyr).
Ngarang jé mi yong.
GENERAL SENTENCES.
Don’t chatter so:
Don’t let him forget :
Everything has been arranged :
How can we go?
How was that done ?
I can’t say:
Look! do you see him ?
Look there! what is that?
When did you see him ?
Where have you been ?
What do you say ?
When did he bring it ?
Where did you put it ?
What do you want ?
It will not be wanted :
Can you begin at once :
I shall begin the work now :
Call him to come here im-
mediately :
Oh, never mind! (Hind:
Kuchch parwa nahin) :
Tell him not to come :
Why did you not come yester-
day ?
I was ill yesterday :
Where do you live ?
I live in this place:
18
Dhende ke-chhd ma gyap.
Kho je ma chuk ?
Ghang-ga gho-chd’ jhung.
Ghande do t'up yong ?
Le-ka di ghande jhumg song-
nga ?
Nydrang she’ ma chok.
Mik to-dhang ! kho-la t'ong-
nga ?
Déyi ti dhang! Dhe-ga ghang
yo’ ?
Khyo’-kyi kho-la ghd-dhii t’ong
Jhung ?
Khyo’'rang gha-ru song ?
Khyi' ghang lap-ki-du’ ?
Di-ka kho-i gha-dhi khur lep
song ?
Di-ka k&-pa shak-pa-yin ?
Khyo’ la ghd go yo’.
Ghang mi go.
Khys® tel-t'el-la go-dzuk chok-
ka’.
Tanda le-ka di go-dzuk yong.
Kho-la ke tong dhang, diru
tanda t'eltu shok !
Ke-chha te dhinla mito’ !
Kho-la lap, ma yong.
Dang-la ghang-la yong-pa-me’
(or lep-ma-song) !
Nga dang-la nd jhung.
Khys' nai-ts'ang kd-pa y&' or
Khyo' ki-pa de-ght yo’ ?
Nye nai-ts’ang di chhyok-la yo’
(“my dwelling is in this
place 7’).
138
Run for my letters to the Post
Office :
What is your name ?
From what country do you
come ?
I am from Gal-rong :
You must really come with me:
Be it as you command, Sir:
Ask him if he got the letter:
He says he received it :
How much shall I give you ?
Give me what you think right:
You know best, Sir:
May leave-of-absence be grant-
ed me:
Never mind what you have to
do, come :
Have you a substitute (Hind :
badly) ?
Please, give me an advance :
I dismiss you:
Sahib, do not be angry with
me:
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
} Yik-khyim-la nge ji-ge chhyirtu
gyuksha l5’tang !
Khys-kyi ming-la ghang Ser ?
Khyirang yu(l) ghd-ne yin ?
Ngé Ghal-rong-le yin (or lep
Jhung).
Khyd’ nenten nge nyampo yong
go yo’.
Kusho ; kd p’ep rang nang!
Kho-la lap dhang ; yige dhe t'op
Jhung-nga.
Kho lap-ki-dw’ ; dhe-la top
Jhung.,
Khyi’-la ter-wa gha ts’ ?
Nang ro mang ku-khyen Fku-
sho ; khyen khyen.
Kusho ; khyen khyen!
Ngé-la gong-pa mang ro ch’
(stress on ro).
Khysrang ghang jhye’ gyu na
yang khye’ mi du’, shok !
Khyirang-la ts’dp yi’pe ?
Nga-la ngiil ngd-chhyi nang ro
nang.
Khyirang-la gong-p’ok nang
chi’.
Kusho; mnga-la gong-pa
- ore
(FRNA ) ma t’sum ; (in-
stead of ngd-la often #’em-
bhu-la ¢ with the little hum-
ble one ”).
ASKING THE WAY.
ASKING THE WAY.
Whose house is that ?
What is the name of this vil-
lage ?
Tt is a large town: it is called
Tse-t’ang :
Is there a lodging here or not ?
On the further side of the town, {
is there any road out or not:
See those men building the new
wall ; the road begins there :
What is yonder peak named ?
Shew me the way to Gyamda:
Kindly shew me the way:
Where to 7—To Tashilhiimpo :
Where is the bridge ?
Where are you going to?
Is it an easy path ?
It is only a foot-track :
The path is steep and narrow :
Is it a broad path ?
It is a steep ascent to the Pass:
Is the road to Samye level ?
How far is it from here to Sha-
In?
Where is the road ?
Don’t go across that bridge :
How far is it to the next halt-
ing stage ?
Nang dhe so-kyi re’ ?
Dong-pa di. ming-la ghang Yo’ -
pe?
Di dong-khyer ckhe di ; Tse-tang
ger yin.
Di-pa nai-tsSang §0'pa re’ me’-
pa re’ ?
P’d-lok-la dong-khyer-ne lam chi
76° pa re’ me’ pa re’?
Mi-t'so tsik-pa sarpa gyap-lhan
dhe-la t8’ tang! Lam di p’d-
gu go-dzuk.
P’d-gi ri-tse-la ming ghang ser-
ki-yo’ ?
Gyamdd-i lam di wngd-la ten
roch ?
Lam di ten roch!
Gha-la ?— Tdshi-lhiimpo la.
Sampa di ghd re’ ?
Khyd ghd-ru do-ghi-yjimpe ?
Lam-kha di jdm-jam y&'dha ?
Kang-lam chi man-na mi yong.
Lamkhd di ghyen-ghyen tokpo
dw’.
Dhe lamkhd yang-po chi yo'-pe ?
Lé di-yi ghyen-la Sarpo dw’.
Samye kyu lam nyom-nyom €
du’.
Di-ne Shd-lu-la td-ring-t ung
ghd ts’o ?
Lam kd-pa 40° ?
Hi-gi Sam-pai t'e’ lam-la man-
dro!
Nye-wai sim-dang-sd la £'d gha
ts’o ?
140 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Is it a long way to Chhabdo? Chhdmdo la t'a ring-po é yo’ ?
Which is the way ? Lam ghang-ght yin ?
Do you see that tree on the Tsang-poi . ho hen-ngoi-la,
other side of the river ? | Fis shing dhe mik tong-
nga ?
Say that again ; I don’t under- Lok-ne lap nang; ngd hd-gho
stand : me Yong.
Ah! I understand : O-ho ! ngd hd gho jhung.
How can I find a way across ) Ngdrang-ghi chhui t'¢ lam di
the river ? } t'op t'w’ yong-nga ?
Go the second path on the left Yén-ngoi-la angki nyi-pai lam-
side : kha gyu.
Come along! keep in the mid- Nyampo shok ! kiltu shok :
dle :
Go straight on; afterwards
slant-off to the left (lit Dong-p 0 dong-po song: lar-ne yon.
“ slanting, go”) : ngd’-la kyok-ne gyuk.
Keep straight : Khadu chyi (i. e., jhyi’).
The path turns to the right : Lam di ydi-ngd’-la do ghi-du’.
The right-hand path; left- Ydi-lak iam; yin-lak lam ; gyok-
hand path ; a short cut: lan.
THE WEATHER.
The night is very dark :
It is becoming almost dark :
It is now dark :
It is now light :
Rain is going to fall :
The snow will not cease to-day :
The snow is melting quickly :
Ts’en di la miin-nak song.
Ndam-shrs® yol song.
Tanda miinpa nék-po re’.
Tanda tang karpo re’.
Chhérpa bap-yong.
Te-ring khau-a di chhé mi yong.
Khau-a di gyokpo (sounds gyo’-
0) Shu ghi-du’.
Chhdrpa di tanda chhé song.
Nga mukpa (often mu’pa) lang-
wa t'ong-ghi-yo’.
Khd-ts'up chi’ t a-nyesa-la yong-
ghi-du’,
The rain has ceased now :
I see the mist rising :
A snow-storm is at hand :
THE WEATHER. 141
Thick mists are on the moun-
tain side:
Tt will be fine to-day :
Can you run quickly ?
Don’t go there; there is mo
shelter there :
Pitch the tent at once: the
rain will pour down this
instant:
Climb the rock: over there is
rain-shelter—beneath that
boulder :
The Pass is filled with snow :
The mists will pass away when
the rain ceases :
The sun is very hot :
The sun will cause pain in your
head :
It snows : it is freezing :
Down there, there is rock-
shelter ; under that it will
be warm :
The river is frozen hard :
When does the moon rise :
There is no moon to-night:
The wind is rising; it is very
cold* :
The air will be mild at Shi-
kha :
Shake the cloak well :
Mw’ pa mongpo ri-lok-la dw’.
Dhering nam tang yong.
Khyo’rang gyokpo gyukshd 16’-
tup yong-nga (gyuk-sha 15’pa
“to run.”)
Dhe-pa mandro ; dhe-pa chhdir-
yap me’ (or chhdr-kyip me’.)
Ghur di ma-t’okts’e (or oftener
tanda teltu) §ho’ tang : tanda
lamsang chhdrpa gyap yong.
Tak-la zok; hd-kiru chhar-yap
dw’ —p’d-bong-ghi wokla (or
p'ong-ghz, &c.).
La di khau-a-yi kdk du’.
Chhdrpa chhé-ne, mw'pa di yel
do yong.
Nyi-ma hd-chang ts’dpo dw’.
Nyi-ma-yi khyd’ ky: go nas
yong.
Khau-a bap-ki-dw’ : khydk-ghi-
dw’.
Makvru dhak-kyip yo ; dhe-yi-
wd’la dhimmo yong.
Chhu di takpo khydk jhung.
Déwa gha-tur (or ka-tii) shar
yong ?
Piro di dawa mind’.
Lhdkpa lang-ghi-re’ ; nam hd-
chang dhangmo dw’.
Shi-kha la ngd-ra dv jampo rak
yong.
Chhar-bhi du sop-sop jhyi nang,
* In such phrases as “it is cold,” “it is warm,” “itis fine,” Tibetans
always say : “the sky is cold, warm, fine, &c. Thus nam lémpa dw’ : “it is
wet ;” but only, of course, when speaking of the weather or atmosphere.
142 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
When the mists are thick in a Lung-pe nang-na mi-pa di mong
valley, snow is falling heavi- po yong-pai, nye-tsdne ri-la
ly on the mountains close khau-a dv tw’ pa bap-kyi-re’.
by :
It is not freezing now : Tanda khydk-(or khyd-) ghi-
min-du’.
AT AN INN, &c.
Where can we find lodgings ? Ndi-ts'ang ghd-pd nye’ chok-ka ?
In this house: inside the Nang di-la: gom-bai bug-la.
monastery :
Knock at the door, please : Go-la tdk-ték jhyi’ nang).
Where is the landlord ? Nédi-bo ghd-pé yi’-pas ?
I am the landlady ; salutation, Ngdrang ndi-mo dyin : Ku-sho,
Sir! chhd-pe'.
I want lodgings this night, Ngdrang-la ndi-ts’ang p’iro di
please : go nang ro nang.
Kusho : chhé-pe’ zhu nang.
Sir; you are welcome :
T have two rooms above; or Nygdrang-la ya-t’ok nang-mik
nyt du’ ; md-t'ok td-ts’o dv do-
tu nang yong.
horses will remain under-
neath.
I am tired : where is the bed ? Ngdrang-la dup-kyo yin: nyd
ri € yo.
Sir; climb up the ladder and Kusho! ken-zd-la dzek-te tong
see : nang !
Here are bed and bedding : Di-lé sim-t'v mdl-ting jhung.
What bedding have you ? Khyi-rang-la mal-ting ghang
yim-pe’.
Fox-skins and a coverlet; they Wd-pdk, khebma chi: de-ddk
are dry : lem dw’.
Thanks madam hostess, I do Kd-dhim, naimo jhomo, dak-la
not require them : kho-jhe me’.
I have a hair-blanket myself : ~~ Ngdrang-la rang-ght chhalu dw’.
All right, Sir: (Sir, it is): La, la yo (or La, ld-so).
Saheb, do you desire food ?
I want a little washing-water; Ngdrang-la t'@-khu goi-pa y&’
dharung chang ma re’.
Kusho, nyi-la solwa $he’-pa-re’ ?
nothing else :
MOUNTAINEERING. 143
Have you a wash-bowl; also
water-for-washing-the-feet ?
I have no bowl : it is not neces-
sary :
We Tibetans do not bathe :
Have you a large pot ?
Bring me warm water I beg :
Are there bugs in this room ?
Give me a light :
What is the charge ?
Farewell | Many thanks :
Khyi-rang-la t'i-shong chi é yo’?
shdb-sil yang é yo’ ?
Nydrang-la shong chi me'-pa :
goi-gyu mén.
Pi-p’o-pa ngd-zhé mi t'i-pa.
Khyi-rang-la kK og-chhen chi €
yo’.
Chhu ts'em-mo chi khyer shok ro
nang !
Dé-shik-ts'o nang-mik di-la yo’
dha.
Nyd-la Jng-gu chi nang 70
nang !
Ndi-ghong ghd ts’ ?
O-nd ghd-le pep! T'uk-je
chhe !
MOUNTAINEERING.
The weather is misty :
As the rain is falling, the mist
will soon pass away :
Yes! it will indeed pass away ;
but not until evening :
It is time to strike camp :
Fold up the tent:
Put some snow in the pan :
Melt snow and make tea :
Place the saddle on the pony :
Be careful to draw the strap
tight enough:
Now we will start:
Be off! Tread firmly :
To which side does the path
turn off ?
Keep to the right ; to the left :
Don’t loiter on the way :
Nam di la na-bin 1b jhung.
Chhdrpa bhap-ne, nd-biin gyo-po
Pp u-gyu-yin.
Yd-ya ! p'uni p'u-gyu-yin ; yin-
kydng nub-mo t'uk mang.
Ghur lok tang-wdi ren dw’ :
Ghur di rl tong
Dhok-le nang-la khau-d §hok.
Khau-aé t'im-ne, soljha shom chi’.
Td-la gd te’ Shak.
Ts’6’ tor dhang ko-t'a dik tangpo
chhing!
Dhd-ta shek-gyu-yin.
Ha-la gyuk! tempo jhon chi’
(or tempo kyo’ chi.)
Chhyok ghang-la lamkhd sék-
dhe-la gyu-wa ?
Ydi-chhyok-la song ! yin-la.
Lam-la gor ma gor!
144 TIBETAN
Go straight ahead :
Go obliquely by degrees:
GRAMMAR.
T’e-kang-la gyu!
Rim-rim sek-dhe-la song !
After we have crossed the Sampa la gdl-nai, gang-khéd
bridge, we shall ascend the
ridge :
On the other side the moun-
tain-face is very steep and a
mass of loose flints :
There is no bridge ; how shall
we cross
Blowing air into this yak-skin,
we shall have a hide-raft.
zek-qyu-yin.
[Pir ri-ngor dv gyen-
Sarpo chhe shalma-chen dw’.
} Sembe chi’ me’ ne, ghd-tsul-na
gal-wa ?
Yék-ko-a di nang-la lung p’u-
nat, ngd-la ko-dhu shi’ yong.
The current is too violent; it Chhu-gyin di hdchang dhakpo
is not safe and is fearful :
Let us go together :
We must climb up this torrent-
bed :
Being very steep, climb firmly :
I am feeling dizzy :
Shall we descend the khud-
slope :
There is a ravine below :
Walk gently along that ledge:
Be careful: don’t fall :
Don’t go further that way :
That chasm is unfathomable :
The path is very precipitous :
The snow-bridges over ravines
are all melted now :
We call snow-bridges “ God’s
bridges : ”’
The hill-side has become whol-
ly melted ice :
i...
gyukndi, mi tempo yong-nai,
dhe-po dw’.
Nygéchak hlengyar-la do-gyu-yin.
Dhok-3ar dv la shi'ne dzek-pa
got.
Sar dha-te, tempo shi’ne dzok.
Ngé-la khyom-khyom jhung.
Kad-sar shd’dhu bhap-gyu-yim-
pe.
Men-la dhokpo §hik yong.
Lam-t'ang dhe la dzemte dul
song !
Riko dim : zdk ma chulk!
Ngo dhe la dhérung mdn do!
Gyé-ser-ka di ting me lon dw’.
Lamkha Sar-Sar chhe sho’dhu
bhap.
Ghdng-§am dhokpot tengkha du
Lib tanda Shu jhung.
Ghang-8am la ming dindra
Ser : konchhoa-ghi am Ser.
Ri-ngoi di ts’angma khydk-§hu-
koko jhung.
MOUNTAINEERING. 145
As the fog is thick, it is diffi-
cult to see the edge of the
precipice :
Do we continue on this side of
the river : (Lit: “ Do we go,
continuing,” &c.).
No: the path climbs from be-)
low, and beyond that rock
yonder there is another
bridge of split-cane :
Where is the bridge (split-cane
bridge) :
You will see it just now :
I am not equal to this task:
Shall we pass under that over-
hanging rock:
A little more: and we shall
see straight on:
The other side, remains of snow
still continue :
What is the name of that
valley down there below :
(Mé-gi-la lung-pa-i ming la
ghang Ser) !
Pitch the camp here:
How far is the Pass from here :
How far is Pal-dhe from here :
19
Mis-pa mongpo y&'-pe, kad-§ur di
mik td-la kd-le khdkpo re’.
Tsang-poi ts'urkha t 0-ne do-wa ?
Mindw : lamkhé di shi'ne dzek-
nat, p'd-gi dhak di-yi p’réisém
ts’@r-sam $hem-ma yo’.
Ts dr-5am dv ghd-re ?
Dha-dhe dhdrung di-la tong
yong ; or Dhdtd rang di-la
t’ ong-gyu-yin.
Ngdrang di le-ké-i ya mi chok.
Dhe dhak-kib-kytwok-la gal-gyu-
yimpa !
Dhdrung ts’abik-nar t'e-kang-la
t'ong yong.
P'ar-kha khau-@&i t'o lic jhung.
Ha-gi lung-pa shi-la di-yi ming
la ghang Ser (N.B., hd-gt sig-
nifies “ yonder” but closer to
the observer's feet than p’dgs.
Perhaps hd-gv shio-la by
which we have rendered
“ down there below” would
be replaced by md-gi-la).
Di-pa ghur lang chi’.
Ts'wrne ld di t'ukpa t'dk-ring-
tung ghd dzo yo'pe ?
Ts'ur-ne Pal-dhe t'uk-pa t'dk-
ring-t'ung ghd dzo’ yo'pe ?
146 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
How far is that peak from the Laptse-ne dhe zoktse t'ukpa t’ék-
Pass-top:
It is a long distance from here
to the Pass-top :
Tf you descend quickly you will
soon fall on your face:
The water trickles from the
rock down along my back :
Is this water good to drink :
All is drinking water up here:
A snow-slip is descending :
Ice, snow, boulders all from
above :
Is there any cave near :
Yonder, yonder ; below :
Run for your life (i. e., “ Run-
ning preserve your life.” )
There is only rock-shelter—
yonder under that boulder-
mass :
Run into the cave over there :
This is not a cave; we call
this * grotto-shelter :”
I am not at all hurt:
With spikes on your boots, you
do not slip often :
Fasten spikes on my boots
please :
See the Pass-top now:
ring-t'ung ghd dz0’ yi'pe?
(dhe zoktse instead of zoktse
dhe ‘ that peak’).
Ts’ wr-ne laptse t'ukpa t'dk ring-
mo dw’.
Khyorang gya-po shio-dhu bhab-
par, nyurdhu kha dap yong.
Dhék-lar chhu dzak-nai, ngd-i
gyap kyt tang-la bhap-ki-dw’.
Di chhu di t'ung-wai dhindhu,
yakpo € yo’?
Yd-gi ts'ur chhu t'ungchok (or
tungnyen) ts’angma dw’.
Kha-ru chi’ bhap-ki-dw’.
Yd-t’ok-ne khyak, khau-a,shélma
lib!
Ts¢-né tak-p’uk hi é yo’ ?
P’a-gv, p’agi ; ma-gi-la !
Gyuk-nav son-te shrung !
Mempe dhik-kyib mi duw’'—p’dgi
p’dbong-ghi wok-la !
Hag tak-p’uk nang-la gyuk :
Di-ka p'uk chy’ ma re’: ghydm-
kyip dhende Ser.
Ngarang ye nyam-pa ma jhung.
Rang-ghi lham-la ~~ kang-dzer
dam-pe, mangpo shor-nai gyel-
gYu-min.
Nga-i lham-la kang-dzer dam ro
Jhyt!
Tanda laptse to shok.
Beware of the Pass-poison Ld-dhuk rikpa dim !
(poisonous air on passes).
JR iE ERAN
PAYING VISITS. 147
Here we are! Hail, hail, to T5ur lep jhung! Lhd sollo, lhé
the mountain-gods ! Victory, sol-lo; Lhd gyal-lo, thd gyal-lo!
victory, to the gods !
Beware the demons on the left Yon-ldk-kyi dé-tso la rikpa dim!
side :
PAYING AND RECEIVING VISITS.
[On receiving a guest in your own house the orthodox
greeting to be uttered to him is: Chhdk p’ep 8hii’ mang or
Chhak pep mang chik !—the meaning of the first form being
¢« On arrival and departure salutation springeth forth,” and
of the second On arriving let salutation be given thee 1” The
correct reply for the visitor to make to this welcome is Lhd yo’
(or ld y&’) “Sir it is” or « Be it so, Sir.”
To an inferior comer the salutation is Tanda lep song :
« Now you have arrived ;” (akin to our “ Well, so you have
come !”) When the visit is a formal one, it is usual for the
caller to present a visiting scarf styled jéldar or khdté (lit. kha
btags “that which binds the mouth.”’) This may be either
accepted if the visitor be of average means ; or, if he be poor,
though the scarves carry the most trifling pecuniary value save
in rare instances, it may be returned to him by tieing it
loosely about his neck ; first, however, courteously and gra-
ciously receiving it] :—
Is the master at home:
He is at home—not at home:
Will his Reverence give me an
interview :
His Reverence does not receive
to-day :
Announce me !
Pray sit down :
Take a seat on the cushion :
Take some tea:
Kusho di §hu-ki-yi'pe ?
Khong §hw’ y&'—§hu’ me’.
Je-tsiin-kyt do’dhu chug-ghd ?
Dhe-ring Je-ts’iin-kyt do’-dhu
mi chuk.
Lion kyur-pa nang!
Shi!
Shuten la shi!
Soljhé §hei nang.
148
Thank you, Sir:
Bring the tea-pot here:
Do you drink tea or beer :
Place the broth on the stove :
Is your sacredness quite well:
T am quite well, are you well:
Sir, I am:
Take tea, Sir :
Many thanks, Sir:
Take more tea :
I have enough :
Have you come alone :
From where have you come :
I must go now :
Now pray dismiss me :
Farewell (lit. “ Be happy!”)
Grant me your protection !
Please come again soon :
Many thanks, Sir:
Accept this scarf :
Come again and again :
May we meet again next year:
(on parting for indefinite
period).
Visitor : I wish you farewell :
Host: Well; go gently:
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Lhé tukje! (often heard as
t'orje).
Ts ur-la 6° bing di khur shok !
Chhang soljhd khyorang-ght
ghang tung-gyu-yimpe ?
T’ukpa di jhélang-la Shik.
Je-tsiin Lhd-yi kham dé la-sam ?
Dik yé-demo ; nyt’ demo € yo’ ?
Lha, la-so.
Kusho, soljha §hei !
Lha, t'uk-je chhé (pr. torje-
chhe).
Soljhé dhd-rung Shei ro.
Ngé-la ta-yong la-so.
Nyi'rang shring-shrdng la €
yong ?
Khys' ghé-ne lep jhung!
Tanda ngdrang do-ren du’.
Tanda gong-pa nang ro.
De-war 8hu shik !
Ku-yi kyab-tu ngembu-la nang
ro! (ngembu depreciative
title for “me.”
Yang gya-po p’ep ro nang !
Lhé, t ukje chhe (*‘ t'orje-chhe.”)
Khatak di her ro nang !
Yang-kydr-yang p’ep!
Sdng-pd’ jal-wa chhok !
Wona ghdle ku §hu nang.
Wond ghdle pep !
N.B—It is etiquette in Tibet, before leaving the room after a
visit of ceremony, to empty any tea left in your tea-cup into the
shd-luk or slop-basin standing on the low table.
ys
COOKING APPARATUS. 149
COOKING AND DOMESTIC UTENSILS.
Sol-dong : a churn of hollow bamboo used for compounding tea
with soda and butter previous to boiling. Instead sometimes the
butter is put direct into each tea-cup afterwards.
Dong-mong or Do-mong : a large tea-churn, made of two half-
logs hollowed out and coopered into a barrel-form with willow
twigs.
Khok-chhen ; or Sol-§ang : tea-kettle of copper, somewhat urn-
shaped with handle on either side but no spout, in which the tea
ingredients, after churning, are boiled.
Jhémbing, or Sol-bing : brass tea-pot with spout and lid, as with
us, into which the tea is ladled from the urn for pouring into cups.
Khok-t'il : another name for a tea-pot.
Sing-ts'dl : tea-pot of another shape, in use in Tsang province;
often made of red or black pottery.
Tibril : round tea-pot, as styled in Lahul and Ladak.
Dzémbing : earthenware tea-pot.
Jhébtuk : stirring-stick for tea while boiling in §ang-bhu.
Mé-kyok : fire or charcoal shovel.
Sol-t'um : ladle for transferring tea from urn to tea-pot.
Jhé-ts'ak ; or 8hi-ma: tea-strainer made of very fine split
bamboo or cane.
Porpa : cups or bowls of various kinds of wood, box-tree and
vine-root, (but maple-knot the most valuable), used for tea, soup,
and all food, generally carried in coat-pocket (p’orshuk).
Bii’pa : bellows. (In Tsang: Bi’ pa.)
T’drbak : iron plate for food.
Terter : dish for meats.
Rék-t'um : large brass ladle.
Dhok-le : large open iron pot with handles, used for cooking
victuals.
Chédk-mak : tinder and steel.
Sang-bhu : general term for copper degchies, tinned inside.
Mér-pdru : round tin butter-box.
Chhye-kyal : flour-bag.
Tsam-khuk : tsamba-bag.
150 TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
Chhu-t'uwm : large metal ladle for getting water at springs.
Dzd-ma : ghara, or clay vessel for holding meal, water, &c.
Léng-gé : iron pan in which to parch barley for tsamba.
Sem : wooden cask or barrel.
Ohhub$om : wooden pail with lid for conveying water on back
up hills.
ARTICLES OF FOOD.
Tsdm-ba : barley-meal, prepared
by first parching the grain
and then grinding it into flour
more or less coarse.
Pak : porridge made by soaking
tsamba in hot-tea, and often
as thick as dough.
Sen : the meal soaked in beer
or hot-water instead of in tea,
kneaded into large tough balls
and eaten warm or cold.
P&'-lep : this mass made very
thick and with the addition
of ginger and aconite as yeast,
baked into flat-cakes.
Ohur-ra : a sort of flat cheesy
maccaroni, made by boiling
down milk into a curdy mass
and drying it; a little flour
being often introduced. Of-
ten in granulated masses.
Khur-wa : cakes fried in fat,
made of various meals.
Gyd-khur : Chinese cakes fried
in oil.
Bé-chi: cake made of maize
meal.
Mo-mo or mok-mo : pastry-puffs
in which is enclosed minced
meat and chopped vegetables,
sometimes sugar also.
Khabse or Shé-to : flour and fat
rolled into pastry of worm-
like form, coiled into cakes of
different shapes and baked.
Tre-tse : vermicelli made of
millet.
T’uk-pa : general term for broth
made either from meat or,
like gruel, only from meal-
stuffs.
Gyé-t'uk : * Chinese broth ”—
a more substantial soup, being
chur-ra and onions cooked up
in meat-broth.
Pé&’t'uk : broth thickened with
barley.
T’uk-t'dl: barley-meal first boil-
ed in meat-broth and, when
strained out from the broth,
then roasted on an iron-plate ;
hence styled * soup-dust.”
Sé-t’uk : soup made from a pun-
gent wild vegetable, nearly
as hot as the chilli.
Dai-t'uk : rice and meat soup.
ARTICLES OF FOOD. 151
Dai-tsém :
ground.
Yik-sha :
boiled).
Luk-shé : mutton (usually boil-
ed).
Ré-shé : goat-mutton.
P’ék-shd : pork.
Bo-ts’il : bacon.
rice parched and
yak-beef (usually
Shé-chuk : meat cut in strips
and dried. |
Gyu-ma, or gyu-ma kdrgyang :
sausages, or even the intes-
tines cooked, as every part
of an animal is consumed in
Tibet.
P'ékro and Lukro: carcases of
pigs and sheep roasted whole
in their skins and sold thus
The meat be-
comes hard and brittle and
for drying.
will keep for more than a
year in the severe cold; the
carcases being gradually
eaten.
P’ing-shd : curried meat, sold
dried on small skewers of
wood.
Kidm-chhin : liver.
Ts ilkw : fat.
Sha ts'ilme’ : lean meat.
Démché : duck.
Khyimchd : fowl.
Wo-ma : milk.
Mdr : butter.
have a supply of butter 50
(“ Some people
|
|
years’ old, laid by in their
houses, sewn up in sacks and
skins ; this is produced with
great pride on special occa-
sions, as the oldest wine is
brought out at European ban-
quets : "— Moravian
Report).
Ohyema kara : sugar (refined).
Bhu-ram : brown sugar sold in
cakes.
Mission
Gong-ngd : eggs.
Chu-li : dried and
stoned ; staple winter food in
Western Tibet.
Ngért kham-bhu : name of these
in East Tibet.
Chu-lt t'uk : soup of dried apri-
cots.
apricots
Chu-li taghir : boiled apricots
mashed into pulp, made into
cakes and then dried.
Dai chu-li : apricots with boiled
rice.
Wosé taghir : mulberries, dried,
pulverised, and made into
cakes.
Lé-pu’ : the white radish; a
popular vegetable in Tibet—
baked, or
soup.
finely-grated in
Nyungma :
prized).
turnip
(greatly
Sho-ko : ordinary Tibetan pota-
to.
152
To-ma : very small red sweet
potato.
Piling kyiu : English potato.
Choma : creeping fern-like plant
with self-rooting runners and
extensive system of roots
underground bearing small
tubercles. These are dug up
and much prized as food. See
Huc. Potentilla anserina.
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Tséng : onions.
Petse : cabbage.
Kung-lapuk : carrot.
Te-ma : peas.
Mamoipe Loto : maize.
Khalo : spinnach.
Targha : walnuts.
Debu : apple.
Kyerpa : barbery.
PREPARING AND EATING FOOD.
Place the stove down here :
Place the pot on the stove:
Make the fire burn brightly :
Throw wood on the fire :
‘What have we to eat :
Go and buy some fish:
Here are minced-meat and
bread :
I have bought a whole dried
carcase :
You have bought too much
meat :
Where is the saucepan :
How many plates have we:
The copper-pot has become
dinted :
Boil eight eggs :
Is the tea-kettle full :
Clean out the tea-pot and
make fresh tea in the tea-
kettle :
Blow up the fire again :
EE —.R
Jha-lang dhe di-pa p’db §hik.
Sang di jhd-lang tang-la §hok.
Me di t’ol-le t'ol-le par chuk.
Shing me-la luk !
Nga-la §a-war chhir-tu ghang
e ys ?
Chhyin-nai Rye Ayo shok.
Tanda momo’ pd’lep du’.
Nga shd-khak ghang-gd nyo-pa-
yin.
Khyo’-kyi shd hdachang mangpo
Ayo du’.
Sang-bu dhe kd-pa yi’.
Ngd-la derma ghd-ts'é’ yin ?
Sang di dip song.
Gong-nga gye’ kol shik!
Sol-8ang tem-tem (or ghang) yo’
par ?
Khok-t'il di tui-ne sol-3ang-la
Jha sarpa §6 shi’.
Me dhe ydng-kyar p'u gyop !
PREPARING FOOD. 153
Fetch more fuel :
I want milk and sugar :
We Tibetans always mix butter
in tea :
Make the tea in the usual way:
Bring bowl and stirring-stick :
Pray don’t let the water boil
over on the hearth: §
The milk has boiled-over :
3
Then put butter on the hearth
Pii-shing §dng-kyar khur shok.
Nygdrang-la ®oma chyéma kdra
go yo’.
Pi’pé ngé-sha dhui-gyin jha-la
mar te-ghi-ya’.
Dhiii-gyiin nangtar jhé di Jhyt
(jhyye is pr. chi).
P’orpa jhdb-tuk khur shok.
T°db-la chhu di li’ ma chuk ro
jhyi (pr. chi or chyi).
Woma li’ song
Dhe-ne t'ab-la kar-sur tong ; ngd
khyo'-la Ser-wa mangtar dhe
and say at once what I tell ¢ tanda teltu lap chi’ (kar-sur
you : J
Say like this: “O hearth-god.
don’t be angry; I didn't ¢
know !”’
Give me Chinese broth :
Remove the saucepan lid :
Skim off the dirty grease on
the surface :
Throw salt in the broth :
Is the barley-meal broth ready :
Tt is spoiled :
Cut up the meat into bits:
Cut the mutton and put it in
the pot :
Is it hot enough :
There is not enough milk :
Is it sweet or not :
Fill the tea-pot with water to
the brim :
What is there to eat:
20
= mar).
Dinde lap : “ T"ab-lha, gong-pa
ma tum ; ngas ma she.”
Gyd-t'uk nang chik.
Sang-bhu-t khep sang chak.
Kha-tok-la numtst tsok yap chik.
Ts'd t'ukpa-la tab (or luk).
Pituk tal-dhik € jhung (pr.
often t’alti é chung).
Dhe sang jhung.
Shé di tsdp tsdp jhyi. (tsab-pa:
to mince).
Luk-sha di t'upné, sang-na luk.
Yong-su ts'd-po yi'pe ?
Wo-ma $hang ma song.
Dhe §himpo é-yo’ m’é-yo’.
Khok-t'i(l) nang-la chhu dhak-
dhak ghang ghyong (or luk).
Ghang $a-wa ?
154
Please give me some :
Is it good to eat :
The dried meat is old and
brittle; I can powder it:
Powdering it, pour hot water
on it:
This is old meat : it is not bad :
Tibetans do not eat ducks :
Englishmen are fond of fish-
flesh and fowl-flesh : Tibe-
tans not :
Soak the liver in water:
This hard dry liver is very
bitter:
No matter ! no matter!
I can’t eat it :
Are you hungry: I am not
hungry :
Eat more butter: it has not
become rancid :
In taste this is sweet :
Boil the fish and put salt with
it into the water :
Always fry the eggs in good
butter :
We have no salt:
Fill the pak into that skin :
The pak is like dough :
Is the Chinese broth savoury :
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Nyd-la kda-she nang roch.
Di 34-na yd’po yi’-pai ?
Shd-chuk nying kok-chenre’ : nga
§hibmo jhe’ up.
Dhe §hibmo So-ne, chhu ts'dpo
luk tang.
Di-ni shé nying-pa du’ : dkpo
mind’.
Pipa yd-tse to §a-ghy me’.
P’iling-pa nyd-shé jhyd-sha la
gé-ghi-dv’ ; Po’pa mindw’.
Chhinpa pang-ne $ho’ (&T )
Chhinpa kyong kem di kha-po
re’.
(In Tsang) mi-to’, mi-to’! (In
Lhasa) khye'mt yo’, khye’ ma
yo’!
Nga di-la 8¢ ma chok.
Khyo' tok-ghi re’-ta? Dak-la
to-pa tok-ght mindu’.
Dharung mdr §o: di-la hamds
gyap mae jhung.
-—
Di dho-wa-la (JRA) ngar-
mo du’,
Nya kol (or ki) ; chhu-i nang-
na dv nyampo ts'é luk-ne.
Gong-nga mdr sdng-la dhui-gyiin
sek jhyz.
Ngé-la ts'a me’.
Gyu-ma-v bug-la pak gyang
8hik.
Pak dv kyoma dhang da-te re’.
Gya-t'uk dhe dho-wa §himpo
yo'par ?
THE KANGLACHHEN PASS. 155
Peel the potatoes :
Parch the barley-grain and
then grind into flour and
Sho-ko di pékpa shu §ha’.
Nai lam-ne chhyé-mar tak
dhang tsamba ger chik.
make tsampa :
I want fresh milk:
What is the price of milk :
The soup is very weak :
Put a piece of that butter in Shompa-la dr di-yi dhwmbu
the leaf with a spoon : chi’ turma-ne §ho'.
Nyé-la Womé sarpa goi yo’.
Womd-i rin ghd ts’ ?
T’ukpa hdchang ld-po dw’.
OVER THE KANGLACHHEN PASS BETWEEN
WALLUNG AND TIBET.
[The Kanglachhen and the Tipta Passes are the two prin-
cipal mountainous gateways out of Eastern Nipal into Tibet.
The former is much used by the colony of Tibetans and
Limbus settled in the Wallung Valley ; and it was over this
Pass, which is 17,000 feet at its apex, that Sarat Chandra
Dés gained access to Tibet in 1882. Sir J. D. Hooker ap-
proached but did not ascend the Pass] :—
The weather is clear: we will Nam dhdngpo dw’: ngé-ts'é La
go up quickly toward the
Pass:
Where are my snow-shoes :
Help me to descend this decli-
vity :
Take care ! It is very slippery :
Don’t fall!
I was very nearly falling:
That gorge must be 2,000 or
3,000 {uma deep: (1 #'uma
— 18 inches) :
This path runs along the face
of the cliff ; you will not fall:
di t'e-kyd la gyokpo do-gyu
Yin.
Ngdrang-ght kang-hlam di ghd-
pa yo ?
Tak-§arpo di t'engla do-gyu ro-
ram nang.
Rik-pa dim! Deé'ték shor-ghi
re’.
Gyel ma chuk!
Ngd tiktse min-na gyel-tap-yin.
Qyd-ser di kyi ting tse la f'uma
tong nyt tong sum jal-gyu yin.
Lamkhé di dhék-Sar kyi dong
dong la gyu-kin-dw’ ; khyo’
8ak ma yong.
6 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
There! you can see the corner
~~ of the rock:
At that corner the path turns
to the right and ascends :
Where is the bridge across
this ravine: I don’t see it:
The bridge has broken :
If you collect twigs and dung,
we can light a fire :
Look at that long plain of snow:
1t must be a glacier :
What is the name of that river
yonder ? Do you know ?
It is the Yungma; the great
river of the Wallung Valley:
The upper part of the valley
is full of snow :
Don’t tread there ; the snow is
quite soft :
Ah, to be sure! It is a deep
crevasse full of snow:
Fresh snow has not fallen on
the pass:
This long ridge of snow is
called Chang Chhup Gya-
lam :
There is no path across the
ridge :
Never mind; mount on my
back :
Can you bear my weight ?
Be careful! Don’t slip :
Hé-gi! dhak-ght khuk di tong
chok.
Khuk dhe la lamkhdé di yéi-
na kor-ne dzek yin.
Dhok-po-t bhar-nangla Sampa
di ghd re’? mgarang mik
td-wa ma chok.
Sampa dhe chhdk song.
Khyi' kam-shing béng-kam du
yong nd, me dhiu-pa chok yong.
Khau-é-1 t'dng ring-po dhe la
tor shok!
Ghéngchen chi’ jhung gos.
P’G-gi chhu-wo dhe kyi ming
ghd Ser ? Khyo shé-sam ?
Yungma ming di Ser yo’; chhu
chhempo dv Walung-ghi lung-
pé-yi du’.
Di p’u di khau-a tem-tem jhung.
Te-la ma dul ; khau-a dv bol-bol
dw’,
Kye, te-ka yo’ ! Khau-da-ne tem-
tem-khen ser-kha tang-ring
chi’ du’.
La-i tang-la khau-d sarpa bap ma
Jhung.
Kang-sam ring-po di Chang
Chhup Gya-lam Ser jhung.
Kang-8am kyt bhar-nang-la lam-
kha min dw’.
Mitok ! Nge gyap-la dzok.
Khyo’ nge jig-ts’e khyer chok-ka.
Rik tim! Shor ma gyap !
ESTIMATES OF TIME. 157
Hark! what is that noise ? Nyen chi! dur-da di kang dw’.
An avalanche is rolling down } Kha-ru chi md-ki-ru gya-ser kyt
into the gorge below : | t’eng-la bap-ki du’.
NT t-cha’ hh
We have now left Chang ch- | we or he ori
hup Gya-lam. This rock is a Bg g
, _ ghye song). Tak di la ming
named Dzama Nikmo : Jo, , i
di Dzdma Nakmo Ser yo.
} Di-ne Pukpa Karmo-la Cdk
ring-t'ung ghd ts’o dw’ ?
How far is it from here to
P’ug-pa Karmo ?
Are you tired ?
We can take shelter there :
I am very tired :
You proceed to Koro in |
Khyd' t’ang-chhe song-nga ?
P’-gi-la kyib nye’ chok.
Nydrang héchang t ang-chhe-so.
P’ukpa Karmo-ne Kangla-chhen
from P’uk-pa Kar i
rom Lruk-pa Barmo in a tuk chhya-shar-la dang do.
due east direction :
Itis two miles to the head of P’ukpa Karmo-ne lap-tse la nye-
the pass from P’ug-pa Kar-
mo.
ring di pakts’e nyi jal,
That is of no importance : Di dho-kal min du’.
TIME—AGE-SEASONS.
Tt is necessary to set forth briefly the Tibetan method of
reckoning time ; though in all estimates of time past, age, and
the date of events, the whole race shew the same inaptitude
for which the natives of India are remarkable. There seem
to be systems of counting the years from particular eras
in the history of the country ; but, for the purpose of distin-
guishing the years within the memory of those living, what is
termed a 7db jhung, or cycle, has been invented, which affords
distinct denominations for each year in a period of 60 years.
As each cycle of 60 years elapses the same series of names are
run through again. When, however, a Tibetan informs you
such and such an event happened in such a year, naming the
year, you can only judge from the context of his speech, or
other auxiliary circumstances, whether—for example—he
158 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
means you to understand a date which is 30, or one which is
90, years ago. The sexagenery cycle has been formed in imi-
tation of the Chinese mode of reckoning ; but the Chinese
cycle does not exactly correspond with the Tibetan cycle,
the latter being said to be 4 years in arrears of the former.
In order to form distinctive titles for every year of the sixty
composing the cycle, there has been first arranged a set of
twelve names to represent a lesser cycle of 12 years, called
lo kor. These which always recur in the same order are the
names of 12 different animals or, rather, creatures :—
1. Jhi: Mouse. 5. Duk: Dragon. 9. Spre-u : Ape.
2. Lang: Bull. 6. Dul: Snake. 10. Jhd: Fowl
3. Tak: Tiger. 7. Td: Horse. 11. Khyi: Dog.
A Yos: Hare. 8. Luk: Sheep. 12. P'dk: Pig.
As soon as the 12 years, each named after an animal in the
above order, have elapsed, the series re-commences, following
the same names, and so on, ad infinitum. However, in order
to vary the names so as to produce 60 different titles, another
cycle of 10 years is made to run concurrently with the duode-
nary series. The 10-year cycle is composed of the names of
Gve elements, each repeated twice, once with the masculine
affix po, and once with the feminine mo :—
1. Shing-po: Wood. 6. Q4-mo: Earth.
2. Shing-mo : Wood. 7. Chék-po : Iron.
3. Me-po: Fire. 8. Ohdk-mo : Iron.
4, Me-mo: Fire. 9. Chhu-po: Water.
5. Sd-po : Earth. 10. Chhu-mo: Water.
The po or mo is generally dropped ; and these names
are combined in the following manner with the duodenary
series. The two cycles begin simultaneously, the first-named
element being conjoined with the first-named animal to
denominate the first year; the second element in the list
(which, however, is the same as the first-named) being next
conjoined with the second-named, a different, animal ; and so
ESTIMATES OF TIME. 159
on. Thus we have :=—1. Wood-mouse year; 2. Wood-bull
year ; 3. Fire-tiger year; 4. Fire-hare year: and so forth.
It is obvious that the 10-name series will be exhausted
before the 12-name series. It is, however, at once re-com-
menced, the first element being conjoined to the 11th animal,
the same being also conjoined to the 12th animal, which as
both series run on concurrently causes fresh combinations.
Variations for 60 years are thus produced, when, the 10-year
scale having run exactly six times, and the 12-year scale exact-
ly five times, they both once again comuiguce together, form-
ing the same sets of combinations as in #FiVixty years just
concluded. The rdb-jhung, or sexagenary cycle, now in
progress in Tibet commenced in the year 1863; in which
year the 10-year and 12-year series began together. Accord-
ingly we have for the approaching years the following titles
whereby they may be discriminated :—
1893: Shing Ta Lo: Wood-Forse Year.
1894: Shing Luk Lo: Wood-Sheep Year.
1895: Me Téu Lo: Fire-Monkey Year.
1896: Me Jhya Lo: Fire-Fowl Year.
1897: Sa Khyi Lo: Earth-Dog Year.
1898: Si P’ak Lo: Earth-Pig Year.
1899 : Chék Jhi-wa Lo: Tron-Mouse Year.
1900: Chak Lang Lo: Iron-Bull Year.
1901: Chhu Tak Lo: Water-Tiger Year.
1902: Chhu Yos Lo: Water-Hare Year.
1903: Shing Duk Lo: Wood-Dragon Year.
1904: Shing Dnl Lo: Wood-Snake Year.
1905: Me Ta Lo: Fire-Horse Year.
1906: Me Luk Lo: Fire-Sheep Year.
Another system of nomenclature, slightly different from the
foregoing, is occasionally employed, wherein the 10-year cycle
is composed not of the elements twice repeated, but of the five
primary colours: karpo (white), ndkpo (black), marpo (red)
serpo (yellow), and ngompo (blue), together with the names of
160 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ESTIMATES OF TIME, 161
five secondary colours which are considered shades of the first. 1891:
These are combined in the same way with the twelve names of (6) July 8th f ua dnd yn ; Sixth Month.
animals to form as in the other case a 60-year’s cycle. Men- ond dd-wa : Faiset] Month.
tion is also sometimes heard of a lengthy cycle of 252 years, (7) August 6th Gian ditnga eventh Month.
. } i lowical Dho-§hin dé-wa : Wheat-faced Month.
supposed to be used in the chief monasteries for chronologica ’
Tot Kalond betruse affair in (8) Sept. 5th Dd-wa gyepa ; Eighth Month.
records. The Lo-t’o, or ka ° ar, 18 . ol a ol ane ept: Tram um dd-wa: Threshing Month.
Tibet, little understood even by men of or inary earning. 0 Out ah Dwar guegpa ; Ninth Month.
Tibetans apportion the year into lunar months (dd-wa), cor- 9) ct. t { Té-Tdr dd-wa : Forith-8tar Month.
responding with the re-appearances of the moon, and reckon- Dé-wa chu-pa ; Tenth Month.
ing ordinarily only twelve months to the year. This system (10) Nov. 3rd { Min-dhuk dé-wa : Pleiades Month,
would cause the commencement of each new year to occur (11) De 3rd Dd-wa chu-chikpa; Eleventh Month.
some ten or eleven days earlier than its predecessor. How- e TY Go db-wa : Month of Heads.
ever, in order to obviate the continuous travelling back of the 1892 -
opening day of the year, every third year an intercalery Dé-wa chu-nyi-pa ; Twelfth Month.
(12) Jan. 20d {
month, styled dd-t’eb, is inserted, which serves to bring the Gyébl dd-wa : Month of Victory.
lunar year into some settled correspondence with the solar I
year. New Year’s Day, or the first day of the first month, is VOCABULARY.
made to occur some time in our month of February according
te Time, space of time: Dhii-ts’é. Day after to-
to the date when the new moon is first visible to the naked » SP y
| Nang-par.
v 1 on Febr Year: Lo; Month: Da; déwa. MOITrow :
eye. In 1891, the Tibetan New ear opened on Tebruary Week: Gungdiin. Spring : Chyi'ka.
11th, which was the first day of the first menth and the be- Day: Nyinmo. Summer: Ydrka.
gmning of the Great Festival of Logzo. Taking the kalendar Two hours: Khyim. Autamn: Tinka.
for 1891, therefore, the months of the Tibetan year may be 94 mins : Chhuts’s. Winter : Giinka.
thus set forth, with the customary names and day of com- This year : Dhd-lo. Last night : Ddng-gong.
mencement of each month during 1891-92 :— Last year: Nd-ning. Evening : Kong-ta.
1891 : Next year: Sang-lo. All day : Nyim-gang.
Feb. 11th Dé-wa dhangpo ; First Month, To-day : Dhering. Yesterday morning : Khdnang,
( or | Ti-pa dd-wa : Horseman Month. Yesterday : Khdsang. To-morrow morning : Ngdmo.
Di-wa nyi-pa ; Second Month. Day before This morning : Dhdrang.
(2) March 12th Be da-wa : Blosseming Month. tele iy Khé-nyin. This evening : Tom
Di-wa sumpa; Third Month. Two days before Day of the | Tse Hind:
(3) April 10th { Nak dé-wa : Black Month. yes iy } Mazi nyin. Se | tarikh.) (
(4) May 10th ( hea or “ ee Three days before Yan ngiin- 3rd day of month : Tse: sum.
Sa-ga ard: cer oo yesterday : nyin. 10th day of Tei ch
ro, { Da-wa ngdpa ; Fifth Month. To-morrow : Sang-nyin month : s ev chu tampa.
L (5) Jume Sth ( Nron da-wa : Snake Month. 21 ’ yu. ’
EH —— er ii DA
162
15th day of month : Nya.
Sunday : Sé-nyima.
Monday : Sd-dawa.
Tuesday : Sda-mikmdr.
Wednesday : Sd-hlakbo.
Thursday : Sd-p’urbo.
Friday : Sd-pdsanyg.
Saturday : Sd-pembo.
Midnight : Namchhye’.
First Cock-crow ) Jhdpodang-
(about 3 am.):} po.
Second Cock-
Crow :
Third Cock-crow ) Jhd-po sum.
(about 6 a.m.): ; pa.
} Jha-po nyi-pa.
It is time to go to sleep :
We must set off now :
The night has nearly gone :
The day has nearly gone :
The sun has set :
What time is it :
About 3 A.M. :
The ‘“second-crowing” is
near (2 A.M.) :
How long have you been wait-
ing here ?
I arrived at about dusk:
We must start at day-break :
It is time to go indoors:
Wake me early in the morn-
ing :
-How old are you:
I am 18 years’ old :
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Two a.m. : Namchhyé’ yol.
Three a.m. (or
To morsows | T’orgo Sin.
head past”) :
Six a.m. (“rising
of the night”):
Eight a.m. (or Nyi-shir.
“ gun-risen ”’) :
Nam-lang.
Ten a.m. (‘“sun-
a’'walk”) : Nyi-dul
Noon: Nyi-chhye’.
4 p.m. : Nyur-me’ (myur-smad).
Sunset : Nyi-gdz.
8 pm. : Sa rup.
10 p.m. : Shro’chhol.
Nyi’ nya'-la do-ren du’.
Tanda nga-is’o gyuk go.
Nam lang-la khe' dw’.
Nyima dv yol-la khe'.
Nyima di gai song.
Chhuts's’ ghd ts’o re’ ?
T’or-go-§in tsam-la.
Jha-ke nyi-pa gyap-la khe’ du’.
Khyo' di-pa gu’ne yin ghd ts'o
song ?
Sap-sip tsam-la lep-pa-yi’.
Nam lang-ne ngdts’ o do go yi’.
Tanda nang-la pep-ren dw’.
Ngdamo ngdrang-la nyi si’ v6 chyt.
Khyo lo ghd ts’o re’ ? or : Khyi'-
la lo ghatsam lomnam ?
Ngdrang lo chobgye’pa yin.
ESTIMATES OF TIME.
I am a “serpent-year’’ per- Ngdrang diil-lo-pa yin.
son :
I was born in the water-tiger Ngdrang lo chhu-tik la kye pa
year : re’.
How many years have you ) Rhys iy: lo ghdtsam ne di-pa
spent here : ) Sha-pa yin?
Twenty-three years : Lo nyu-shu tsdak-sum.,
The man who was here yester- Khd-sang-ghi mi di lokne lep
day has come again : jhung. (Lit: The man of
. yesterday, §c.)
Four months ago my brother Nge piin shi-ne ddwa 5h song.
died :
I think the gun will be brought Ngé sampa-la mendd di sang-
to-morrow : nyin kyal jhda-gyu.
What day will the Grund) Kyapgin chhempo di shak ghang
Lama give audience : } jal-kha nang-wa ?
You are very late : Khyo’ yin ring-po gor song.
What day of the month is Dhéring ts'éi-tang ghang re’ ?
to-day : )
It is the eighth :
Come to my lodgings in two Nge nd-tsang la dhd-td chhye
hours : khyim chik shok.
I want my dinner exactly at Nyi-gdi-ky: kap-la, ngd-la to-
chhé’ kho-wa.
Ts éi-tang gye re’.
sun-down :
The reckoning of time at Lhdsa Gyd-nak-kyr ts'ul ~~ nangshin
goes according to the Chinese Lhasd-la dhw’-ts'0° tsi-wa di
method : do.
In general the lunar month is T’un-mong-la dia-kyr dd-wa
used : nangshin tsi-ghi re’.
Two days’ ago the tea was all Shak nyt ngin-la soljha di lib
done: ts’ar song.
From the 4th to the 15th day) Di khau-a di tséi $hi-ne Sungte
of the month the snow fell: § ts'ei nya t'uk-la bap-kin jhung.
The snow was falling all night Di khau-a di nam tang bap-kin-
long : Jhung.
164
1 arrived three months’ ago
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
(tit : From I arriving, oe | Ngdrang p'epne dd sum jhung.
months have arisen).
I was delayed a long while=
quite a week :
You are three days late :
I have been calling you a whole
chhuts’o :
I have been ill for more than a
week :
I have dwelt at Lhisid three
years :
Ever since last month until
now have I been ill:
I will return in nine days :
This lama is 63 years old.
Ngd-la yin ringpo gyang jhung
—diin-§hak tang chi’.
Khyé'rang §hak sum t'ep yo’.
Ddk-ght khyd'la ke gydk-naz
chhu-ts's kang-ga song (or
chhu-ts'c tang song).
Diin-t'rak p'ar-la dik nd-ts'a-yi
gir jhung. .
Lo sum tuk Lhdsé-la do’ mar
yo.
Khésang-dd-wa-ne §ungte dhatd-
pen ngd ne’ kyi §ir jhung.
Nga Shak gu Shuk-la lokne lep
yong.
Ldmd di lo re-sum dw’.
PLANTS AND TREES OF TIBET PROPER.
Som-shing : (Pinus Gerardi
ana) (?)
Séma-dong : (Abies Brunoni-
Sholpo : poplar.
Yarpa : poplar (another spe-
cies).
Mal-chang : large willow (Salix
viminalis).
Rong-chang : cliff willow (Salix
tetra-sperma).
Yili: maple.
Tdkpa : white-flowered rhodo-
dendron.
Tikma: red-flowered rhodo-
dendron.
Se-shing : spruce (Abies Smi-
thiana).
Diin-shing : silver-fir (Abies
Webbiana).
ana).
Sé-dong : larch (Larix Griffi-
thii).
Ti-dong : (Pinus longifolia).
Tong-shing : (Pinus excelsa).
Ridp’ang : Neosa pine.
Tsenden: cypress (Cupressus
funebris).
Ting-shing : yew (Taxus bac-
cata).
Shuk-po : (Juniperus pseudo-
sabina).
Péma : (Juniperus squamosa)
TIBETAN PLANTS. 165
De-shuk : (Juniperus recurva).
Targa : walnut,
Gom-rok : holly.
Champaka : magnolia (Michelia
Champaka).
Luduma : (Decaisnea insignis).
Shdlmdli-shing : a huge Bom-
bax loaded with lovely scar-
let blossom, producing pods
bursting with long silky
wool.
Ku-shu : Tibetan apple.
Nyo-ti : Yarlung pear.
Sendu : pomegranate.
Choli : apricot,
Wosé-shing : mulberry.
Kye-dum : plantain (in Zayul).
Dha-li : dwarf rhododendron.
Manupatra : (Bryonia dioeca).
Tu-nak : (Helleborus niger).
Li-tsi : (Pyrus baccata).
See Hue. vol. I, 24.
Wamp’u-shing : (Pyrus ursina,)
stunted-shrub akin to rowan.
Ser-lum: wild yellow rasp-
berry.
Kyu-dema: current bearing
edible large red sour berries.
Bhi-li-tsi : wild gooseberry.
Alhirso : cranberry.
Kunda kdri : cloudberry.
Kyerpa : barberry (Berberis
Tibetanus).
Nyang-ka : wild current (Ribes
petreeum).
Se-wa : yellow rose.
Sallow-thorn
(Hippopha# rhamnoides).
Taru, or Kharmu: (Nitraria
Schoberi) “ camel’s thorn.”
Umbhu : tamarisk,
Burtse : Eurotia.
Ts er-tar-kar :
Dhdma : Tibetan furze.
Brita: (Cuscuta epilinum).
Ts’e-pe’ : (Ephedra saxatilis).
Chitdka : ( Anemone rivularis).
Bhong-mar : red aconite (Aco-
nitum luridum).
Bhong-nak : (Aconitum nap-
ellus).
Tong : gigantic arum (Ari-
scema).
La-chhw : rhubarb,
Ruta : elecampane.
Jhyd-kang : (Orobanche coe-
rulia).
Jhya-po tsi-tsv:
Roylei).
Jhang-chhup
(Impatiens
shing : white
narcissus.
Yd-kyima : (Saussurea gossy-
pina).
Kurkum : marigold (Caltha
scaposa).
Khur-ts'6’ : dandelion.
Tikta : chiretta.
Dhevma : poa grass.
Lu-di’ : plant with edible
tubers (Codonopsis ovata).
Cho-ma : (Potentilla anserina)
having edible roots which
are highly-prized in Tibet
eee err mpeconseeeenteenbrremeeetieteie bee tiem’ rode sams
166 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
(See Hue. II. 86, and Rock-
hill 180).
Zd-tsa : large nettle (Urtica
heterophylla).
De : (Daphne papyraces).
Tang-goi : (Arenaria rupifraga).
A-t’ong : (Arenaria Roylea).
Sira karpo : (Cuminum cymin-
um).
Serchhe : (Saxifraga flagellaris).
Laddra : (Delphinium glaciale).
Ngémbhu : Delphiniam Bruno-
nianum).
Latsi-metok : Musky Pedicu-
laris.
FAUNA AND AVI-FAUNA OF TIBET.
MAMMALIA.
A
Dong RAR" Wild yak (Poé-
phagus grunniens).
Dong-dv : Wild yak-cow.
Dong-t'uk : Wild calf.
Yik H[NA] Tame yak (gener-
al term).
Na
Dimo QS N° Domestic female
yak.
Dimdzo : cross between yellow
ox and dimo.
nF,
Dzo NER (often Jo) cross be-
tween yak-bull and common
Indian cow.
Dzo-mo : female of this breed ;
the most common domestic
animal in Tibet.
Garpo—Garmo : maleand female
resulting from further cross-
ing of dzo-po or dzo-mo with
common Indian cattle.
Tolmo : further cross, back
towards yak by interbreeding
garmo with yak-bull.
Langto: Common humped-ox
(Taurus Indicus).
Bha-chu : Humped cow.
et .
Nyga-gi’ R&R Wild camel
(Camelus Bactrianus).
By. col
ERE Domestic
Bactrian camel.
Gung = Mongol Tiger: thick-
~
Ngd-mong
and broad-headed
species found on Chinese fron-
tier (Mongol : Kharakula).
Tak BA Common Tiger (Felis
tigris) ; variety of, found in
furred
Zayul and Pemakoichhen, S.
E. Tibet.
N
Sik =A Tibetan leopard
(Felis irbis) akin to the
Ounce. ;
MAMMALIA OF TIBET. 167
Sd NA Snow leopard (Felis
macrocelis); named shan in
Ladak.
Sd-chulk ANA Clouded
leopard (Felis macroceloides)
akin to the Rimau Dahan of
Sumatra.
Pungmar RARARNN (also
Sik jug-kar) : Red-shouldered
tiger-cat (Felis nigrescens:
Hodgs).
Sikmdr : ~~ Marbled
(Felis dosal).
Yi Rg Tibetan Lynx (Felis
isabellina) paler than Felis
lynchus (in Ladak 7).
Tsokde or yi-chhung: Pallas’s
Lynx (Felis manul).
Sik-chhum : Spotted Civet-cat
(Prionodon pardicolor:
Hodgs).
i
Sd-chhyong FNAAKE" Com-
mon Civet-cat.
tiger-cat
(Viverra
melanurus : Hodgs.)
Chyd-sik : Paradoxurus lani-
ger: Hodgson.
Shul-jhi : Tibetan
(Putorius Tibetanus).
Pole-cat
Tou-p’v: Tibetan tree-marten
(Martes toufeeus : Blyth.)
Tou-lo : Indian Marten (Martes
flavigula).
Kalon-shram : Black Sable (Pu-
torius zibellina).
Buldkha : Golden Sable of
Tsang (Putorius auriventer);
a rare and beautiful species
found in Tsang, Lhobrak, and
Jhya-yul. i
Kangshram : Ermine (Mustela
erminea).
Té-mong : Pale Weasel (Mustela
temon ).
Ld-kyvmo : White-nosed Weasel
(Mustela canigula).
Stré-mong : general term for
species of Weasel found in
East Tibet, e. g., Mustela
Moupinensis, Mustela astutus,
and Mustela Davidianus,
Wok-kar RMR White-
throated Ferret-Badger
(Helictis monticola).
Dhumpa NA Tibetan Bad-
A]
ger (Meles leucura); found
in Tsang.
Dhum-pu-se: Tibetan Shrew-
Badger (Arctonyx albogu-
laris).
Tak-shram : Hill Otter (Lutra
aureobrunnea).
Chhu-shram : Clawless Otter
(Aonyx leptonyx).
Wak-dongkha AER Tibe-
tan Racoon or Red Cat-bear
(Ailurus ochraceus).
-
Dhom = Tawny Bear (Ursus
pruinosus : Blyth).
i HH
An
means Tartana ee se taser fi Joey Fark Tt Agi SL Ba feet Hg
168 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Dhom-khdina : Snow Bear
(Ursus isabellinus).
- a
Dhée’mong AAR Ko6-ko-nur
Bear (Ursus lagomyarius),
Tik-dhompa : Spectacled white
Bear (Aeluropus melanoleu-
cus) found in Moupin and
probably north of Namts’o
Chhyidmo.
} ng v
Chyang-ku 3 TM
Wolf of Tibet (Lupus Tibe-
Called shangku in
Golden
tanus).
Ladak.
Chyang-rok : Black Wolf of
Tibet (Lupus lycaon).
Parchyang : Wild Dog (Cuon
alpinus: Pallas).
Par-wa: Lesser Wild Dog
(Cuon primeevus)e
Wi-mo : Himalayan Fox (Vul-
pes montana).
rte .
Wa-do-do iN Sl al Yellow Tibe-
tan Fox (Vulpes flavescens) ;
found all over Tibet.
Yi-gur or Witse: Rusty Fox
(Vulpes ferrilatus).
Wi-ndk : a black Fox.
Gomkhyi : Larger Tibetan Mas-
tiff.
Shangkhyi: Small
sledge dogs.
Lingkhyt : Greyhound.
Chhi-wa ; or Chhi-p’t: the
Tibetan Marmot; of which
Mongol
several species exist in Tibet,
swarming everywhere.
Kyang TR" Wild Ass of Tibet
(Equus kyang).
Bong-bhu : Domestic Ass.
Td : Horse.
Wal-wa : small black horse of
Gyangtse.
Dhe-po : mule.
Shé-u or Shd-wa: large deer
sometimes known in books
as the Barasingh (Cervus
Wallichii).
Kha-sha : Spotted deer.
Séru [N'X’ the Serow (Ne-
morrhoedus bubalinus).
~~
Tss* or Tseuw H|ON the soe
called Hodgson’s antelope ;
the cho of provincial Tibetans
and stsot of the Ladaki.
-~
Go-a RR Ravine deer or
Tibetan chamois (Procapra
picticaudata).
Ld-wa ax Musk deer (Mos-
chus moschiferus), of which
there are 3 species.
SN
Eyin 9% Tibetan Ibex (Cap-
ra sakeen).
Danmo 5H Female Ibex.
MAMMALIA OF TIBET. 169
Ni HI5R° or Napu : the great
Burrhel wild sheep (Ovis
Nahur),
Nyen H|%%" the Argali wild
sheep (Ovis Ammon).
Shapo : Another wild sheep
(Ovis Vignei).
Jhang-luk : the large load-
carrying domestic sheep of
N.-W, Tibet.
Rd-wo : Common goat.
Rd-po-chhe : Wild goat.
Jagma : Red Squirrel of Sikkim.
T'dlyi: Squirrel; steel grey
with jet-black tail.
Ri-gong : Hare. 4 species.
Abra ; and Zabrad : Several vari-
eties of Lagomys or tail-less
rats are included under these
names,
SSN
Ting-Jing ARERR Brown-
toothed shrew (Sorex Sikki-
mensis).
Tak-lungchen JESS Spi-
~
der shrew (Sorex myoides :
Blanford).
Shing-ting-jing : Tree shrew of
Khams (Tupaia Chinesis).
Chhu-jhi-tse : Tibetan water
shrew (Nectogale elegans).
P’u-se or Pra-li : Tail-less shrew
(Anurosorex squamipes).
Tsi-p’u-tse : Uropsilus soricipes.
Pi-chhung : Musk-rat (Sorex
murinus). -
Surdman : Brown mole of Ké-
ké Nur (Scaptonyx fusicau-
datus: Milne Edwards).
Byu-long : Short-tailed mole
(Talpa micrura).
Ld-tsi-byu-long : Musk mole
(Scaptocheiros moschatus) :
in N. E. Tibet.
Jhi-tsi : Common rat.
T'si-tsi : Common mouse.
Zikmong : Porcupine (in Zayul,
&c.)
Gang-serma : Hedgehog: term
for both the Erinaceus auritus
and Erinaceus Amurensis (of
Koko Nur).
he
Teu 23 Greyish-yellow lan-
gur monkey with long tail
(Semnopithecus schistaceus).
Shiré-kho : Larger Tibetan Ma-
caque monkey found in
Khams, &c. (Macacus Tibe-
tanus).
Mdnu : A brown monkey.
A-nwo: Szechuen monkey—Ma.-
cacus cyclopis.
Tr, or Shra : y White langur
monkey.
22
err] smear tet coi Ht
170
P’a-wang :
Jhyd-soma :
Gd-wang-
Qd-p’ong lowing kinds
Names used with
little discrimi-
nation for vari-
ous species of
Te'kyq : Bats. The fol-
frequent differ-
ent regions of Tibet :—
‘Plecotus auritus (Long-
eared Bat).
Synotus Tibetanus (var. of
Barbastelle).
Vesperugo noctula.
Vesperugo serotinus.
Vesperugo discolor.
i il FE RE
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Vesperugo Leslieri.
Vesperugo Maurus (in Dok-
de and Derge).
Vesperugo borealis (in
Khams and Amdo).
Hipposiderus Prattii (Dar-
chendo and Lit’ang).
Scoptophilus ornatus ( Yun-
nan frontier),
Vespertilio mystacinus
(Bast Tibet).
Vespertilio dasyeneme
(Tsaidam).
Harpiocephalus herpia(Sik-
kim, Zayul).
Birps.
Jhyd-l8k : Eagle.
Jhdngd’ or Gho-wo: Lammer-
gayer.
Kydk-lik : White Scavenger
Vulture.
Gho-ser : Himalayan Vulture.
Nyéd-ldk : Osprey.
Ping-kyu-ma : Kite.
Né-1é ; Great Buzzard.
Bhong-t’a : Tibetan Falcon.
Tq: Hawk (two or three
species of).
Ukpa ; also Singjhya Ukpa :
Owl, the many species of
which are hardly discrimi-
nated by Tibetans.
Porok; also Chhoi-kyong :
Raven (Pyrrhocorax gra-
culus).
Khd-ta : Crow (Corvus pasti-
nator).
Kyungka : Jackdaw.
Te-ka : Magpie (Pica pica).
Gomchhen kyd-khi: Large-
headed Magpie.
Sa-shdka : Jay.
Jol-ndk : A species of Black-
bird (Merula ruficollis) : the
se v v
REA Ey of Tibetan litera-
ture.
Jol-t'd : A large piebald Merula,
described as white in color
with yellow markings, and
red behind the ears.
T'ung-t'ung : Crane.
Kangka : Heron (Ardea pra-
sinosceles).
BIRDS—SPORTING. 171
Kyarmo : Bittern.
Khamehhu Ringmo : Snipe
(Scolopax solitaria).
Mdbjhya : Peacock.
Purgin : Wood Pigeon.
Ang-gu : Dove.
Shing-gon ; Woodpecker.
Lhijhyd Ghongmo: Crossop-
tilon Tibetanum.
Ri-kyek : Lophophorus I Huysii
Ghong-yak : Ithaginis Geof-
fryoi.
Horpa-karpo : Thaumalea Am-
herstiz.
Horpa : Thaumalea picta.
Juk-deb : Wagtail.
Ghong-sek : Phasianus decol-
latus.
Sekpa : Partridge.
Ong-lok : Tragopon (Ceriornis
Temmincki).
Ou-nétso : Parrot.
Pupu-kushu : Hoopoe.
Kingbo : Swallow.
Chhilpik : Sparrow.
Ngangpa karpo: White Goose. -
Ngangpa serpo : Yellow Goose.
Hwang-ya : Sheldrake.
Ngurpa : Wild Duck.
Ngur-ru : Teal.
Yd-tsé¢ : Common Duck.
Khézhur : Water-hen.
SPORTING IN TIBET.
rifle : me-dé.
double-barrel rifle.
Turkish musket : chdl-¢’d.
pistol : rangbdr.
gunpowder : medzé.
bullet : dik-ril.
cartridge : medzé-shup.
small-shot : ¢s’igu.
gun-stock : gumdad.
gun-barrel : dd-chdk.
powder-flask : dze-khug.
gun-cap : me-do.
(really “flint.””)
trigger: mdsha.
gun-cock : me-kdm.
hunting-knife : rd-kysi.
spear: dung; dung-t'ung.
saddle-cloth : gd-khep.
knap-sack : khdbtika.
to fire : gyap-pa (me-dd).
to shoot : p’dng-pa.
to aim at: dik-pa.
to hit : khéi-pa.
to wound : md-chung-wa.
to kill : se-pa ; sok chi-pa.
to lie in wait : kok-jdb-pa.
to creep: p’e-wa.
to stab : sok-khung gyap-pa.
horns : rdcha.
skin : pdk-pa.
tail : shu-gu.
bones : rii-pa.
feathers : pudo.
claws : der-kyu.
172 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
[ When the native explorer A—. K—. visited, in the year 1880-81, the
northern parts of Tibet, he brought back word of the marvellous profusion of
game of the larger kinds to be found roaming over the steppes of the Jing-
t’ang.. Mr. Hennessey in the official report thus summarises the explorer’s
information :—‘ The Jingt’ang is a vast and marvellous expanse of high
undulating land ...... only some 100 miles broad to the west near Skardo ; it
is widest on the meridian of 86° where it is some 500 miles across, and to the
east it ends in an inclined width of some 350 miles, from whence it slopes
further eastwards, rapidly losing its characteristics and merging into the
cultivated lands of China. Its length is about 1,500 miles, and in area it is
some 480,000 sq. miles This enormous tract of high table-land is
believed to be generally some 15 or 16 thousand feet above sea-level... .. The
whole Jingt’ang is coated by a short succulent grass, which from May to
August, covers the undulations with the softest of green carpets, extending
far away and visible for even 50 or 60 miles in the clear crisp atmosphere
prevailing. But beyond the abundant grass, nothing else will grow on this
high land ; there is no wood or scrub of any kind for fuel; and, in a word,
the products of the earth are solely suited for graminivorous animals, which
run wild in enormous numbers, as the yak, goat, sheep, deer, &c. ; and the
weaker of these provide food for the wolf, jackal, and yi (lynx). It is said
the grass does seed, and most probably is propagated chiefly by that means;
but other seeds, as of wheat or barley, though they germinate and produce
fodder for cattle, yield mainly seedless ears, and hence no food for man
The vast number of wild animals of the Jangt’ang sufferer diminution from
one cause only—the occasional extreme severity of winter, when, deprived of
grass, they die by thousands, as their skeletons testify.” ]
The gun is not loaded : Me-da di dze-me re’.
Give me another gun:
‘When I have fired, hand me
the other gun at once:
As soon as you see it, call out :
I saw the antelope near the
river down there:
Climb up that tree yonder and
look round :
Do you see anything :
I see nothing :
Follow me quickly: go care-
fully :
That is the dung of what ani-
mal ? Do you know :
Lukpa! where are you :
Here ? what is it, Sir:
Ngé-la me-dé shemma kur chik.
Gyap song-ne, tanda teltu ngd-
la me-dda §hemma kur chik.
Di-la tong tal, ke gyak! (or
khé tang).
Ma-gi-la chhu-i do-ru tsew di
mik tong jhung.
Hi-gi shing dhe dzek-la Khor
to shok.
Khyirang-ghi ghang-yang 8hik
t’ongpe ?
Ngdrang-ghi ghang-yaig tong
ght ma re’.
Nyurdhu nge shug-la shok; chd-
gha song.
Dhii’'do ghdng-la chr-wa di
yimpe ? Khyorang she-sam ?
Wa Lukpa ! Khyorang ghd re’ ?
Diru! ld l&-sdm ?
SPORTING. 173
Be ready with the cartridges :
If I miss it, there will be a
struggle for life :
Sir; I hold my life cheap
(Lit: “ do not see my life’) :
Bears live on that slope :
What is the name of that bird ?
I don’t know ; I forget :
Pick that up; I want it:
We must climb up the torrent-
bed :
Hold on to the tree ! take care :
I am slipping down :
Throw down the powder-flask :
Let it fall gently :
I want help: give me your
hand :
There is no grass: the plain is
quite bare :
Do you ever see wild yak on
this plain :
I have never seen yéks here :
Many wild ydks are found
beyond that lake yonder :
Do you see those trees on the
opposite side of the valley :
Look further on: you will see
three go-wa deer:
Beyond the three go-wa are
six nyen:
I see them: until now I did
not notice them.
Médzé shup dhe t'dlti hdl ?
Ngdrang-ght di-la mi khéi-nd
(“if I don’t hit it”), sok
dharg tondd jhung gyu re’.
Kusho ; nge sok-la mik td-
ghi-me’.
Dhe-mo-ts’o dher gang-khi-la
do-ght yo’.
Jhyd di-la Ding ghang Ser ?
Shen-ghi ma re’; ngdrang je'-
ght re’.
Dhe ruk chik! ngd-la kho-jhe
yo’.
Nygdcha dhoksar-la shi'ne dzek
go.
Shing di dzin : rikpa dim ?
Sho’dhu de'tak shor-ghi-yi’.
Dze-khw’ dhe t'engla yuk chik.
Di jém-jém gyer nang.
Roram goi-pa : ngd-la lik sing
tong.
Tsa me’ : t'dang di ter ter du’.
T'ang di la dii re shi’ dong da
t'ong ki du’ ka ?
Ngdring-gi di-ru dong t'ong
ma nyong.
P'd-gi ts’o dhe p’en-chhe "dong
mdng-po nye chung.
Khyo' shing-ts'o dhe lung-pd-i
p'ar-khd t'ong-ké ?
Par-tsam toi shok : khyi-kyi go-
wa sum t'ong yong.
Go-wa sum di p’enchhe nyen tuk
yo’.
Ngd dhe-la mik tong: dhi-ta
p'en dhe-la jhi-ra ma jhe’.
174
ll i A ey
Look again: take heed :
Look out! where are you go-
ing :
Drag the body to the river-
side :
Can you skin it :
Work carefully :
Collect dry dung and burtse,
and light a fire :
Where is the tinder-case.
AER TT SE J
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Lok-te to shok : myon chik!
Rik dim ! kdpa do-ghi yin ?
Chhu-yt ddm-tu ro di Cen
song.
Pakpa di shu ts'uk-ka ?
Chdgha lditka jhyi’ chik !
Bang-kdm burtse t'u-ne me dhuk
8h’.
Mé-chék-khuk di ghd ve’ ?
SHOPPING IN LHASA’.
Where can I buy books :
Book-vendors remain standing
near the western gate of Cho-
khang :
Do they sell printed books :
They sell both printed books
and Manuscripts :
I want to buy the Pe’'ma Tang
Yik of Pe’'ma Jungnai and
the Ponpo book Lu Bum
Karpo: :
I have the first book; the
second is not sold publicly
in Lhasa :
What price do you ask for
Gyal-rabs Sal-wai Me-long :
I want twenty Galdan tangka :
Will you please abate the price :
Sir, I have fixed (lit: “cut”)
the price ; I cannot abate :
You are outwitting me:
Pe-chhd-ts’o ghd-pa nyo up
yong-ngd ?
Pe-chhai-ts’ongpa Cho-khang-ghs
nup-gyd-go ts-ndi tdng-te de’.
Par-ma ts'ong-ghi-re’ ?
Par-ma yik-chha nyi-pa ts’ong-
ghi re’.
Pe’'ma Jungndi-ky: Pe'ma Tang
Yik di dhang Pin-kyi pe-
chha Lu Bum Karpo nyo kho -
wa yo’.
Nyd-la pe-chha dhangpo di yi’ ;
nyi-pa di Lhdsd-la d-sdl-la
ts'ong ght ma re’.
Gya-rap Salwe Mélong-ghi rin
ghd ts’ lap-ki yo’.
Ngdrang-la Ginden tangka nyi-
shu goi-pa.
Khyd’rang khe-ru song ro dze’.
Kusho ; rin di cho’ pa yin ; khe-
ru do mu ts'uk.
Khyi'rang-ght ngd-la dok long.
SHOPPING
I never cheat ; we do not throw
abuse like that in Lhasj :
You fix the price too high :
I will lessen the price one
tangka :
Taking the price, give me the
book, please :
Where are the tea-shops ; kind-
ly show me :
Tea is sold in the market :
What kinds of tea have you :
Various kinds; all that are
necessary :
What sort is this tea:
What is the weight of the
brick :
The full weight of this kind :
What do you call that tea :
This tea, Sir, is the best; it is
named Du-t’ang No. 1:
The price is one shrang and
two tangka each brick :
That other tea is Du-t’ang No.
2; that is the second class :
The third kind is called Gye-
pa; and the worst is Goka :
Show me, please, the way to
the Nipalese merchants :
They live in T’om-si-ghang
near Wangdu chhérten :
What merchandize do they
sell :
They sell vases, ornaments and
bells; they are the gold-
IN LHASA. 175
Nygirang lui ma nyong ; Lhdsd-
la khd-ts’ok dhende ma gydk.
Di gong hdchangne chd’-ki-yé’.
Ngdrang tangka chi’ khe-ru do-
qyu re’.
Gong dhe len-te, ngdrang-lé
pe-chha nang ro nang.
Jhi-i ts'ong-khang ghd re’ ; ten
70 nang.
T’om-la jha ts ong-wa.
Jhii rik ghang yo'pe ?
~ Nd-so-s0; t'dmche kho-jhe yo’,
Jhd di rik ghang é yo’?
Pdrkd-yi dek-khd ghd ts's’ ?
Di rik-kyi dek-khd is’ angma yi’,
Dhe sol-jhd-i Rving-la ghang Ser ?
Kusho, soljha dhe angki #'eb-bo
yo’ (lit: “that tea, it is the
thumb,” s.e., best) ; Ming di
Du-t'ang angki dhangpo Fer
Jhung.
Parka re-re-ld shrang chi’ dha-
rung tangka nyi di rin di re’.
Jha §hemma Du-t'ang angls
nyi-pa re’ ; dhe rik nyi-pa re’.
Rik sumpa di Gye'pa ser yo’;
dhang t'd-ma di Goka re’.
Pd’po-i tsong-mi-la lam ten r0
nang.
Dhe-ts’o T"om-si-ghang-la wang
dhu chhirten tsdnai dg'-ki-re’.
Dhe-ts’o ts’ong-zok ghang ts'ong
wa ?
Kho-ts’o-yi bhumpa, gyenchhd,
dhilbhu ; kho-ts’'o Lhdsdchen
Eu
SR Re I a ee
ni Eg TL Es Rd I SAL pa SL]
TIBETAN GRAMMAR,
smiths and iron mongers of
Lhés4; they are skilled arti-
ficers and make the large
gilt-copper domes and gya-
p'ik for temples:
Turn to the left; now see the
Palpo workshops !
Over each door is a round red
mark and under the red cir-
cle is a white crescent: you
enter thus—beneath those
low narrow door-ways, down
three or four steps :
Some of these Nipalese are
chemists and some are
dyers :
This is a gold-worker’s shop ;
enter and see what he sells:
Sir, salaam; what can this
bumble one do for your
worship :
I want a golden charm-box
with turquoise and pearls :
Here is what you want: See
upon it what kind of tur-
quoises there are! six “yu-
puk” the most precious
sort, and many of the good
kinds of turquoise‘ t'ukmar"”
and ¢t'uk-kar.” Here also
are coral beads. All those
are the thumb. No bad ones
at all:
sérgdr chdkgdr yo’ ; kho-ts’o
dzo-pa kyen-po yin-nai kam-
bung qydp'ik ser-Sangchen
chhempo dzo-ki-re’ gompe ton-
la.
Yin ngo-la or chhok-la do got;
tandd Pd’pochen zo-khang la
tov §hok !
Go-t'8’la re-re tak mar-po ril-ril
yo'te gormo marpo-yi wok-la
dd-wa chhye'chok yi'pe: dhe
go't'em-kyt wokla—men {’d-
mo—rt’emso sum §hi sho’dhu—
dhende nang-la p’ep ro.
'@’po khd-she mén-ts’ongkhen
khd-she ts'ot-gydk-khen re’,
Di-kd ser-zo-pa-yi khang-pa re’ ;
pep-la ghang ts'ongpa di to
ro chik.
Kusho, chhd’p’ep; t'embhu di
nyi-rang-ght dhindhu ghang
dze’cho-gha ?
Ngd-la ser-gyi sung-gd-wo dhang
yu-chd mutik dhang kho-jhe’
yo’.
Ngi'rang-la ghang kho-wai dhe
di-ka yo’. Dhe-la yu-kys rik
ghang tov ro mang shik! yu-
p'uk dhuk chik rik rim pochhe
tukmdr t'uk-kar mangpo yu-
kyi rik le-mo dhe-la yo’. Dir
kyang jhu-ru-i ali yo’. Dhe-
yi ts'angma angki t’eb-bo yo’
nai ; la-re rik akpo me’.
SHOPPING IN LHASA. 177
I want a silver clasp and a
kabzoma of gold with jasper
and amber beads on it :
We sell silver things by weight:
(lit: ““ Like what (ghande)
the weight of silver shall
come, like that those things
are sold.”)
All is settled (e. e., The busi-
ness is concluded).
Weigh these ear-rings and
buckles on the steel yards :
What weight ?
Excellency : fourteen sho :
Will you dye this pulo red :
Only Tibetan cloth is legally
permitted to be dyed :
Where do the Kashmiri mer-
chants live ?
Their shops are very fine ; there
is nothing that is not collec-
ted together there :
You can buy poultry, eggs,
fruit, and tsampa at the
Wangdu-siga market :
This sheep is plump :
Your servant will buy mutton
at the Gya-gyo-wak-sha
market :
Meat is very cheap in Lihisa:
The sinful butchers are Mussal-
mans who kill all meat out-
side Lhasa at Chiri :
23
Ngarang-la ngul-kyr chhabtse
dhang ser-kyi kabzoma §hik
dhang dhe-la yangti-i ali,
poshel-kyi ali kyang kho-jhe’
yo’.
Ngul-kyi karka ghdnde vy&'pa,
dhende ts’ong-wa yin.
T"amche gho-chd’ jhung (or chd’
ts’ar).
Ai-kor chhabma di-ts’o gydma-
la tek ro chik : Karka ghd,
ts’a’ ?
Kusho ; 8ho chubsha.
Kyo'kyt t'erma di marpo ts'ot
gyak-gyu-re’.
T’im-la Pi'kyt t'ruk kar-kyang
ts’ot gyak chhok.
Kha-chhe ts'ong-pa di ghdru de’
pa?
Dhe-yi ts'ong-khang dze-bo chhe
re’; dher dzompa me’pa chik
kyang me’.
T"om Wang-dhu-siga la khyim-
Jhya gong-do, shing-t’ok, tsam-
pa, nyo ts'uk.
Luk di ts’ompo re’.
Nyi'kyt yokpo Gya-gyo-wak-shd
t'om-la lukshi nyo yong.
Lhasa-la sha kye-po re’.
Dikchen shempa Chiri-la Lhdsd-1
chhyi-lo’ la shd kin-kyt shrok
se’ pa-yi Khd-chhe-pa yo’.
PEL A TON A YI RRR a Ce
178 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Buy some curry-powder for Khd-ghang nyi-la p'ing-ship nyo
two kha-ghang; it is dear chi’ ; Lhésd la dhe kyong-po
in Lhasa. re’,
Weigh this carefully on the Di-ka gya-ma-la nya-ra-kyi tek-
steel yard and reckon the nar nyvrang-ght su-an-pan
price by your su-an-pan. nang §hin rin di tsi-nai gyak
ro cha’.
Measure the length of that : Dhe-kyi ring t'ung ts'e’ jal cha’,
VISIT TO KIN-KHOR-DING.
[This is one of the appellations of the principal temple in Lhésa ; but the
place is also known familiarly as Cho-khang or the “ Lord’s House.” Sarat
Chandra Das describes it fully under this name in his secret Report (un-
published as yet); whilst the Survey explorer A. K. alludes to it thus: “In
the centre of the city stands a very high square temple called Jhio, the roof
of which is covered with golden plates. The images in it are numerous, but
the most important of these are of Jhio Sikia Muni and of Palden Lhamo.
The idols are richly inlaid with gold and precious stones, and have various
ornaments round their necks ”’] :—
To-day the Nirvana morth
begins :
To-day the Lord Buddha be-
came Bhagawan :
All persons will go to the Cho-
khang to do homage to the
precious lord :
Let us go early :
There will be a great crowd :
What shall we take with us:
Everybody is taking incense-
sticks :
Anything else :
They are carrying bowls of
butter for the sacred lamps ;
also scarves of various kinds :
Dhe-ring Sdga-diawa di jhung
(““ arises’).
Dhe-ring-la Jho-wo Sdng-gyai
di Ohomdendar dub jhung.
Kye-wo kiin Cho-khang-la do-naz,
Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi §hdb-la
ku-rim dze-yong. Or: Kiin
Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi $hab-la
ku-rim dze'par dhon-dhu Cho-
khang-la do-gu-yin.
Ngda-sar do-gyu-yin.
Tom chhempo chi’ ts’o yong.
Ngdcha-la chhd ghang khyer-wd ;
Kiin-kyi poi-rengbhu len-ghi-
dw.
Dharung yo'dham ?
Mar-me-yi dhon-dhw marchen-
ky: p'orpa dhdrung khd-td
na-ts'o-ts’o khyer-ghi re’.
CHIEF TEMPLE AT LHASA. 179
We will withdraw from the
throng and go up this lane :
Now we are near the Cho-
khang :
Do you see yon tall poplar :
Well! what is it:
That poplar grows up from the
sacred hair of Buddha lying
beneath it :
And do you see that column
there :
Tell me what it means :
That column is a memorial of
the victory by Tibetans over
the Chinese:
Behold the portico of the Cho-
khang! We will enter :
First, we enter the Ti-tsang-
khang :
Now the image-keeper comes ;
he will explain everything :
This one is the famous image
of the most precious lord
(Buddha) :
This image here is not the
representation of him as
Buddha: in this figure he
is only 12 years old; and
therefore you see a young
prince but not the Victorious
One Perfected :
See you; the face is remark-
ably beautiful :
Mi-ts'ok dhang ghye-nai lam-
shrang di ghyen-la do-gyu-
Yin.
Dhdta Chokhang-ghi tsdnai lep-
song.
Hd-gi sho’po ringpo di tong
chog-ghd ?
Ydkpo ! Ghang é du’ ?
Dhe wok-la Jho-woi td-dho-ker
kur tang Shu-pai, sho’po di
t'ung jhung.
Pd-gv do-ring dhe-la £'ong-ghd ?
Dhe ghang yin ngd-la she’.
Pi’pa-yi Gyd-ndk-pa la jom-
pa-v wang-dhu shor-na je-do
§hik doring dhe lang-nas de’.
Cho-khang-ght ka-chen-kyi gyd-
go di toi-shik! Nang-la do-
gyu-yin.
Nyiin-la Ti-tsang - khang - ghi
nang-la §hug-ghin-du’.
Dhi-td ku-nyer di yong-ghi-re’ ;
khorang kiin she’-yong.
Di-ka Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi ku-
ten rdk-chen di yd’.
Di ku-ten di Sang-gye-kyi yib
ma re’ : di yib-la khong (for
khorang) lo chu-nyi ting-la
mempe mi yong ; dhende gydl-
shrdi §hon-nu §hik tong rung,
Chomdendar di t'ong-ghi-me’.
Nyi-rang §i shik! Ser-§hdal (“the
golden face,” honorific for
shal) di nyam=ts'arwa re’.
180
Yonder stands the image of
Tsong-khédpa. Beside him
has been placed the fossil
rock named Amolonkha :
Why is that piece of rock
there ; and what is that bell
upon it: »
Tsongkhapa discovered that
rock himself in a cavern;
and that bell is the bell
which was used by Mongal-
puttra :
Over there in that chapel you
see the blessed eleven-faced
Chenresi :
That figure was made at the
command of King Srong-
tsan-gampo; and then the
king and his four wives
having died, their spirits
were absorbed into that
image :
It is a marvellous image :
Pass into the outer courtyard :
In the courtyard stands the
effigy of Tho-wo-me-tsikpa:
further on have been placed
Tang-tong Gyal-po, and the
lo-tsé-wa Marpa :
Tang-tong Gyalpo lived 60
years in his mother’s womb
before birth :
But look! what numbers of
mice are running about:
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Ha-gi-la Tsong - khdpa-yi ku-
ten di deng-te di’. Dhe-tsd-né
dhak kampo Amolonkhd dhen-
de jha-wa di 8hak-ne du’.
Ha-gi p’d-wong dhe ghang-la ten-
nai, di @hilbu di yang dhe-s
tengkha ghang dw’ ka ?
P’uk-pa nangla Tsongkhdpa nyi-
rang-ght p’'d-wong dhe nye
Jhung ; di dhilbu di Mongal-
puttra-yi pempa jhye’ne yo’.
P’é-kr lhaten-la Chenress chuche-
shélchen kdalden dv ta chok.
Song-tsen-gampo Gydlpo-v kd
solndr dv kuten di §o jhung-te,
dhe-nar gydlpo dhe dhe-yi
tsiin-mo §hi dub §hing la p’ep-
ne di p’ungpor nangla khong-
ghi sem-ts’o ts'uk jhung re’.
Ten ngo-ts’archen chi’ la so.
P’i-yi khyam-ra-la dul nang.
Khyamrd-la T"o-wo-me-tsikpdi-3
kunda dv Shak-ndi-dw’ : dhe
pen-chhe’ Tang-tong - Gyalpo
dhang Marpa lo-tsiwa $hu-
ndi-re’.
Kye-wii ngen-la Tang-tong Gyal-
po yum-kyi lhum-kyi bug-la
lo dhuk chu §hu-ghi re’.
Yinna-yang toi tang! tsiki du-
du kor-kor gyuk.
Monks have transmigrated into Khor-la ge-long-ts'o ni tsi-ki tern
those mice :
qYuUr-song.
BEGGARS IN LHASA. 181
Upstairs there are other Tsang-
khang and other shrines :
What gods shall we see up-
stairs :
In the Bar-khang are Lha-mo
Mék-jorma and the god
Tamdin :
Greatest of all, the image of
Paldan Lha-mo is above :
Well, well ; we must perform
full homage another day :
Yes, Sir:
We cannot make the circuit
of all at one time :
Give some bakshish to the
idol-keeper :
Ya-t'ok la Tséng-khang Shen
tang kuten $hen Shi yo’.
Yd-t'ok la lhd ghang §i-gyu ?
Bar-khang ki nang-la Makjorma
Lhamo Tamdin Lhé §hu-so.
Teng-la, ts’angma nangne chhem-
po, Panden Lhi-mo §hii-so.
Yak-po, ydk-po; Shak Shen la
ngd-chdék chhdoi-jal yong-su
ts’al gon.
Lha, la-so.
Ngai tsar-chik la kang-gha-i
chhoi-khor gyu chok-pa me’.
Ku-nyer la solrd (or chd-ga)
ter nang.
THE SCAVENGER BEGGARS.
There are some scavengers
hastening after me:
I will not listen to them :
I shall treat them with con-
tempt :
An alms, an alms; give, give !
I have nothing to give you :
We are very poor men:
You shall bestow some present :
Get away, you rogues, you
vultures :
Give, give! you are rich :
I shall call the watchmen :
Ta-ta ro-gya-wa $hik ngas je-la
nyek-kv duk.
Nga dhe-tak la t'67 gyu man.
Nga kho-chik la ngen-chhen ten-
gyu-yin-no.
Dom-bu, dombu; ter-mang, ter-
nang.
Nya khyd’la ter gyu chang me’.
Ngadcha wil-p’ongpa re.’
Khyd’ la chd-g& §hik chin gor.
Ha-la gyuk! ngempa-po khyo’ !
cha-lak khyo’!
Jhin! Jhin! Khys' chhuk-po
duk.
Ngan korchakpa la ke tang-gyu-
yin,
gee gt AS ety tera
ARAB LONI i ae
RT BI I
182 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Call, call! you must give one Rdk! Rdk! Khys' la tanka
tanka :
One tanka! not even a khi-
gang :
You have been a month in
Lbésd, yet there is nothing
at all for us:
Who cares! Who cares! I
shall not give you anything :
Ah then! wait until we get
you (lit: come to us):
Don’t bawl like that, filthy
Rogya-pa:
All right; listen here! when
you are a corpse, tying a
rope to your neck we will
drag you like a dog outside
the gates of the city.
We will tear you to pieces :
Come along : these scavengers
are indeed the pests of
Lhasa:
They have been bawling away
at me:
Where do they live:
They live on the eastern side,
beyond Bhanakshol, in
houses built of bone:
Though they dress in rags,
they are very rich :
Remember it is thus said of
them :—‘ Though outside
their houses bristle with
chik ter gos.
Tangka chi’! Khd-kang chi’
ld-re me.’
Da-wé chi’ nat khys'rang Lhdsd-
la p'ep rung ngd-ts'o-la chang
me’.
A-u-se! G-u-se! Ngdrang-ghi ye
ma ter-gyu-re’ (or ye ter-gyu
ma re’),
Jhyd-ra! ngd-ts'o-la leb-pa tuk
guk-te do’chik.
Rogyd-pa ts'ichen ! Dhende chd-
cho ma gyap.
Tik-t'ik ; di-la nyon shik!
Khyorang ro-ne p'o-wa-la,
rang-ghi ke-la t’dkpa chhing-
nai, khyi dhang da-te khyorang
dhong-khyer-kyi go-mo p’en-
chhe’ dri’ yong.
Chhdk-tum-la khyd'rang shral-
gyu-re’.
Nyampo shok : ro-gya-wa di
Lhasd-v ngen-rim mo’ do.
Khongts'o ngdrang-la mangpo
bar ghi-yo’.
Ghé-pa de’-ki-du’ ?
Shar-chhyok-la, Bhana-sho’ p’en-
chhe’-la, rui-pd-chen khyim-la
nar-ghi-re’.
Shrulpo ghyon rung, kho-la or
mangpo re’,
Sem-la ngei chi’—* P'i-lok-la
di khyim di rd-cho-ne tsup-
tsup jhung rung; nang-lok-la
CC ——
BOATING TERMS. 183
dhe kho-na nak-kyang-ne sak sék
ts’er” dhende sung-ghi-yo'.
horns, inside indeed they
sparkle with coins.”
Many persons are afraid of the Ngar-po-chen yi’pai rogyd-wa
scavengers who are very di ghachhen-kyi jik jhung.
ferocious :
LAKES: RIVERS: BOATING.
Rudder : kyd-jik.
Bridge: §ampa :
Rope : t'dkpa : (of goats’ hair),
Ford : gal-ku ; rép.
Lake : so.
Salt-lake : ts’ékha.
Mere : ts'e-u.
River: tsédng-po; chhu-wo.
Brook : bap-chhu.
Torrents : risdrchhu.
Streamlet : chhu-¢t'en.
Spring : chhu-mzk.
River’s-source : chhu-go.
Bank : dam.
Reeds : nyuk-ma.
Running-water : gyuk-chhu.
Storm : #s’ibma,
Row, to: kyd gyap-pa.
Swim, to: kydlwa.
Ford, to: gdlwa (cross over).
Fasten, to: chhing-wa.
Bale, to: chhu-wa.
Pull, to: den-pa.
Bathe, to: f'u-wa.
Current : gyiin. Bathed : f’i1 song.
Boat: dhu (in Khams : dru).
Small-boat : nyen.
Boat of hide: ko-a.
Ferry: dhu-kha.
Boatman : dhu-pa, ko-khen. Back water, to: len-la sho-mo
Boat-hire: dhu-la. kempa.
Sail: Darchhen.
Steer, to: khd-lo gyurwa.
Swamp, to: nup chukpa.
Sink, to : jing-wa (neuter verb).
Leaky : chhe’'po.
Landing-place : tang-sa.
Oar: kya. Starting-place : Shdng-khd.
This lake is 32 1é-bors round : ~~ Ts'o-t kor-lam di le-bor so-nyi
yo’.
There are many lakes in Ru-t'ok nangna ts'o mdngpo
Rutok : shu jung.
The water looks smooth :
The wind is rising :
The water appears rough :
Chhu dhe jam-jam nang-ki duk.
Lung lang-ki-duk.
Chhu dhe tsub-tsub nang-ki-duk.
i
i
,
|
{
8
1]
}
184
Are there any dangerous rocks
in this lake :
Is the current swift:
Tie the boat fast :
The oar is broken :
Don’t push with the oar:
Turn the boat to the right:
The boat is not steady :
Which way does the river flow :
(lit : “The flow of the river
is to where P)”’
Lower down, the current be-
comes more strong :
The river is very full :
Is there a bridge across the
river :
Is the river-water fit to drink :
We must not go too near to the
cataract :
Where do the rivers meet :
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Ts'o-i mang-na nyén-chén-kyi
tak da shak-pa ?
Chhu-gyiin tak-po yinna ?
Tru di tsdn chhing.
Kya di chhak pa yin (or chhak
song).
Kyd ché’ ndi, ma pul ts'uk.
Tru ydi-su gyur shok.
Ko-d dv di’-ts’uk me’.
Tsang-poi gyuk-chhu di ka-la
yo'pai ?
Men-la, gyiin di lhak tak jhung.
Chhu t'on chhe tam song ; or
Ohhu hd-changne t'on song.
Ohhu-wo't kong-la §am-pa dw’-
ka ?
Tsangpo di-i chhu kyem yi’ pas ?
Ri-sar-chhu-v dam-tu yong gyu
mi rung.
Chhu-do di kala yim-pa ?
Take care: the boat will up- Nyon chik! Dhu di gyel yong.
set :
Row hard to the shore:
Look out! Take care :
Can you swim:
Does the river pass through
that narrow gorge:
Keep the coats dry, if possible :
There 1s a hole in the boat:
Push the boat to the further
shore :
North of Lhasa is a vast lake
called Namts’o Chhid-mo :
Dam-tu rém-rém gydk.
Tov shok! Nyon chik!
Khyo’ kyal chok-ga ?
Dv chhu-wo dv p’dght dak tok-
po sep-la bab-kin dw’-ka ?
Tuk-po-nam dv kem-kem shrung
ro tong.
Khun shik dhu bug-la chung.
P’-chhyok tuk dhu-la p’ul.
Lhasd-i jhangla ts'o chhempo
chi’ di-ne dhe-v ming-la nam-
ts’o chhyi’mo dhendai Ser yi’.
EXCLAMATORY PHRASES. 185
The Mongolian name of that
lake is Tengri Nur:
There are a few lakes in Tibet
larger than Namts’o Chhid-
mo :
The Yamdok lake is famous
for the large island in the
midst of it. The name of
this island is To-nang :
What is the name of that
flower :
That one on the bank :
Tie the boat-rope to that tree :
Ts'o di-v khd sok-po di Tengri
Nur Ser duk.
Pi-yul kyi ts'o-nam khd-chik
Ndm-ts'o Chhuk-mo lai chhé
duk.
Tso Yamdok di shung-ma la
ling-ka chhempo tang den-pa
rakchen jhung. Ling-ka-yt
ming di Tondng Ser yo’ ?
Me-tok dhe-i ming kang duk-ka ?
Dhe dam teng-ki me-tol dhe yi’.
Dhu-ré dv shing dhe tengla tak.
EXCLAMATORY PHRASES.
Td-sht shik : Good luck to you!
Tot shok : Look out !
Nyon shik : Listen ! Look here !
Mi-kyon, mi-kyon : No harm
done !
Mztok, mitok: No matter, no
matter !
Kham-lok jhe’ : 1t is sickening !
Khii’ ze’ jhy?’ : Hold your skirt
out! (as receptacle for
alms)
Ha-la khur song : Be off with
it !
Khye’ khye’ : Quite enough !
Dhe ghd-la p’en : What's the
use of that!
T’ik-t'ik : All right !
Ala-la : Capital ; excellent !
Yd'-po, yd’-po:
Good, good !
Certainly ;
24
Dhe-gé y#’: So it is! To be
sure !
Yd-ya: Yes!
Min : No!
A-tséma : Ah me! Alas! Oh
dear !
Oji; Oji: Salaam (in Khams)
Ghdle shu : Stay in peace !
Nyar gov : We must take care !
Chéghd jhe : Be careful with it !
Rikpa gyim : Take care !
Ghang-la §hu : Well then ?
Ld ld-so : Aye, aye, Sir!
Kiso kav: As you will, Sir!
Chhédk p’ep : Welcome (salaam)!
Gha-le p’ep : Farewell !
Nyampo shok : Come along !
Tsa-dhak jhyy’ : Make haste !
P’vmo ma yong : Don’t be late.
Gyang ma jhy?' : Gor ma gor:
Don’t delay.
186 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Ohang-rik jhyv shik: Really Shu-le, kusho: Good-day, Sir!
attend ! Ah chhu chhu : Tt 4s cold !
Har-sé jhy’i : Rouse up ! Kid-dhi-chhé : Many thanks !
Rem-rem jhys shik: Exert Tdnpokyot: Tread firmly (form
yourself. of farewell in Ladak).
MEDICAL TERMS.
amchhi : a physician. shu-ndl : inflamed sore.
so-t’ab : his mode of treatment. wu-sdkpa : difficult breathing.
men : physic—drugs. wolma : larynx, windpipe.
ril-bhu : a pill. nang-rol : the bowels them-
chhyemdi men : a powder. selves.
t'ung : a draught. ten-khok : chest and heart-
de-ku : a syrop. region.
kyuk-men : an emetic. dho’pa : stomach.
shdl-men : purgative. lo: side of the body.
§i-men : an opiate. bho-longwa : ankle.
men-khang : drug-shop. lii’-pa : phlegm, mucus.
tak (FT) : blood.
ngul-chhu : perspiration.
chhu-ndk : pus; matter.
ts’e’par-né : ague. md : a wound.
rong-ts'e’ : valley fever. chin : urine (the vulgar word).
nd-ts’a : ordinary fever. ri-chhu or ti-chhw : urine (me-
mak-ser : jaundice. dical term).
t'u-jong : diarrhcea.
lo-khok : a cough.
jor-men : a plaister.
num-§em : a poultice.
nyda-gyur : cholera.
lhen-dum : small-pox.
kydk : excrement.
tukpa : wind, flatulence.
lang-t'ab : griping of bowels, tsd-u tsukpa : to lance.
Jhang-khok-la §uk: intestinal #sd gyakpa: to bleed (surgi-
pain. cally).
so-Ser : tooth-ache. tsa tdngwa : to go to stool.
tsi tokpa: to feel the pulse
(which in Tibet is done three
times successively with dif-
boi : lump from a blow ; bump. ferent fingers).
kyukpa : vomiting.
burpo : a small boil.
shu-wa : an ulcer.
MONIES, WEIGHTS, &C. 187
MONIES, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES.
Moxey TABLE. SiLver Coins AND INGOTS.
Kha-ghang : =]11 anna.
1 karma =j% anna. Kdr-ngd = 23 annas.
2% karma =1 khdghang. Chip-chhye’ =3% annas.
4 kha-ghang =1 §ho-ghang. Sho-ghang or Miskal =5 annas.
10 8ho-ghang =1 shrang. Genden Tangka =73 annas.
50 shrang =1 do-ts’e or Gyd Tangka is the Indian rupee.
yambhu. Nak-sdng =31 rupee.
Luk-mi’-ma : silver
ingot, size and
re shape of a sheep's
hoof =R15 annas 10.
Yik-mi’-ma : “ yak’s
GoLp PiIEcCEs. hoof ”’ =R31 annas 4.
Tda-m2’-ma; or Do-
Ser-ho = Rupees 9%. tse’ : ingot, shape
Ser-sang = Rupees 60. and size of horse’s
(Both coins rarely seen). hoof =R1561.
N.B.—The common silver tangka coined in Tibet, and known
variously as ndk-fang, chi’tang, and Genden tangka, is about the
size of an English half penny but thinner. The legend on this
coin is EN TA RAR REE IR FRNA It is marked so as to
be cut into various pieces; and the khd-ghang, kar-ngd, (i.e., 5 kar-
ma), chipchhye’ and §ho-ghang, are merely the tangka cut or broken
into 1, 1, 1, and 2 parts respectively. In Khams, the Indian
rupee, which is current all over Tibet, is preferred to the tangka,
and is styled P'iling gormo. In Sikkim the rupee is termed tiruk,
in Ladak girmo, in Central Tibet gyd-fam and chhi-gor. The large
silver ingot, styled in Tibet do-ts’e or td-mi'ma, circulates in Tibet,
Turkistan, and Mongolia, ydmbhu being the Turki name and Aurs
the Mongol term. Its value varies, being sometimes as low in
Indian currency as Rs. 125.
——————— a SY ERT TES dali ha ition RN ul Mr ashy
ES ————
188 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
CorN AND LiqQuips. Tea WEIGHTS.
1 gydri=1 1. 1 chdmka=21 or 1 pint. 1 parkhd=4 to 5s.
2 gydri=1 dum. 2 chdmka=1 bre or dhe. 4 parkhd=1 ko-toi.
MEeAT MEASURE.
2 dum =1 lhu. 5 bre =1 bo. 3 ko-tov =1 gdm.
3 hu =1 zuk. 4 bo =1 khal. 2 gdm =1gdlor
25 khal =1 bhor-ra. gyap.
LINEAL MEASUREMENTS.
Pi-t'o: span between thumb and forefinger stretched without
straining.
T’o0-ghang : span between thumb and little finger.
Kang-ghang : length from elbow to knuckles.
T’u-ghang : distance from elbow to tip of middle finger.
Domba : distance from finger-tip to finger-tip, both arms out-
stretched.
(N.B.—A “piece” of Nambhu cloth at Gyantse measures 9
domba or 54 feet).
Gyang-t’dk : distance to which the voice will reach (about 300
yards). |
Ts’d¢-lam : distance traversable before breakfast (about 5 miles).
Nyin-lam : a day’s journey; differentiated also into luk-pe
nytnlam “a sheep-driver’s march ”’ (6 miles) ; kang-t’ang-ghi nyin-
lam : “foot-march ;” and td-pe nyin-lam : * a horseman’s march
(22 miles).
The Chinese L: of 486% yards is frequently used in Eastern
Tibet.
TITLES, &C., IN TIBET.
Gydlwa Rvmpochhe : the Dalai Lama or Grand Lama of Lhasa.
Kydp-gon : “* Protector —familiar designation when speaking
of the Grand Lama.
Dési or Sdkyong : the Regent or Temporal Ruler of Tibet, who
is, however, always an ecclesiastic.
Gydlis’ap Rimpochhe and Gydlpo : popular titles of the Regent,
especially in use in the provinces.
TIBETAN TITLES. 189
Ka-lon : official title of each of the five members of the Privy
Council, or kdshdk, which advises the Regent in state affairs.
Shd-pé (GRAN ““lotos-foot ’) : other and more popular
title of a Adlon.
De-wa Jong : popular designation for ‘the Tibetan Govern-
ment” or “ Grand Lama’s jurisdiction.”
Kélon-shik Lhen-gyai (AMR EFT EFT), the full
designation of the Regent's Council, supreme in Judicial, Legisla-
tive and Executive Administration.
Kailon-T"i-pa : the Speaker or Chairman of the Council.
Ne . a
Chyi-khydb Khempo (3 BINRFA"): the sole ecclesiastical
member of the Council (the other four being laymen) who is
now the brother of the former Dalai Lama and known as the
Lha-lu Td Lama at Lhasa and also by the Chinese name of T§
Lama.
Ampdn WJ : title of the two representatives of Chinese
interests at the Court of Lhasa and whose “advice” is of paramount
influence at the present day in Tibet.
Panchhen Rimpochhe: the Head Lama of Tashi-lhiimpo Monastery
and titular temporal ruler of the province of Tsang. He is
held to be the incarnation of the 4th Dhyani Buddha, W¢’ pakme’
ea -
(ARRAS)
Génden De-pa Lama : the Head of the Gélden Monastery, said
to rank in Ui ecclesiastically next after the Gyalwa Rimpochhe.
He is not an incarnate lama, but is nominated, under Chinese
influence, ostensibly on the choice of the Kalons.
Kusho P’akpa Do-gin : the Head of the Sé-kya Monastery.
Mid-pa Lama : the Head of the Sera Monastery, near Lhésa.
Dong-pa Lama : the lay co-ruler of Mindol Ling (SFR)
the principal Nyingma monastery in Tibet.
190 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Mi Rimpochhe : title borne by the Head of the great Jhang
Téklung Monastery, 40 miles north of Lihdsa.
Ohdsdk : the Regent’s secretary or deputy. The Grand Lama
has also a Chasak.
Dd lo-ye : ampans’ aide-de-camps (two in number).
Kd-dhung (RMA'QR") : secretaries of the Kd-lons.
No
T’im-pin-chyt : the Chief Judge of Lhdsd from whom appea
lies sometimes direct to the K4-lons.
Shdl-chhe-pa : literally ‘ the Big-faced One ;” another Judge.
Chhik-dzi’-pa : government Treasurers at Lhas4, five in number
to whom the Jongpons pay in the revenue they collect in the
provinces.
Jong-pon : officials, mainly civil but with a limited military
~e
control, who govern the various Jongs (NRK) or petty districts
into which all Tibet (save in the Jhang-t’ang) is portioned out,
collecting revenue, &c.; answering to our “ Collectors ” in India.
Of these there are 53.
Chyi-khyab of Nyé-grong in Khams is the Dalai Lama’s Commis-
sioner for the administration of this special portion of the king-
dom. He ranks above the 53 ordinary Jong-pons.
Garpin of Rudok: a special governor of the western districts
of Gart’'ok and Rudok conjointly.
Dhung-khor-pa : civilian officers; working in Lhdséd as sub-
ordinates to the Kd-dhung or Ka-lons’ secretaries, but in the pro-
vinces under the Jong-pon, to the office of which they aspire to
attain.
Tse-rung-pa : ecclesiastical office-clerks ranking with the fore-
going and managing the financial business of very large monasteries
-~
Ser-yik-pa (FINK WATE “ golden-letter bearer”): name
given to special envoy of the Emperor of China or of the Dalai
Lama, bearing presents and formal greetings between the two
Courts.
Tulkw : any incarnate lama, ¢.e., a lama holding in his person-
ality the spirit of some departed saint.
TIBETAN TITLES. 191
v — .
Kusho ( A MIN ) : title of honour placed before the per-
sonal name of a person of position, lay or clerical, male or female.
Rimpochhe : “ most precious;” title added after the names of
Incarnate lamas and heads of important Gompas; sometimes
appended to official designation, sometimes to personal name.
Lhd and Kusho are frequently used in first addressing persons
as we should say “ Sir” and “My Lord.”
Pombo : also Pombo Rimpochhe : *“ Officer |” “most precious
chief ; ’ forms of address to Government officials.
Lhdcham FIN : female title like our “Lady.” Tt is affixed
to the names of the wives and widows of lay notables. Often also
used alone when speaking of or to such ladies.
Cham Kusho : honorific female title, but inferior to lhdcham.
Cham-chhung : unmarried ladies’ title answering to our ¢ Miss”
or perhaps rather ‘ Hon’ble Miss; as it is only applied to the
upper classes.
Lha-yum Kusho : lady dowager.
-
Khempo (NR A"): abbot or head of the larger monasteries ;
but said to be a Degree attaching personally and not necessarily
to the holders of particular offices ; perhaps like our D.D.
De-pa '&l"): territorial chiefs having feudal authority, but
P g y
without prejudice to the paramount claims of the Tibetan Govern-
ment ; a common title in Eastern districts where sounded Deba.
ne
T’so-pin (BREF) : president of the headmen of a set or
“circle ”’ of villages, elected by his brother headmen to control the
whole khor or circle in its relations with other village circles.
=e > :
Pi-pon (3 554’) : ordinary headman of a single village.
Gen-po or Gen-sum : village elders who (as in Russia) elect the
Pi-pon.
(erpa : zemindar or land-owner
Foe aD TA Ca =
Ho —————— a re al
192 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Mi-ser : tenants of small-holdings, held from monasteries
or noblemen or direct from Crown. A numerous class answering
to the small farmers in Ireland or crofters in Scotland ; but sub-
jected to considerable taxation of produce and with heavy liaki-
lities of personal service (td-# and u-ldk).
P’d-piin and P’d-ts’en : in a village, those denizens of it having
the same lha or household god.
Ts’e-yok : * life-servants ” or slaves, reduced to that condition
through gambling or debts, and, occasionally, by capture and
purchase.
RELIGIOUS EDIFICES; AND ADJUNCTS THEREOF.
Ling : a large collegiate monas-
tery analogous to the Chris-
tian abbey.
Chhoidé: a lamasery where
Tantrik and occult studies
are specially followed.
Gompa (often Gomba) : any
ordinary lamasery, large or
small.
Shigin : small village gompa
with only 3 or 4 inmates in
adjacent huts.
Ta-ts’ang : special schools or
“chairs” established within
the larger monasteries, for
the teaching of particular
doctrines and generally en-
dowed with property, land,
&e.
Puk: a recluse’s cave, often
inaccessible to outsiders, and
usually such caverns are
found together in a colony
styled Ri-f’o1.
Name also |
given to any set of hermits’
cells, not necessarily caverns.
Ri-t’0i-ba : the dwellers in the
Puk.
Chhorten : cenotaphs of stone,
built upon a series of square
steps, and often containing a
saint’s relics, They follow
one general pattern capable
of certain modifications and
are of all sizes; being mostly
small solid masses of ma-
sonry ; yet in some cases ex-
aggerated into huge struc-
tures 8 or 9 storeys high,
containing chapels, shrines,
images, and relics, as in the
fine chhortens at Gyangtse
and Jhampa Ling.
Mendang : long narrow heap of
inscribed stones banked-up
betwixt two low lenthy
parallel walls. Sometimes, as
in one example at Leh, more
RELIGIOUS
than a mile long, and is
formed by degrees from every
pious traveller, as he passes,
depositing a slab inscribed
with sacred formuls.
Mdny Khorlo (or simply khorlo) :
prayer cylinders, both the
portable ones worked in the
hand like a child’s rattle and
the large barrels fixed on
pivots. Those worked by
running streams are styled
Chhu-Fkhor.
Mdni Lhdkhang : shed or house
sheltering series of prayer-
barrels arranged like a system
of huge bobbins; so named
when isolated from any reli-
gious edifice.
Tsuk-la-khang : the temple at-
tached to large monastery.
Lhd-khang : ordinary temple
isolated from any monastery.
Du-khang : worship-hall of a
Gompa.
Ts’ 0-khang : - general congrega-
tion-hall in large Gompas
where public ceremonials are
held.
Gong-khang : chapel in temple
wherein the images of demons
and “terrific deities” are
segregated.
Gyi-ptk ; or Gep’i: a cube-
shaped structure with con-
cave sides, being a wooden
framework covered with gild-
25
- Lab-ding :
EDIFICES. 193
ed metal plates, and placed as
a dome on temples.
enclosure where
travellers can pitch tents.
Sung-bum : conical stone oven
outside houses in which juni-
per is burnt as offering to
propitiate evil spirits.
Lii-ku : metal images.
Dempa : large erect figure of
any deity.
Nydk lu-ku : licentiously-posed
figures.
Diin-chok : offering-table for
flowers.
Shu-mar: chief lamp before
the larger images.
Mar-me: small lamps burning
before deities; and used in
large numbers at kangsharites.
They are small brass bowls
of butter with floating wicks.
Chhé’ kyok : libation-bowl; some-
times made of skull with
gilded metal cover and with
stand beautifully chased and
ornamented. Frequently
known as ¢s’e ght bhumpa.
Mé-long : convex mirror of oval
shape over which, in fore-
casts, holy water is poured.
Damarw: small drum com-
posed of two skull-tops fasten-
ed back to back, the opening
on either side being covered
with ~~ prepared fish-skin;
194 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
sometimes having pendant
tassels of bunches of human
hair.
Dorje : sacred implement held in
the hand during ceremonials
and shaped like very small
hand-dumbells with open-
work knob at each end. Ori-
ginally meant to represent a
thunderbolt.
Pur-bhu : ornamental-headed
brass javelin with three-sided
spike, used by priests during
exorcisms against
The original p’urbhu is in |
Sera Gompa, Lhésa.
Kang-dhung : long thin trum-
et made of lollow human |
P
thich-bone : sometimes the
joint-cud has a piece of hu-
man skin very neatly sewn |
round it, or a thong-like piece
hanging to it. Used in tem-
ple ceremonial,
Dhilbh :
with elaborate handle.
Dhung-kar : Conch-shells, biown
small brass bed
as interludes in congregation-
al book recitals.
Dhung-chhen : great copper
trumpet, about 8 feet long,
blown at 3 a. m. to summon
inmates of gompas to the
morning rites in the du-khang.
Requires two men to hold itup.
Yai-khyil Dhung-kar: white
conch-shell with whorl twist-
demons. |
ing to right, very rare and
when of large size, almost
priceless. Used in monas-
teries as calling horns.
Gyd-ling : long cornet-like tram-
pet with holes and stops.
Ré-dung : copper trumpet or horn
without side-holes or stops.
Roi-ma CESER small brass
cymbals in pairs.
SN
Si-nyen (RNTF) cymbals
of better tone and with cloth
pad to hold with on either
side.
Ngd: large drums with long
handles placed in temples and
often taken out for ceremonies
in houses.
Ghang-ngd : large heavy metal
gong. )
Ydng-yik : music-score used in
more elaborate temple-music
for trumpets and conches.
Bumpa : flagon for holy-water,
with a lid and long spout,
and with holes at top for tall
bunch of peacock-feathers.
Tw -bum (RNAI) one of
the varieties of Bumpa; a
small teapot-like vessel clad
in red nabSa and with pea-
cock feather in hole at top.
Often of silver.
Chhdb-bum : much larger variety
like a tea-urn with spout and
TEMPLE APPARATUS. 195
with receptacle in lid for | Bdk: masks for use in devils’
flowers. Sometimes termed
Jhya-ma-bum.
Shin-dhi (95535) or Shin-
tong : a tall open copper vessel.
Nabid : wrappings of coloured
silk or satin put on idols,
books, bowls, &c., and regard-
ed as the “clothes” of such
implements.
Torma : many kinds of sacrificial
offering are thus styled ; but
name usually applied to small |
stamped |
effigies of butter
with various sacred devices, |
or else to pieces of wood or |
moulded clay, coloured, on |
which are plastered small
slabs and medals made of |
butter.
Pii-rengbu : incense-tapers, very |
|
|
|
thin and generally coloured |
pink, burning rapidly and |
emitting slight odour; used by |
visitors to shrines who light
them at lamp burning before |
image they would honour.
Mendré : small cone, bee-hive- |
shaped, stuck all over with
raw rice, with dabs of paint
here and there, and placed
near the Shu-mdr. A hole in
the apex serves as a receptacle
or vase for unused and partly-
burnt incense-tapers.
dance on the Guru Pema
festival. When not in use
are hung up on the walls of
temples, with coloured robes
and sleeves draped beneath to
represent body of face depic-
ted by mask.
Kyilkhor : framework or shelves
on which series of images are
grouped; also any sacred
diagram on floor (mandal.)
Gyen-ts’en (JRNEF') : the
Buddhist “flag of victory.”
Seen in two styles: (1) a
tall cylinder of black felt
with a white line or insertion
encircling it near lower end,
and two vertical lines of
white running from top to
bottom
other white band. Closed in at
at right-angles to
top where it narrows so as to
be often almost like a shut
umbrella, and sometimes
surmounted by metal trident.
(2) Also, made up of three
colours, red, yellow, and blue,
arranged flounce-like one
above the other, with a white
flounce between each colour;
and placed on tops of poles
which are planted in the
ground near temples and
chhortens. The first kind
ll nasser ttiezmem————————
i ————— a ——————— son — '
196 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 197
decorate the eaves of gompas thas are made and planted AMPA (FRNA), the Buddha to come (Sansk: Maitreya),
and palaces. beside the path nearest to generally pourtrayed as seated European-
Ddr-chho and Lungtad : flags in- the house. As they are or JHAMPA GoMPO : fashion and not as other ‘deities. Many
scribed with mystic formula
and strips of coloured cloth
fastened to tall poles; the
wind fluttering the flags and
so uttering the prayers print-
ed thereon. Lung-td signifies
supposed to resemble the
natural dwelling of demons
which cause sickness, the
demons are presumed to be
enticed therein out of the
sick man’s body.
gigantic figures exist; one 70 feet high at
Potala ; another 180 feet high in Jhampa
Bum-ling temple in Amdo; others in the
Rong Jhamchhen Gompa in Tsang and in
Daipung Monastery. These huge images
are styled Jhamchhen.
4 airy horse.” Wo pAkME’ ; or th . .
Shol-dum : gauze cylinder placed Eu © Sanskrit Amitabha the Dhyani Bud-
Ts’e-pAkye’ : dha from whom emanated the famous Chen.
-
Li (FY) or R Ds (in over lamp; at top a metal
Emre e ren Sari
Sikkim) : reeds or very thin
straight twigs about 2 feet
in height, strung with yarn
of various colours and bits of
stick, in close likeness to the
yards and rigging on a ship’s
mast. When anyone is sick,
rod, projecting therefrom,
holds another smaller cylinder
of paper inscribed with
prayers above the lamp-flame;
and, being freely suspended,
the draught from the flame
causes it to revolve.
JHO0-0 MI1-KYD'
raisi. He is incarnated in the successive
Panchhen Rimpochhe of Tashilhiimpo, who
is thus spiritual father of the Grand Lama
of Lh4s4.
the Dhyani Buddha corresponding to the
Sanskrit Akshobhya. A gilt image of this
being, said to be 1,200 years’ old, is the chief
treasure in the Ramochhe temple at Lhés4.
JHo-0 CHeN-Rarsi: the great protecting genius of Tibet, in-
carnated in the Grand Lama of Lhasi. He
1s a Ye-shet Sem-Pa or Dhyani Sattwa,
spiritually emanating from Wo'pakme’,
though actually born from a lotos. Usual-
ly depicted with eleven faces and many
arms (properly 1,000) and in the palm of
each hand an eye. His full Tibetan name
1s Spyan-ras-gzigs Dbang-pyug (Sansk :
Avalokiteswara.)
JAM-YANG ; or JAM- known as the Shin-nur gyurpa or Renew-
PAL : er of Youth; a Dhyani Sattwa, in sanctity
second only to Chenraisi. He is constantly
incarnated in the current Head of Sakya
Monastery. Appears in temples seated,
with crossed in-folded legs and upturned
soles, on a large lotos. Brandishes gadd or
mace in right hand and a dorje in his left.
TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY.
The following are the colloquial designations of the more
popular deities, saints, &c., whose effigies are to be seen in
Tibetan temples :—
SANG-GYE SHAKYA Buddha Shakyamuni, the Buddha who
T’uBra; or JHO-0 last appeared on earth; known also as
RIMPOCHHE : Chomdendai, and familiarly as ‘the Jho.”
There are said to be three original or “ self-
sprung” images of the Jho: one in the Jho-
khang at Lhasd, representing him as a boy
of 12; one in the Chan-than-sze temple at
Peking, as an adult; and a third in the
golden temple of Kumbum, near Koko Nur,
as an old man. Copies in bronze of these
three occur in the chief Tibetan temples.
A —————————————— ER
i
{
i
{
ag |
|
{ |
{
H
| it!
a
| it
: i
|
i
! i
{
|
iH
a
fit
it}
Bl
it
) '
j
it
H
IEE TTT ————
A —————————_
Dorie CHHANG :
LAkxa DorJE; or
CHHYAKDOR :
LakNA DORJE; or
CHHYAKNA DORJE:
Dorma (FRE) ;
or TO-MA :
EDT hp a Aka edie
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Blue lotos sprig is clasped in inner bend
of left elbow. Head encircled with high
coronet.
a third Dhyani Sattwa, who was evolved
from the Dhyani Buddha Mi-kyé Dorje.
Chief shrine is in Chakpoiri Medical Mon-
astery at Lhasa. Often figured in his
“terrific aspect ” with screaming face and
dishevelled hair, his body painted scarlet.
He flourishes the dorje. In Gyantse Chhor-
ten is a famous golden statue of this guardian
of the Gelukpa order, (Sansk: Vdjrapant).
Kashyapa Buddha, or the Atom Eater; a
Buddha who lived on earth in a former age.
Relics of his corporeal substance seem still
plentiful, as they are served up in medical
pills obtainable from several Tibetan digni-
taries.
subduer of evil spirits and guardian of the
mystic doctrine. Represented with hang-
ing belly and with open mouth displaying
three large fangs. Often confounded with
Dorje Chhang (also styled Chhyakdor) and
also with the next deity.
De-pon or Ruler of the Noijin or moun-
tain spirits. He may be distinguished
from the just-mentioned deity by his green
paint or green clothing. Known in Tan-
trik ceremonial as ‘ the green-robed Lakna
Dorje.”
“ She who delivers ;” the chief goddess
of Tibet who has ever co-operated with
Chenraisi for the good of mortals. Her
spirit has disintegrated itself into 21 branch
emanations whose images grouped in series
are known as a Dolma kyilkhor.
Dorie P’Amo; or
DoRrJE NALJORMA :
PANDEN LuiMo
FRESE
T’0-NYER CHENMA :
TAMDIN :
SHINJE ; or DoRJE
JIK-JHYE ;
TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 199
benevolent goddess at one time incarnated
in form of a sow, hence her name “ The
Sow with the Dorje.” Often figured in a
curious medley of an upright pig backed
by one or more females conjoined in one
image, Incarnated in lady-abbess of Samd-
ing Monastery, Yamdok; but another
female incarnation occurs in a community
on margin of Namts’o Chhyidmo, a third
at Markula in Lahul. The Pig-lady is
also specially worshipped at Tsiin-mo-t’ang
Gompa in North Sikkim.
a ferocious goddess figured in riotous
attitude, trampling on the mangled remains
of her lovers whom she has decoyed to
destruction, and with uplifted bowl from
which she is jauntily drinking their blood.
Over her arm there dangles a huge rosary
of skulls, and she carries both dorje and
gada (club). Known also as Pinden Mik-
Jorma.
another terrifying goddess, “she who is
wrinkled with anger,” who was at one
time incarnated as Za-khri, Nepalese wife
of king Srong-tsan Gampo.
a god always painted red and generally in
human form, but occasionally appearing
with a horse’s head and neck but a man’s
body. Classed as a fowo or wrathful
deity, because, though well-disposed to
men, he terrifies demons by neighing.
the Lord of Death, figured with sword
and many faces, but has several distinct
forms represented. His coercion is one of
the chief feats of the Ngik-pa or Tantrik
priests who then make use of rosaries
formed of discs of human skull or of ele-
A ———————— a =
NaMm-SE ; or NAM-T’01
SHRE :
ZAMBHALA :
Me’ -Lus-yI Gya-ro:
Pe’-HAR; or CHHOI-
KYONG :
Goma sHI; or CHHOI-
KYONG SHI; or JIK-
TEN-KYI GYAL-CHHEN
sar; or the “Dik
Rajas:”
——, | ll yi
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
phant stomach-stone. Shinje is sometimes
figured presiding over a cauldron in which
he is boiling the heads of the doomed.
God of Riches, said to be the same as
Kuwera, but title really means ¢ Son of the
listening ears.” Usually depicted with
retinue of aerial sprites; and he is always
painted either yellow or else black.
a Ngak li’ or Tantrik deity, often con-
founded with Nam-se, and usually figured
clasping to his breast with lustful gestures
some female deity.
king of the fire-spirits, endowed with
power to purge from consequences of sin
those souls in the Bardo whose form of re-
birth is so far undetermined. Figured some-
times as seated astride a red ram, sometimes
as perched on a huge lotos beneath an um-
brella.
king of the astrologers, represented in
Gompas as a king riding on a yellow or
white lion, and robed in tiger-skin. He is
the yidam or tutelary deity of the profes-
sional astrologers attached to the Ramochhe
temple at Lhasa who, as a body, are like-
wise known by his name. However, the
chief of the class, the incarnation of Pe-har
himself, resides at Na-chhung grove near
Lhdsd. This personage is styled Ndchhung
Chhoikyong, is treated with divine honours,
and he it is who forecasts, on a vacancy, the
characteristics whereby the new Grand
Lama of Lhasa may be identified.
synonyms for the four terrific doorkeep-
ers or guardians of the doctrine, and in Bud-
dhist literature described as four kings
dwelling on the edges of the top of Mount
Meru to protect the 33 greater gods. They
TSONG-KHAPA ; or;
JE RIMPOCHHE :
PeMA Jung-NAT; or
Guru RIMPOCHHE :
P’oL JHUNG; or
JHO0-0 ATISHA :
TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 201
usually seem to be painted on the outside
walls of the Gongkhang and the monastery
treasure chamber, where they are represent-
ed as reeking with gore, wreathed in skulls,
and of hideous aspect. Of the four, one
carries a hook, another a chain, a third a
snare, and the fourth a bell ; each bearing
in the right hand a bowl, representative of
the world. Flames surround the figures
together with a retinue of animal-headed
demons.
deified hero; the great Buddhist reformer
and founder of the Gelukpa school. Died
1440 A.D. Life-sized figures and relics of
him abound everywhere; the most costly
effigies being set up in the Galden and
Kumbum monasteries which he founded.
the well-known Padma Sambhawa, de-
viser of much eclectic ceremonial and jug-
glery, founder of the Urgyenpa sect, and
everywhere popular, especially in Derge,
Tsang, and Sikkim. Grottoes where the
saint lived are shewn in all parts, in some
of which refuse of his food in the shape of
a reddish dust is still sold. His sayings as
contained in his “ Lotos Picture-wiitings”
are universally quoted. Other names popu-
larly designating the saint are Urgyen Pema
and Guru Pema. In Tantrik rites he is
held to assume a terrific as well as a mild
aspect and is then styled Dorje Dholit.
the famous Bengal pandit, Atisha, other-
wise Dipankara Buddha, who came from
Magadha as a missionary to Tibet for the
revivification of Buddhism. Labouring
for 17 years, he died 1053 A.D. at Nyet’ang
near Lhasa. Deified and greatly revered.
———— I
202
Dom RIMPOCHHE :
LuaAcaamM MAN-
DARAWA :
SAEKYA PANDITA :
So’NG-TSEN GAMPO
(NEF RN TT)
or JE GAMPO:
Lompo GAR:
T’aANG-TONG GYALPO:
SHABDUNG NGAKWANG
NAMGYAL :
fe Tg Oe Ets | Yoke a do)
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
bromston, pupil of Atisha, and founder
of Kadampa sect. Built Rading Gompa,
to the north of Lhési, and there a huge
effigy of the saint is worshipped. His
tomb is shewn in Jhang Taklung Gompa,
35 miles N.N.E. of Lhasa.
wife of Guru Rimpochhe! Her shrine
is at Ribo Tagzang near Mount Everest.
the famous teacher who founded the sect
whose head-quarters continue still at Sa-kya
Monastery (60 miles due north of Mount
Everest). Died circa 1245 A.D.
the king of Tibet who introduced learn-
ing and therewith the beginnings of the
Buddhist faith into Tibet, circa 680 A.D.
His effigy and those of his two wives, the
Chinese and Nipalese princesses, have been
set up in almost every monastery in the
land. The most highly reverenced images
of the trio, into which it is said their es-
sences were absorbed, are those preserved
in the Jho-khang, Lhasa.
prime minister of foregoing king, incar-
nate, now-a-days in abbots of Tengyai Ling,
Lhasa.
a lama of piety and engineering skill who
built eight chain bridges over the Yeru
Tsangpo, 250 years ago. An amusing
anecdote of the saint’s birth is given in
the Nineteenth Century, October 1889,
a saint of literary and engineering skill.
He built, 200 years ago, chain bridges over
rivers on the Bhutanese border, and is held
to be still incarnate in the successive heads
of Tashichhoidzong Monastery, the chief
lamasery of Bhutan.
TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 203
CuBOI-GYAL TERDAK a deified hero who has appeared on earth
LiINGPA : so far 17 times ; incarnate in the successive
heads of Mindol Ling.
Lava JE P’AkMopup: known also as Situ Gyalpo, a saintly
Tibetan king—the first to gain sway over
the whole country, built many forts and
monasteries; died 1372 A.D. His image
and the tombs of the 18 kings of the dynasty
he founded exist at Densat’il, a ruinous
gompa on the left bank of the Yeru, I5
miles east of Tse-t’ang.
Subjoined are the colloquial designations of the different
classes of lesser deities, demons, and other supernatural
orders :—
Rik-zin : the 8 sages expert in Tantrik arts, of whom the chief
1s styled Lo-pon Hum-kara (i. e., Pema Jung-nai.)
Lhd : any minor god, including local deities and all Brahmins.
Lhéd-min: an order of beings ever at war, through spiritual
rivalry, with the lhd.
Shrimpo and Shrin-mo : male and female monsters, hostile to
man, dwelling under huge boulders in valleys. They
devour travellers unprotected by greater deities whose
aids against shrimpo should be propitiated before
starting on a journey. Correspond to the Rakshésa
and Rakshasi of Sanskrit mythology.
Yiddk : lost souls in goblin bodies of stupendous size, often
several miles in height, but with tiny mouths which
prevent eating aught save the smallest crumbs.
They groan terribly with hunger and cause earth-
quakes.
Noi-jin : mountain-gods haunting peaks and passes. Many
mountain ranges in Tibet are named after them with
varying appendix names; e. g., Noi-jin T’ang-la range
S.E., of Tengri Nur, the summits of which are said
to be embodiments of the Noi-jin king and 860 of his
Arr ——————————————————— tL ER find dito A earl]
=
a Fer
I
Hi
o }
iH
H Hin
bh : {
{ i
1
{ 1 i
ii
iF a
i |
H i}
hd th
{ p i
| "
Hi
RE 11
i |
{ ¢ Hi
H
i Ht
HH
ILE! ]
i }
¥ }
ij
WH
|
ig
i ih
{
i
1 hs
b }
i }
i
bE hk
i
i bi
i HH
4
p i
h it
J il
uw }
4 iit
{ jh
» Hh
3 3H
4 i
of 4 BI
TEE
¥ 1h
§ Hi
}
i i Hi
4 ith
ie! 11
i i
bit |
at i
wil i i
th i
4
(i i
A
i
PE
CR
3 | }
|
4 +
i
i |
H
! il
) ul
y b
i
fi |
He 1)
a it
bh |
Ha) i
oh t
hi f
ti
indie i
Hi hb!
y !
f m
1!
i
f
rh 1}:
Ih ey
1H
i ARE
fb Fh
il ’ ibe
i
{
-
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
attendants. Namt’oi-shre, god of riches, is called by
many the Noi-jin king, and in this last character
is sometimes styled Muk-dzin: ‘holder of the mist.”
Lhandé: imps of demoniac character dwelling underground
during the day, and at night-time amusing them-
selves by riding on the backs of foxes, the yelping
of which beasts is caused by the blows of the goblins.
They carry as their cudgels the huge flowering stems
of the greater mullein, which plant is therefore
styled in Tibet Lhande berka. The Jhdindé is a
variety endowed with wings.
Lu : deities in the form of water-serpents inhabiting lakes,
rivers, and wells. Benignant towards man, they
construct at the bottom of lakes gorgeous palaces
wherein they watch over great treasures as well as
thé lives of fish which have been restored to the
water as propitiatory sacrifices after being caught.
They are of four varieties, a sacred pond to the N.
of Potala in Lhasa, for example, being reserved
by law for piebald Lu. When provoked the Lu cause
damage by hail and floods ; but payment of sur-f’al
or ‘hail tax’ to a Tantrik lama insures your property
against such injury.
Témchho’ : a fabulous horse whose mouth forms the source of
the great Yeru river.
Dri-a : sprites inhabiting the air, of fairy-like form, who divert
themselves by playing on ko-p’ong or guitars. They
subsist solely on odours: consuming the sweetest
scents of flowers as well as the foulest stenches from
privies and slaughter-houses. Butchers burn offal
of beasts on pedestals to propitiate these beings, who
are often said to be incarnated as bees, wasps, &ec.
Khd-doma : witches of vast form under five queens, whose
spirits now dwell in costly figures which have been
set up to their honour in Ramochhe Temple, Lhasa,
where their powerful aid to mortals may be duly
invoked.
TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 205
Mé-mo : other female spirits, but of a mischievous disposition.
Shib-ddk : the particular god of the soil in each village with
the surrounding country appertaining thereto. The
number of Shib-dik is accordingly great; and
every traveller arriving within the boundaries of
a fresh place will do well to propitiate the local gods
of its soil. Incarnated, at times, as monkeys, they
ride upon hares, bearing bows and arrows of straw
and shields fashioned from huge toadstools.
T"db-lhd : god of the domestic hearth, invoked after pollutions
caused by the boiling over of milk, &ec.
Tsen : solitary demons haunting particular mountain-paths, but
possessed of the habit and power of entering the
bodily frame of a human being and cansing him to
be afflicted with fever and divers other special
diseases.
Don-chhen : evil spirits which enter the body in bevies of 15 or
18 occasioning either death by apoplexy or violent
attacks of epilepsy and lock-jaw. The rainbow is
deemed to be caused by these spirits coming down
in troops to drink.
Dit’ (bdud) : is held to be the nearest equivalent to our Satan.
In later days many devils or di’po have, however,
been developed; and the female devils or dii'mo
haunt lakes for the purpose of feeding on the bodies
of monks thrown in as food for fish.
Gong-po and Gong-mo: are demons inspiring jealousy, desire
for money, cowardice, and licentiousness.
G¢k : subtle inhabitants of the valleys who put obstacles in the
way of travellers to sacred spots and hinder those
engaged in the erection of lhdkhang (temples) and
chhorten. The Hindu god Ganesa is regarded by
Tibetans as the *“ King of the Gék ” and “ Remover ”
of these obstacles.
Khyung : a monster bird akin to the roc of the Arabs and the
Garuda bird of Hindu literature. He does the bid-
ding of Dorje Chhang, the Boddhisattwa. The Bén
nm a HT To Ls pa att Te oi]
———— A ————————————————— TE kT WE ig
TIBETAN GRAMMAR BUDDHIST SECTS. 207
KApamra (AMARAFRINNL) . A school, the result of the first
regard him as their protector, and most of the
. : reformation of Tibetan Buddhism under the Indian
Bin-pa religious houses are dedicated in name to the Pit Alive fo, the, Mit omonts, fv fogs oy
Khyung. eventually shaped by Bromston, strictly upon Ma-
hdyana lines. Now closely allied to the Gelukpa
school, which has acquired possession of its head
centre Rading Gompa. Most of the Kadampa es-
tablishments are in P’anyul district, N.-E. of
Lbisé ; but they are now nearly all in ruinous
condition.
BUDDHIST SECTS. Kieyi'ea ( AMAIA): One of the leading Nyingma or
5
ists of Tibet are split up into about 18 different schools or
co ot which, however, are not bitterly opposed to one another.
There are two great divisions or classes of these sects, namely, the N yingma
or ancient schools, and the Sarma or new schools. i Besides the genera divi-
sion named Nyingma, one sect of this class is likewise particularly denominat-
ed the Nyingma sect. The Nyingma votaries are chiefly distinguished for
their practice of magic ceremonial ; consequently members of the chief Sarma
sect, the Gelukpa, often resort to Nyingma lamas on special occasions].
priests or sorcerers of Tibet, who are anti-Buddhists,
Dhul-bhum-mo : female satyrs with poisonous horns.
Pung-shri and md-ki-shri : underground demons of the guome
type, who devour children ; taking also possession of
the hearth after broth and milk have boiled over,
unless ceremonial cleansing is performed.
“Red Cap” sects, originally started in opposition
to the reforms of Bromston. Its votaries profess
acquaintance with the deepest subtleties of Tantrik
learning and meditative science. The presiding
deity of the sect is Lagna Dorje, otherwise Dorje
Chhang. Most of the so-called Dukpa monasteries
in Tibet, such as Dorje-tdk on the Yeru Tsangpo,
belong to it. In Ladak a most powerful body, the
GELUKPA (SARNIA) The most popular of all the sects ;
the established church of Tibetan Buddhism; a re-
formed development set afloat by Tsong-khapa in principal establishments of that country, such as
the 14th century. The Dalai Lama of Lhés4, the Hémis, Karzog, Hanlé, Chhimré, owning alkgiatie
Panchhen Rimpochhe of Tashiliimpo, and their es- to its tenets.
tablishments, together with all the leading monas-
teries in the province of Ui, hold Gelukpa tenets.
ay
NYINGMAPA (FRNA) : Professedly the most venerable of the
Their chief lamaseries are Gilden, Samye, Daipung,
Sera, and the Four Lings of Lhasa, in Ui; Tashi-
lhiimpo, Gyingtse, Dongtse, &ec., in Tsing; Kum-
bum near Koko Nur; together with hosts of other
large establishments in Khams ; also many in Ladak,
of which the principal are Pi-tuk, Samtan Ling,
schools and governed by the precepts of the Yoga-
charya system. The head centre is Mindol Ling,
a very ancient monastery some 45 miles S.-E. of
Lhésd. Its gompas may be known by the red and
blue stripes decorating the outer walls. The monks
wear red robes with red hat and red pouch.
and Likir. The gelongs of this sect wear red cloth-
ing, but a cap and sacred pouch of amber-coloured
cloth ; hence their designation ‘Yellow-hat ”’ Bud-
dhist. The Mongol and Spiti Gelukpa wear yellow
robes as well as yellow caps.
Luo-Dukra (FRI) : The prevailing sect in Bhutan, with
head-quarters at Tashichhoidzong, under the Dhar-
ma Raja. Branches of the sect exist in Tibet, e. g.,
at Réalung, Dechhen Dzong, &c.; whilst, curious to
te.
ET Eih TER
Ta gy
Es
H
§
C—O ET Es le Tn BU i Stet pir
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
relate, all the monasteries built round Mount Kailasa
near Lake Map’ang (Manasarowar) are peopled by
its votaries, the establishments being exclusively
under lamas who have been trained at Tashichhoi-
dzong.
KarmAPA (MRE). A sect much followed in Nipal, profess-
ing to be deeply versed in the forecasting of karma.
Samding monagtery on Lake Yamdok belongs to this
communion. The dress is red with black cap and
black pouch.
~~ em v .
Dzok-caEEMPA ( EFJN'AJA’): The sect most predominent
in Sikkim, professing Atiyoga doctrine and regard-
ing Padma Jungnai (Padma Sambhava) as their
founder. Pemayangtse (Pemiongchi) monastery in
Sikkim is head centre of the ‘ Urgyenpa,” as the
adherents of the school are often styled. In pro-
fessed imitation of their founder, who is allotted a
wife named Mandarawa, many lamas marry or have
loose ideas concerning female society, and differ from
other Buddhists in the important particular of slay-
ing animals in sacrifice. The dress is a dark red
robe with brown cap and pouch. Extensive colonies
of this sect exist in Dergé and Zokchhen in Eastern
Tibet, the latter district deriving its name therefrom.
SA-KYAPA ( NFA): Formerly a powerful body, the successive
chief lamas of the famous Sa-kya monastery having
at one period (1270-1340 A.D.) governed the whole
kingdom of Tibet. Sa-kya Gompa (Lat. 28° 54" 30 N,
Long. 87° 56” E.) is still the seat of this once august
Red-cap community ; and other Sa-kyapa lamaseries
continue to flourish, e.g., P’enyul Nalendra, Gong-
kar Chhoide, Ngor Gompa, Kyisho Rawana, &e., &e.
Ey Ser IY pr
Jo-nancea (B'S FRA ): A modern or Sarma sect of Yellow
Caps which originated in P’unts’o Ling under Kun-
BUDDHIST SECTS. 209
khyen Jowo Nang with peculiar dogmas said to be
akin to the Gelukpa. Its adherents profess much
asceticism, study the Dulwa texts, and are less
idolatrous than other Buddhists.
DI-EHUNGPA (RARE) or Di-gumpa: An ancient body,
formerly of immense influence, being rivals of the
Sa-kyapa; with several large establishments still
kept up both in Ui and in Ladak. Lama Yuru,
Shédchhugul, Yangdi Karpo (near Lhésd) and Di-
khung Ts’al Gompa all belong to this sect. At the
last-named, which stands 70 miles N. E. of Lhas4,
resides the incarnation of Di-khung Chhoije Kyobpa,
the founder of the sect.
. ryt 7) Three Red Cap sects; the
TarLuNGra (FEA ): last-named being the body
Amr : predominent in Spiti. Riwo-
Ye-gax-ea (3 Sa X ): [ chhe on the Ngul Chhu is an
CHHAK-GYA-PA TNL important Téaklungpa monas-
A > J ) tery.
Sutera (§FNE): A community differentiated as the
result of the labours of the Hindu Buddhist mis-
sionary, P’akpa P’a Tampa Sang-gye; boasting a
small following in Khams, as well as in Dengri dis-
trict where P’a Tampa lies buried.
-
Kux-camor-zsancea (MEAN SINS ): A sect with a few
No :
monasteries in the districts bordering on Yunnan.
Bron or Pon-ro: These are professedly anti-Buddbists and
(F5r) represent the ancient religious cult of the land,
correspondent with the Shdmans of Mongolia.
Their priests are of both sexes, females being
preferred, and deal largely in sorcery and animal
sacrifices. Their services are in constant requisition
especially among the Himalayan tribes and in
remote districts of Eastern Tibet. Their mode of
.
rrm——— iE LL ai yp ii ie a
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
circumambulation is with the left side turned to
the object concerned—the exact converse of the Bud-
dhist method. Several Bhion monasteries exist in
the Khyungpo district, W. of Chhamdo. The Pon-po
themselves are often designated Khyungpo after their
guardian the Khyung bird. In Sikkim the Lepchas
and Limbus follow the Bhon cult.
ETYMOLOGY OF PLACE NAMES IN TIBET.
As in India and elsewhere certain terms are constantly to
be found as part of the names of places, &c., in Tibet. The
following are the syllables most frequently recurring, with
their significations :—
-~
Donec (TK) a town ; as in Dong-tse, Tashidong, Kardong.
-~
Dona (F/R) a face; as in Sing-dong (really Seng-ge-dong
“lion’s face.””)
gr .
Dzone or JonNG (ER ) a fort; as in Seng-ge-jong, &e.
Kuar (NFR) a fort; as in Dangkhar (TRNNRR ) Kharsa.
~
YiL and YULCHE'R (AARR) a village or hamlet ; as in Sdng-
yl.
Yur a country in general, as in Lho-yul, Za-yul, Mon-yul.
~~
Ts'o (SN) a community, assemblage ; as in T50-kong.
ons cet v - .
Tom (RAN ) a market; as in T"om-si-gang.
Re
P’uxa (XR A") a heap; as in Rinchhenp’uny, Marp’ung ; also
Pure (FR) v
8 |
Lam (AN) a road ; as in Kho-lam.
PLACE NAMES.
Sam (JAN) thought; as in Samdub Guru; Samye.
Doxa (H]RK’) an abode, settlement, as in Dung-nyi (“ the two
A
abodes ”’) in Garhwal.
Knane ([RK") a house; as in Khang dung.
Tak (J) a rock; asin Tak-tsa, Tak-mar, Tak-nang.
R1, mountain; as in Ri-gin, Pali.
Sau (ZENA) a bridge; as in Chdkiam, Pdsamkha,
Gang, hill-spur; as in Tashigang, Namo-gang, Norbu-gang.
Bye, (8X) hill (in Balti only).
KANG (really sounded “ Ghang’’), ice, snow ; as in Kang-gar-ra,
Kangchhendzinga (or * Kinchinjunga.”)
—~
Nona (5R ) ridge (in Bhutan), as in.
~~
Done (RJR) a yak; as in Dong-khya (La) ; but occurs rarely.
LA4, a pass; but in Balti we have Ndshek, a pass.
Loa
Save (QR) a field; as in Kyo-shing, Si-shing-shi-khd (in
Bhutan).
GyanG, a wall; as in Gydng-tse, Dd-gydng, Gydngdo, Gydangmo-
chhe.
CuHU, river, waters; as in Rong Chhu, Nyang Ohhu, Shang
Chhu, &c.
CEHU-TS'EN, a hot-spring ; as in Lang-pdk-chhuts'en and many
others.
Loze (FR) large river; as in T4-lung.
SHONG, A valley or gorge ; as in Kyi-shong, Shong-go.
TSANG-PO (FRET) a river; as in Lhobra Tsangpo, Yeru
Tsangpo, Chhiblung Tsangpo.
212 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Nv
SHI (73 ) a site or foundation; as in Shimong, &e.
Peni (Padma) a lotos; as in Pemd-yangtse (commonly Pem-
tongche), Pemdling, Pemakoichhen (really Pdd-ma-
goschhen *“ Great lotos robes.” )
CrHUNG, small; as in Pemakoichhung, &ec.
Pura (or T’4) small, slender; as in 7"dmo-ling.
SE—a crest, hump, knob,
Yana (AJNR) precipice ; as in Yangma.
Nak (FFI) a forest ; when used as prefix (Néktsdl, &ec.) ; bub
as affix, another word (FA )="* black.”
CaHEN, great; common affix in place-names.
KAR, white ; as in Gong-kar, She-kar Gompe, Dongkar, Dzd-kar
La, Tso yu-karpa (“‘ white turquoise lake.”)
Rina, long, distant.
GyaL (in Tsang; “ Gye”), royal, chief, victorious; as in Gyal-
tang, Gyal-chhentse.
Suam the under part; as in Shdm-gyd.
SHAR, east; asin Sharp’en-lung, Gydl-ts’o Shar.
Tse (¥) summit, peak; as in Sog-tse, Gydngtse, Dongtse, Shi-
gdtse, &e.
-
Do (] ) a stone; as in Do-fsuk, Nangdo; and especially in
names of places near Tengri Nur.
_— v . x L
TASHI (JM IN ) lucky, blessed : as in Tushi-lhumpo, Tashisu-
«SS a i v
dong | IN aN = ) Tashiding, Pashi-chhoi.
Gar (FN) a camp, as in Gart'ok (SFT ), Gye-gar.
RK; an enclosure; alse “a horn ;”
Rading.
as in Ra-lung, Ramochhe,
PLACE NAMES. 213
-
Lowa (AR ) a mass, as in Dolong Karpo (“white mass of
snow’), the name of a rocky sand-bank in the Khanu
Lungwa River in Balti.
P’ve a cavern; as in Du-p’uk.
Gur, a tent, as in Gurld in Ngari Khorsum.
Ts&, grass, grassy, as in Tak-tsd, Tsd-sum, Tsd-gang.
Lune, a valley; as in Ré-lung, Khu-lung, Tib-lung, Nye-md-lung,
Chhiblung (“valley of horses.”)
Rong, a defile or gorge ; as in Khyi-rong, due north of Nipal;
Rong-chhd-kha.
-
To, or Top or Ter, (33 ) the upper part: in T5-lung, &e.
MAT or ME’ (FN) the lower part: in Central Tibet pronoun-
ced Md, or Me’; in Ladak, &c., Mdé¢é. This and the
foregoing chiefly attached as affix to names of dis-
tricts as in Po-tod, Po-me’, and many others.
Oc and Yok: lower ; as in Wur-og, Ambiyok.
SN .
Line (AR ) isolated spot: as in Darjiling, Mart oling.
SHoL or SHO, town appendent to a monastery; as in Tamshol,
Chhushol.
Dine (BRN) a hollow; as in Ton-dub-ding, Yon-chhoi-ding,
Samding.
Pang (3K) a bog, or usually, a grassy bog or swamp ; as in
Pang-kong Lake, Pang-mik, Pang-pochhe. A syllable
generally occurring in the names of lake-side places
YAR, upper (used in Balti place-names), as in Yarkhor, Yarmi-
chhu.
-~ . .
TANG, a plain, as in Yang-t'ang, Z&'-tang (RINEK'), &e.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
|
>
pa
—
—- »
~~
Coa
4 ©
Lo
~
TEI) PHBL ean
VOCABULARY.
ENGLISH—LADAKI—CENTRAL TIBETAN COLLOQUIAL
—LITERARY TIBETAN.
The verbs appear here in the infinitive form,
used ; or else the root with some affix annexed indicative of tense, such as yin, re’, du’, Jhung, yong, &c.
The Lédaki words are in large part current in Rudok and Western Tibet. In Balti the dialect is sl
letters s and » occurring more frequently
Kirong, and Sikkim this affix becomes she,
N. B.—Before using this Vocabulary,
though they rarely occur thus in practice. The verbal root alone is generally
ightly different, the
as the first letter in a word, while the infinitive affix is changed to chas. In Tsang,
and in parts of Sikkim and Bhutan, nysi.
the Notes on Pronunciation on page 131 should be referred to.
Excrisn. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN.
Able, to be
~~
t'upche ; ngobche chokpa ; t'up-pa ; and (oc- FAA | SNA
casionally) niii-pa Yy
é tupin ? t’w’-yong-ngd
Above (adv.) yar; gong-la yar ; yen-la 191 Ny SA
Able, shall you be
‘HAOAV —HTAV
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Above (prep.)
About (concerning)
About (adv.)
Abuse, to
Accept, to
Accident (mishap.)
Accompany, to
Accomplish, to
Accord, of its own
According to
Account of, on
Accuse, to
Accustomed to
Across
Add, to
Admittance, to grant
(audience)
Admittance, to refuse
Advance (of pay), an
Advantage
Advantage of, to gain
Advice:
ltak ; gong-na
pila (with accus.)
md-bép kdlche
ndmche
Jhur; jus
skyelche
chhom yinche
rang shuk-la
nang-tar : ts'irla
pila
kal tangche
kha-lok tangche
gom (with dang added to
object)
tedla
nanche
jalkha tangche
jalkha kakche
dom
gyal-kha choche
damska
~~ .
tang-la ; t'0 5
kor (with genit.)
tsam-la
lap-she tangwa
lempa
Jhur ax
ND
nyampo do-wa; dong-te
do-wa
dup-pa ; ts'ar-wa
rang-Shin
vv .
nang-shin
ton-la ; chhirtu
kal gyap-pa
ghom (with dhang)
t’é-la
nonpa
Jalkhd nangwa
Jalkha mi nangwa
ngdachhi
dhon
khyer-so zin-pa
khadam
ARR] Foy
SR
INA
SRA" (with A)
AE
Ui]
SR
RI
v3 GF
T8751 Bx
REA q
MRA
Jaa
55 zr
NERARABE a
yy
EX)
R535 zy
ARFATEr
*AUVINIVOOA NVILHILL
3
ENGLISH.
LApaxr.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTeErARY TIBETAN.
Advise, to
Afraid, to be
Afraid, he was
After (prep.)
Afterwards
Afternoon
Again
Age
Agreement, to make an
Agreement, written
Air
Alight, to
Alive (he is)—living.
Alike (are)
All (adj.)
All (pron.)
Alone
Also
Alter, to (anything)
damska tangche
Jig ragche
Jig song
tingla ; yokla
tingné ; yokla
plit’ok
lokté
naso
chenmo
rikche
khdchhad zumche
gdmgyd
ngdré ; lhungspo
bapche
sonte
ts’ok-se
kop ; lub
ts’angma ; Lib
chik-chik
yang
spoche
dim-ma nangwa
-
§he'-pa GRA
Jig-tdg jhung ; §he’-pa-yin
Jé-la; shuk-la ; gdp (with
genit.)
larné ; jé-la
gung-lon
yang-kydr ; lokné
nats'o
genpo
chhampa
chhé-zvm jhyé-pa
ghen-gyd ; yig-zin
ngdrd ; nam
sho’du bap-pa
sompo
da-te
iin
t'dmche ; ts'angma
shrang-shrang-la
yang-kyar
gyur-wa
TRE
RRTHTA
RECA HFN ARE
ENN] Ng=| AAR
SRN 25
SR
We) 3
535
TRA
REF
FIRES 2
FRNA
SEE
a
TREE
AAW
ul
GRASS
WEF
_—
‘AIVINAVIOA NVLHLILL
YILTV — LNARAIIOV
ENGLISH.
LADAKTI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Altered, 1s
Altogether (quite)
Altogether (in a body)
Always
Almost
Among
And
Anger
Angry, to be
Animal
Animal (of prey)
Another (one)
Anxiety
Any, anything
Appear to, (become vis-
ible)
Apple
Apply one’self, to
Appoint, to (to any post)
Approach, to
Arm
Arms, in (your)
qyur song
lding-se ; yongsu
sag ; kod
ndmsang
» ON
ts’a-bhikma JH] NN
ndngndngna
dhdrung
shro
shro chhache
duddo
dalkméd
sem-ts’er
su-zhik ; chi-tong
Jungche
kidshu
badche
kdlche ; sko-che
sar chhdche
lakpa
pang-la
gyur yo’ ; do-wa jhe’
yongsu
lhengyé-la ; hlench:
dhui-gyiin ; takpa-réshi
chhalam
nangne
dhang
t'o
t'o-wa lang-wa
du-wa ; tindo
chen-Sen
-
dakme’ [RNY
khok-t'uk
chi-yang ;
dd (as an adj.)
Jhungwa
lv; debu
lhur lenpa
chuk-pa
ta nye-po do-wa ; khe-pa
lakpa
pang khar
RIX
Ear
B33
91 955
HAN
Fa
WR AR
i
q NY q
kl
SHE
M&S
NAN
SRE
age
x
Ras
REAT | RET
3 IRRIRA
ATE 7
SEN
"AUVINIGVOOA NVIHILL
'SNAV NI—'TVININV
ExcGrLisH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Army
Arrow
Arrive, to
Arrive, shall
Arrived, has he
As (prep.)
As far as (up to)
As—as
Aside
Ask, to
Ask a favour, to
Ass
At
At once
Attack, to
Attain, to
Attend (at or before), to
Attend, will (be present)
Attend to, to
Avalanche
Avoid, to
Autumn
mdk-ts’ok
da
lebche
leb zin
pin-nd ?
ts’okse ; zuk
ts'ukpa
tsam
urna
diche (with nds)
zhuwa p'ulche
wong-bu
la
rubche
t’opche
ngara choche ; sem zhung-
che
kharud
dzurche
ston-chhoks
mda-pung
da
lebpa ; chhinpa
lep yong
lep jhung-ngd ?
de ; nangShin
t'ukpa
tuk
lok-la
shu-wa qx
ND
shuwa uwlwa ; solwa
wong-qu
la; tsane
lamsang
rub-rup qyakpa
nye’ -pa
jar-wa (with la or diin-
la)
Jar-gyu yin
ching rik jhe’pa
khdri’
yolwa
tonka
RIN
NNR
Ny ar
YEH
BE IRE
RN
35;
Gr
Aaa
gc v g
3H a
FRENTE
RFT
PR
mgs
= q
Bm
*AUYVIAIVOOA NVIALIILIL
‘NROALAV—ASY
TB ES EO ee —, Ce
ENGLISH.
LADpAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArRY TIBETAN.
Averse to, is
Away
Axe
Baby
Back, the
Back (adv.)
Backside (posteriors)
Backwards
Bad
Bakshish
Ball (musket)
Bandage
Bank (of river)
Banker
Baptise, to
Barber
Barley-flour
Barley
Basin (eating)
Basin or bowl
Basket
Basket (covered)
ma t'adkhan duk
par
stary
omt’ ung
gydp
lokte
p'ump’um ; spi
pli-lok-la
sokpo
ndangshyin
rindrs
rast’ dk
tsangs-t’a
bundak
t'us solche
deg-khan
sa-tu
nds
shing-kor ; kore
katora
tselpo
kundidm
—yol yin
hd-la HA
ta-dhu ; tepo
pugu
gydp
lokné
tumt’ um ; kup
gyap-lok-la
ngempo ; akpo
so're ; mdng-jyin
dé-u ; dikril
lept’ dk
dam.
bunddk
ti solwa
dek-khen
tsampa
ne
plorpa
dhungpen
nyuktse ; le-po
v 9
se ma
23
AIGA
ATH
73
BARRA
AFASRS
Ixy
‘AYVINGVOOA NVIHILL
‘LHASVE—T11VH
DE Tp i
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Bat
Bathe, to
Bear, a
Bear, to (carry)
Bear, to (suffer)
Beat, to
Beautiful
Becoming, it is
Bedstead
Bedding
Bedskins
Bee
Beef
Beer
Been, has
Beer shop
Beer drinker
Beer, small
Beetle
Before (adv. previously)
Before (adv. in front)
Before (prep.)
ts’anbt
t'uche
denmo
khurche
shranche
rdungche
démo
nyal-1’t
mdl-tan
zim-t'ul
rang-zi bu
chhdng
song ; yod-pen
chhang-sd
chhang dddchan
uksing
burpa
shngdma ; goma
ngun-la
dun-la (with gen.)
p’dwang
tr uwa
dhemong
khyer-wa
so’pa ; p’am khur-wa
chak gydkpa
lépo ; mying-che'po
chhak-ghi-dw’
mal-1’s
mal-chhe ; malting
mal t'ulpo
dangma
lang-sha
né-chhang
chhyin-pa’-in
chhang-khang
chhang t'ung-khen
burpa
ngar
dong-la ; ngon-la
diin-la
roe
aE
SE
ABs
SESES)
a
JIT
AH
NAH
AR’
HARE
ARRR
FF
‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAILL
‘HIOIHT —SNIN SAUD
TR i EE i a i
ENGLISH.
LADAKTI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Began to, he
Beggar
Begin to, to
Beginning, the
Begun, was
Behind (adv.)
Behind ( prep.)
Believe, to
Bell
Bell, to ring
Bellows
Belly
Belonging to
Belongs to, it
Below ; beneath (prep.)
Beneath, from
Bend, to
Benefit
Bent
Best, the
Best, one’s (utmost)
« 8B
Better than
go-zuk yot-pen
shrangpo
tsukche
goma
tsugspen
pina
sting-la
den chhéche
dri-lu
trolche
bud-khan
drodpa
chan (affixed to owner)
t’es duk (with la)
yok-la (with gen.)
yok (with accus.)
yok-nds
kug-kuk choche
p’dnpa
kug-kuk
chhok
chi Pup khan
B a
sang gyalla
dzulk jhung
tsuk jhung
pang-go
go-dzukpa
goma
tsom jhung ; go-dzuk-
Jhung
Jé-la ; chhys
8hug-la (with gen.)
yi’ dhe’pa ; lo chhé-pa
dhilbu
tolwa ; tsing-tsingpa
bi-pa
dho’pa
chen (ditto)
t'i-te-ys (with la of pos-
sessor)
kha-wék ;
wok (with genit.)
wok-né
kug-kuk jhe’pa
p’empa
khwmpo ; kuk
chhok ; tak-sho
ghang shé-pa
B a
lé.. yik-ka
SRE
RETA
RA
FAR
PA
{a
NCE
=A] 3 ZW 5
Ay
Aare
SE)
NEA)
AN". . {=
‘AYVINEVOOA NVIHGLL
‘NVHL YHLLAd-—-SMOTIAd
Bi fo
BE Ml rin EM a i m—, EP
ExGrisH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerARY TIBETAN.
Between
Beyond (prep.)
Bhutan
Bind, to
Bird
Bird’s nest
Birth (also re-birth)
Birthplace
Bits, in—Bits, to
Bit, a little
Bit (horse’s)
Bite, to
Bitter
Black
Blame, to
Blanket
Bleed, to (intr. verb)
Blind
Blocks up
Blocked up, is
Blood
Bloody
Blow, to
zhung-la
parla ; pi-loks
Druk-yul
chhingche
chi-pa
ts'dngs
skye-sa
pd-yul
dumbur
ts’dbik ; nyung-ngd-rik
shrapchak
so tabche
khante ; gho
nélpo
skyon takche
shapos
tak tangche
mikzhar
kak dul
kak song
tak
t’akchan
p’uche
seb-la ; bhar-la
p’ar-tsam
Duk-yul
khyikpa
Jhyd ; p'yé (in Sikkim)
Jhya-ts'ang
kye-wa
kye-sa
chhak tum la ; longlong
énts’am chik ; ’embhu chik
sapchak
mukpa
khapo
ndkpo
chyo-wa
chhdaly ; mdsén
tak p’owa
mik-shar ; Songer
chur-kin-duw’
chur jhung
tak
t’ékchen
pu-wa
ARE
Wy
AGT
RICA
7
g She
y J
FR
FARA
JF
Ay
ir
AT
Ha
Fi
RATA
5
RA 3
RISE
‘AUVINGVOOA NVIHILL
‘MOT —LIg
NE a
li A
hed
ENcLisH.
LApAxkiI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN,
Blow, a
Blue
Blunt
Board, a
Boards (for book)
Boat
Boat (of hide)
Boatman
Body
Boil, to make
Boil, to let
Boil over, don’t let
Boiled-meat
Bolt, a door
Bolt, to
Bone
Book
Booklet
Boot
Boot (with woollen tops
and leg)
Born, to be
Borrow, to
Bosom
Bottle
Bottom
Boulder
damchadk
sNGon-po
tultul
spanglep
leks-shing
gru-chhung
gru-khdn
go-po
skolche
skol chukche
lud ma chuk
81-71
sure chulkche
ruspa
spéchha
spé-ka
kapsha lam
charuk
skyeche
yarche
porg-pa
shelbum
lting
p'd-long
dzok
NGon-po
nome’
danddr ; shinglep
lek-shing
dh ; nyen
ko-dhu ; ko-d
ko-khen ; dhu-pa
sukpo ; p'ungpo
tso tang-wa
kol chukpa
l#' ma chuk
sha tso-pa
ya
yd gyakpa
rut ; dung
péchha
po-ti
lham
ke’pa
kye-wa
kyin-kyiwa
ambdk
bumpa ; potdl
ting
tak- pong
| mor
BE
GR
FAAS
7
Ey
ESE]
Na) /ERa
AR | 3°
SNE
SS x
BN
MRA
ya
y q
JRA
aay
TH:
AR
AUVINEVIOA NVILAGLL
~ LVIR~-AA'TIOu
‘qHaTa04d
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Bow, a
Bow (salute)
Bowl (food)
Boy
Branch
Brandy (barley-spirit)
Brass
Brave
Bravery,
Breach of law
Bread
Breadth
Break, to
Breakfast
Breast-pocket (bosom)
Breathe, to
Breath
Bribe, a
Brick
Bridge
Bridge of tree-boughs
zhu
chhak
ko-re
buts-ha ; bu
yalga
donrak
rdagan
nyingchan
hampa
tagur
zhang
chdgche
tsalma
ug tonche
hu ; uk
p’aksup
zhu (§hu)
chal-chhdg
shingkor ; p’urpa
chi’pa ; potso
yd'ga
arak
régan
ngingchen ; pd-o
nyingtop
t'im-dhang-gdl
pd’lep
Sheng-kha
chhékpa
dho ; §hok-to
ambadk
Ww jungwa ; ngampa
Ww; ug
p’ak-sul
pak ; sd-lep
Sampa
chuk-Sam
Tq
ZA
Sry
3a RY
WE
WRAY
81
RAR
Sear
QAR
a
TET
I
FNARIRA
RT
KAT
‘AAVINIGVIOA NVIAGIL
avuayad
‘aodargd
ET RT eT 6
a
ENGLISH.
LApAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN
TF
Bring, to
Bring, shall IT
Brought, has been
Brought, has
Broad :
Broken, is
Broom
Brother (when used of or
to an elder brother)
Brother (speaking of or
to a younger brother)
Brothers (general term)
Bruised, is
Brush (for painting)
Bucket (of wood) with lid
Bug
Buddhist
Build, to
khyongche
khyong yin-néd ; khyers’in-
na ?
khyerspen ARN Ea RE
zhangchan
spunla Ba
No
p’akzet
chary
nang-pa
sikche
sap
khwr shok !
khyer shok !
kydlwa ; khur-wa
khur yong-gyu-yimpa ;
kyal yong-g& ? khur lep
yong-nga ?
khur yong-wa-yin or khur
lep du’
khur lep song
Shengchen
chhak jhung
chhydk-ma
d-jho ; jho-jho
Auwo ; chungpo (hon.)
pun
dab jhung
yuk-pur
chhusom
de-shik
nang-pa
tsik-pa
Go)
RES
S| REIT
RFR
"AUVTINGVIOA NVIEIIL
NHIOUd
‘ating
i
A er rT ey ie eS Ml
ENGLISH.
Bundle (hand)
Burn, to (anything)
Burn, to (intrans.)
Burnt, has been
Bury, to (anything)
Business (affairs)
Busy (I am)
But
Butcher
Butterfly
Butter
Button
Buy, to
y (beside)
Calf
Call, to (to a person)
Camel
Came ; has come
Camp
Camp, to pitch
LApaxkr.
lak-kod
| duk tangche ; shrakche
tsikche
tstkspen
kungche
delwa
(ngd-la) delwa duk
a-mae
shap ts’ongkhen
p'e-lebsé
mdr
tobcha
nyoche
damdu
béto
kad gyapche ; botche
shngabong
yongspen
drangsd
gur langche
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
pimpo REY
dhuk-pa
ts’ikpa
ts’ik jhung
kung-wa
dhén ; le-ka
(ngdrang-la) dhelwa re’
yin-kyang; yinna Jang
shempa ; or dikchen shem-
pa
chhye-md-lep
mar
t'ebji ; tole
nYo-wa
diin-la
bhe-to; bhemo ( fem.) (often
pe-u)
ke’ gyakpa
ngdmong
yong-pa-yo’ or p’ep jhung
dangsa
u-ghur langwa
LITERARY TIBETAN.
WRB
RAETA| FRA
AFA[A| RAST)
ah
iF
Borer
RF T=
Ha
"53
AQ
BR
2a
TSE
mn
gees
"AYVINIGVOOA NVIHILL
"INYO — ATATALLNE
Ce lh nb be
BI UI
EERE TER oh a
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Cane-bridge
Cap
Cap, Chinese
Care, take
Careful
Careless
Carry, to
Cart, a
Cast away, to
Cat,
Catch hold of, to
Caught, to be
Cause
Cave
Cease, to
Ceiling
Centre
Centipede
Certain (sure)
Certainly
sda-zam
tibe
kadarcho!
ts’andachan
zon-me’ ; lélochan
khyerche
shing-sta
p’dngte borche
pisha
zumche
khat-che
zh ; gyu-tsan
pukpa
zhiche
ya-t’ok
te-wa
lare
ngo-tok
nanchhak
pa-§ampa or ts’d-am
§hambu
mok-r1
rikpa dhim !
nyar gos!
rikpa jhys !
chag-gha ddkpo
hamakho
khurwa
shing-ta
yukle shakpa
Shumbu, Shimma
par-dzin t’empa
kharwa
gyu ; §hy
tak-p'uk ; bup
chhe’pa
t’akchho
nenten
FEN | FANE
35
5 IT
A
aps
5
CEES
For
AEs zr
ARSE
I A
Z| FAN
I"
TT
‘A4VIAIVOOA NVIHILL
*XINIVIYED) = LVD
LT A ry Ce
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN,
Chair, European
Chair, sedan
Change, to (trans.)
Changed, is
Character
Charcoal
Charge, to (accuse)
Charge, to (price)
Cheap
Cheapen, to (in bargaining)
Cheat, to
Cheek
Cheerful
Cheese
Chest (of the body)
Child
Chilly
Chimney (smoke hole)
Chin
China
Chinaman
t'1-shing
khyok-pang
spo-che
p’o song ; rdepspen
solndk
kal tangche
rin nenche
khye-mo
rn p’abche
gop-skorche
khurts ok
gamschan
t'ud
ddng
tibgu
drangmo
qyd-r'i; shut’t
p’epchang
je-wa ; She-wa
gyur jhung
shi-gyii’
solndk
gol-wa ; ts’ang dru-wa
rin chd’pa
kye-po
khéru do-wa
go-jhompa
dempii
t'ulpo
wo-t"i’
dhang
fugu ; pugu
dhang-mo
kyamtong
oku wy NN
Mahdtsin
Gyd-ma
wo
BANA
Ex
Jaa
rs
ay
FAT
GRIF
NA OER
NT
NE
qe
x
ki
NY NY
NV.LAI IL
‘AUVINAVIOA
— LYE HD
‘NVILVNIHD
Es pp
pL
pi
CA
ENGLISH.
LApaAkT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Choke, to ir, v.
intrans.
Cholera
Choose, to
Chopsticks
Chop up, to
Christ
Circumstances
Circle
City
Claw
Clay
Clean, to (trams.)
Cleaned, is
Clean (adj.)
Clear
Clearly
Clever
Climb, to
Cloak
Clock
snangche
ske damche
bokshz
damste khyerche
t'u-mdng
stupche
Mashika
nats’ ul
gort’ik
gydlsé
barmo
zhdpék ; kdlak
lakmo choche
sang chospen
lakmo ; sang
sing-mo ; wd-le
sdlpo
shang-po
dzekche
yang-luk
chhutshod
khyompa
kye khyikpa
nyalok
dam-pa
turma
tsap-pa
Mdshika
do-go ; sel-chha
kyir-kyir ; kinkhor
dhong-khyer
parmo ; der-khyw
Jimpa
le-mo zo-wa ; sdng-wa
sang jhung
tsangwa
sdlpo ; hleng
sdlte
t'db-chen ; khé-t'a
dzek-pa
bhi
chhii-ts’o’
SRF
REZ
RAIA] ARATE
REFA| HA
SENER | BRE
MRS
REA
=
§%5
‘AD0TO —= MV'TO
NVLUGIL
"AUVINGVIOA
EE
a
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Close by
Clotted milk
Cloth
Clothing
Cloud
Coat
Cock (gun)
Coil, to
Cold
Cold, a
Collect, to
Collection
Collar
Colour
Comb
Come, to
Come here !
Come, has he ?
Come, will
Come back!
Come before, to (to ap-
pear before)
nYe-mo
chhurp’e
rds; go-nam
gom-chhé
shrin
gonchhé
me-kdm
ril-che
dhang-mo
yama
sduche
dus-pa
gong-gd
tson ; ts’os
so-mang
yongche
wru shok !
leb-song-ngd
yong yin ; leb-yin,
lok shok !
chharche
Literary TIBETAN.
rai; ré-ga
ko-lak ; mabsa (hon.)
tin
kwa-tse ; tuk-po
t’o-chhung
dil-wa
dhang-ght ; dhang-mo
lo-ts’am ; mdchham
diii-pa
ts’o
kong-ge
dok ; Ikhd-dok
ta-shé
yong-wa ; p’ep-pa (hon.)
diru shok !
kho p’ep-sam ?
yong-gyu-yin
lokne shok !
jar-wa
85] aE
&a| RE
N
”
Cg 2
4
A
Nn
‘3
A
eh
7
NEA
Me J
SFT
HR
ARQ] RRA
ETH
RASA
Ean
BRIT
= 523 5 zr
AUVINGVOOA NVLALIL
"ANON —LOATION
EL Lr iL lai AM 11 Es ia
a
a
ENcLisH.
Conr—
LADAKI.
CENTEAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Coming, he is
Come, has
Comfortable
Comet
Common (ordinary)
Companion—comrade
Compare with, to
Complain of, to
Complete
Condemn, to
Confusion, in
Conscience
Consequence of, in
Consumed, is
Contented
Continual, is
Continually
Contract, a
Convenient
Cook, a
Cook, to
kho-rang yong-gin duk
yongpen
zhi-wa
ghu-tsiks
t'un-mong
yddo
sdur choche (with la)
kal tangche
tandu
tim tangche
t'dl-t'ul
shés-zhin
ts'arte song
ts'imba
zhiktang duk
gyundu
dzin
dshdn
janma
ts’oche
kho yong-gi-du’
yong-pa yin ; jar jhung
nyamgd
ring-skdr
timmong ; kyui-ma
8ada ; rok
durwa jhye’pa (with la)
shu-lok gyakpa
yé-dzok
8halchhe chd’pa
tal-t'ul
Jhai-chhot ; jhai-le
ten-nar (with la)
Sin yo’ ; ts'ar song
yi ts'impo
nyukchen du’
gyiindhu ; ndmzhdk
dumi’d
ot-pa ; rungchen
t'dp-yok
ts’0’pa
pa
FI
SINT
RHR
rl) JAE
TF §F
RRA] RTF
I
207] ANA
ARSE
‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAAIL
*1000 —— NOISAINOD
| nie
Et ei
LE .,,
ENGLISH.
LApAk.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Coolie
Copper
Cork
Corpse
Cotton (raw)
Cotton-thread
Cough, to .
Cough, a
Country
Count, to
Courage
Courtyard
Could, he
Cover, to
Covering, any
Cow
Cracked, has been
Crane
Crawl, to
Cream
Crevice
Crooked, it is
khurupa ; bé- garpa
zang
khadik
70 ; Spur
rds-bal
ras-kut
khogche
ldo-khok
yul
sv korche
NYING-1US
khyams ; ts'om
ngob
tumche ; kabche
khyeps
ba
kas song
Jha-trung-trung
ba gokche
6-shri
seng-bar
khong chhé duk ; kyok duk
bak-khen ;
Sang
khadak
70 ; pur
rar-bhal
rai-ki’
lo gyakpa
lo-khok
yl
dangka gyap-pa
nying-top ; lo-top
ts’om-kor
chok yong ; t'up song
yok-pa ; kdp-pa
khebma
bhd-chu
zhak jhung
Jha t'ung-t'ung
p’e-wa
wWO-8
ser-ka : N=ay
gur-gur duk
BE ete refs
ge et eh 3
"AYVINGVOOA NVIA4IL
‘AdA00Y) —~—HUHVINO0D
ENGLISH.
LApakI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Cross over, to
Crown of head
Cruel
Cup
Cup-board
Cure, to
Cured, is—am
Currants
Current (of river)
Curtain
Custom (usage)
Custom (revenue)
Cut, to
Cut off, to
Daily
Dak-transit
Dalai Lama
Damp
Danger
Dangerous
gal-che; gydpche
|. gok-skil
nakchdan ; tdma shébo
ko-re
chhagdm
nad pin-che
zhi-song
ba-shoka
ngddchan
yola
shrol
sho-gdn
dé-che ; shnga-che
2hok-che
zhék dang zhdk
uldk
gyalwd kusho rim-bochhé
sher-chan ; hus
Jig-ri
nyen-chan
gal-wa : AN
gok §hiin
mi nying-je ; nyemba
p’or-pa
gamgomang ; u-pdng
p’en-chukpa
80 jhung
bad-shoka
chhu-gyiin
yol-la ; rai-yol
ghom-khyé
sho-t’dl
chi’pa ; ddl-pa
dum-pa : AANA
nyin-re Shin
ta-Sam
gyda’ wa rimpochhé
len-chen
nyen
nyen-chen ; Mi-tenpo
re
SGT
TI
=r
NNR NA
SESE SE
ARN
I5
a
ar
AE
ARE 2] gH
AZATEr
EN
SRR g 3)
ay
5
TS
‘AUVINGVOOA NVIACLL
‘SNOYADNVA —— WOLSAD
ES eg
- mn
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Darkness, dark
Dark, to become
Date
Daughter
Dawn
Day
Day, all
Dead, is
Dead one, the
Deaf
Dear (costly)
Debt
Deed
Deep
Degrees, by
Delay, to cause
Demon
Deny, to
Depend upon, to
Depth
Descend, to
mun-dik
mun chhd-che
ts’es
bo-mo
skya-od
nYM-mo ; nyi-ma
nywn kob ; nyi-ma ltang
sha-song
shi-khan
gud-nk
rin-t’os
bulon
le-ka
lting-mo ; dongpo
rémos rémos
lande ; don
zim zerche
lo kyelche (with la)
Iting ; kongto
bapche
mviin-ndk ; minpa nikpo
miin rib-pa
ts’e’-tang
pumo ; pum
ndm lang
nym-mo ; §hdk
nyin-t'dg-t'ok
shi song jhe
shi-khen
wompa
ghii-po ; kyongpo
bhulin
lai-ka ; Jhé-wa
tungchen ; §absdp
rim-rim
gyang jhe’pa
de; gék
me tolwa
lo-dang khelwa (with la)
ting ; Sab-khye
t'eng-la gyu-wa; shi-dhu)
bab-pa
Literary TIBETAN.
7
RAH | AFErEr
Fra
9
FRSA
35] 531 6
FRR
3%
AN] IT
2]
EX
RR IAS
NRA
fH
RII .
*AYVIAIVOOA NVIHAIL
"ANHISHA~=-dVHEA
Ee et HIE AA CAA
ExcGrisH,
LApAxk1.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
&
Describe, to
Desert, a
Deserted, it is
Determined, I am
Devour, to
Dew
Diarrheea
Die, to
Difference, the
Different (various)
Different, is
Difficult
Dig, to
Dirt
Dirty
Dirty, to make
Disease
Dish (flat)
Dismiss, to
Distance
Distribute! (divide them!)
shadche
brok
tong-pa-duk
t’ddpa yong-spen
midche
zelchhu
shal
shiche
khyad
80-80
mr déchan
gdgspo
duche
dima
ts'idu ; ts'ichan
dima p’okche
nad
grate
tangche
p'a-zad ; nyé-lot
gos tong !
tonpa ; talwa
dok tong ; wen-sd
wem-pa re’
t'dkchho’ be’chho’
hib-hdb $d-wa
Silpa
t'u-ne’
shi-wa ; shi-p’owa
khye’par ; zolts’o
80-80 ; ma-chik
mi da-wa
khakpo ; ké-le
ko-wa
dhima ; dhékpa
tsok ; ts'ichen
ts'ichen gyakpa
ne
qugushda ; soldér
gong-p’ok terwa
t'dk ring-t'ung
sha-sha-su go!
35 zr
RFF
RRR ES ER RE
Iara
ag
ART
SEE]
Ny
—
AMRF
RN] RA
SET
Forge
»
SRE
RAEN AFIT
= 3g
AUVINAVIOA NVILAIILL
INHIHIATET
*SSHYLSIA
ee ec
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTErARY TIBETAN.
Distress
Do, to
Doctor
Doing, is
Do, that will
Dog
Done, has been
Door
Door-post
Door-frame
Double
Downwards
Drag, to
Dress, to
Drink, to
Drowned, be
Drum
Drum, brass
Drunk, to get
Drunk, is
Drunkard
dukngal
choche
am-chhi
cho-khen duk
da dik!
khyi
chhoms song
go
lok-ré
ydre-mdare
nyil--dab
tur-la
t’enche
ghonche
t'ungche
chhw khyer song
den jang
dolti
rdrospa yongche
sichan song
rdros-khan
ka-duk VRE
jhye’pa ; dze’-pa (hon.)
dm-chhi RNS"
jhe’ -ghi-re’ (chyin-ki-re’)
dhd-ta dikpa
| khyi
Jhya song
go
len-nys
w . .
shodhu YN t'eng-la
~
dii’pa
konpa ; ghoi-ldk ghon-pa
t'ungwa
ts’ upte sha
’
nga
rdro-wa
raro jhung
rdro-wa-pa
re
359) REST
a
IF FHRST
ger J
asa
Har
Hy
yo
i
‘AYVINGVIOA NVLEUIL
‘AYVINAYA —HTd00a
Ws
EE tu it ut
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTeErRARY TIBETAN.
Dry
Dry, to
Duck
Due, 1s
During
Dust
Dung
Duty
Duty (tax)
Dwell, to
Eagle
Ear
Ear-ring
Early
Earnest, in
Earth (ground)
Easy (not difficult)
Easily
Eat, to
skdmpo
skemche
ngurwa
nam—zdana
talwa
lcha
khak
sho-gam ; tot
dukche
ts’os gydpche
lak-khyi
nam-chhok
along ; chha-bu
nga-mo
don-dram
sa-zhi
la-mo ; démo
2d-che
kdampo
kam jhe’pa
yd-tse
Jal goi-gyu
ts’e-na (after verb)
dul
dhiin
ts'ul-t'tvm
sho-t’al
ndi-pa (né-pa)
ts’or gydkpa
Jha-lik
amchho’
e’-kor WARE"
ngamo
nén--ten
sa
le-la-po
le-ld-po-la
ny’
to 8d-wa 5 FJ
NRT
Nar
cx
NVLHILL
AYVINGVO0A
‘LVH— Ad
a
THAIN AR
i i ESS
FL
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Eaten, has been
Eatable
Edge, at the
Egg
Eight
Emerald
Employ, to
Empty, to
Empty
End
Engage, to
Enlargen, to
Enough
Euter, to
Entrails
Entrust, to
Escape, to
Even (flat)
Evening
Every
Every day
zas song
zd-chhok
zur-la
ful ; go-lo
gydd
mdrgad
chodche
shrdche
stong
Jukma
dznm-che
pelche
dik
zhuk-che
long-kha
chhol-tangche
shorche
nYampo
p'i-tok
re repeated after the
noun twice said
zhak dang zhdk
to Sax song dw’
§&-nyen
Sur-la
gong-do
?
gye
mdrgat
chi’pa
po-wa
ku-tong-pa
t’d-ma
dzin-8hdkpa
plel-wa
yong-nge ; khyé yin
Shug-pa
gyu-ma
chhol-wa
doipa
lep-lep
gong-td
re-re
nyin re; nyima tékpa
RT
Zxcy
sz] SY
See
3X
SEE
= zr
FE
NE]
3] NZ 3 5 zr
Far
REX
3 J
RANT
ATF
AUVINEGVIOA NVIHILL
HOVONH
‘AUHAY
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN,
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Every where
Exactly
Examine, I will
Except (prep.)
Exert yourself !
Explain, to
Expenses (Hind : kharach.)
Extinguish, to
Eye
Eye-ball
Eye-lid
Face
Facing (anything)
Fable
Fade, to
Faint, I am
Faith
Faithful
Fail, to
Fall! don’t
kobtu
ngotok ; zhibchhd
ngd-is ts’od t& yin
mankhdn
strad-strad tong ! hdd-hdd-
tong !
shadche
sodche
mak
mik-pak
dong
dong-tad
shrimgs
kyukche
ngal song
dadpé sem
dang-pa-chan ; zhabstokpa
bad chukche ; or mi t'eb-
che
tsangmd-la
kho-né ; 8hib
ngdrang-ghi ts’s td gong
mempa
tson-dii jhyi ; hur-hur tong
she’-pa ; tdlwa
do-go
50° pa
mik
me do
mak-pdg
dong ; kyé-go
p’drkhd (preceded by geni-
tive of object)
dum
nYi-pa
chhong jhung
de’pe yi’ ; de’pe sem
lo-dengpa
mi khéipa
ma ri ; ma §ak!
753
i .
BARRA
Nar ;
ARNE
RAT
RE
*AYVIAAVIOA NVIAGIL
TIVA = dI'T-TAH
ee tacit
Ea EE i
BAR
ExNcLisH.
LApaAkI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Fall, to
Fall down, to
Family (lineage)
Famous
Fan
Far, how
Fasten !
Fasten, to
Fat (adj.)
Fat (of meat), the
Father
Fault
Fear
Fearless
Fear, to
Feeble
Feel, to (touch)
Feel, to (be sensible of)
Female (of an animal)
Fence
Fern
rel tong!
relche
rompo ; ts’onpo
s'il
’ y 2
a-p a
shnongs
Jig-r1
Jigche (with “la” of the
object)
hal-med
nyuk-che
rag-che
gyelwa AIT : ri-pa
mar 28k-pa
TUL
dék-chen
deng-ydb
td-ring-li ; kd-ts’¢’ !
tak chik
tak-pa ; dom-pa
gyak-she’ ; ts'ampo
ts'il
a-p'd ; yap (honorific)
kyon ; nong-pa
Jrg-tak
Mmin-ji-pa
she’pa GRE
kyar-kyor
t'uk-pa
r1g-pa
d-che
rau-é ; dibma
kyé-ma
cg
RA
TNS
FERRIER
ST
RRFRIEr
Fray
EC
J) Wa
I Fw
ARTE
NRE
ABFA] RET
Er
Fa
=a
Ak
"AYVINAVIOA NVLUULL
‘NUH == YTHLVI
tte
BT -
rar
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Ferry-man
Fever
Few, a
Fifty
Fight, to
Figure (form)
Fill, to
Find, to
Finger
Finger-nail
Fine
Finish, to
Finished, it 1s
Fir
Fire
Fire, to
Firm
Firmly
First (ordinal)
Fish
Fish, to
Fish-hook
dhu-shang-pa
ts’an-zuk
nyung ngarig
ngabchu
t’abmo choche; nolche
yib; zo
kang-che
t'obche (with dative of
finder)
dzug-gu
sen-mo
ts’ar chukche
chhom song
som-shing
mé
tu-bak gyapche
shrdante ; ts'uk
stanpo
go-ma
nya
nyd zumche
ny d-kuk
dhu-pa
ts’e’-pe ne’
re-ga ; la-la Shik
ngdabchu
t’ab-mo jhe’pa
yib; Su
kong-wa
nye’pa
S€r-mo
chha’ sen
ts'arpo ; le-mo
dub-pa ; ts'ar dze’-pa
dzok tsar song
som-shing
mé
p'dng-pa
sar-ten
tempo
ang-ki dhang-po
nya
nya ngon-pa
nyd-kuk
ar zr
ATR
FEY
AIA
RJAar
ATR
SE
NETH
NERA
SRA AFR
Fars
MRE
EA
ag Sa
EF §9
RESET
Re
5
SER
Li]
‘MOOH-HSTd ——HNTZ
‘AYVIAEVIOA NVILHEELL
reg a
ENGLISH.
LApaAkr1.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Fists, to hit with
Flag
Flame
Flat
Flea
Flee away, to
Floor
Flower
Fly, to (as a bird)
Fog
Follow, to
_ Food
Foot
For (you, it, &c.)
Ford, a
Forehead
Formerly
Fortress
Forward, to
Forward
Forget, to
mult’'uk gyapche
dar
méling
leb-mo
khyishik
shorche
shem
mantok
p’urche
mamun
ting-la ~~ dangche (with
genit.)
2d-che
kang-pa
pila
gal
shralwa
ngan-la
jong
kalche
shngan-la
t'uk yelche
mult uk gyakpa
dharchok
mélche
lep-lep
khyi-shik
dot-pa
ghima
mé-tok
pir-wa
mukpa
je-la chd’-pa (with genit.)
to-chhe ; Sen
kang-pa
chhairtu ; tonla
rab, shenkhd
opus TRE
ngar ; ngonchhe’
jong ; zum
dzang-pa
dong-la
Je'pa
9
4 4
2) 2) Nn
oR)
Co
a
*AUVIAIVOOA NVIHIILL
'LADIOI — MOTTIOH
Ee pm a ee lu hh h|-=H-
ENgLisH.
r—
LApAKI.
Found, have you
Fox
Free, is
Fresh
Friend
Frighten, to
Frightened, are
Frog
Frozen, is
Frost
Fruit
Fuel
Full
Further
Game (wild) |
Garden
Garlic
Gate
Gather, to
Gently
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTErARY TIBETAN.
khyid ¢ob-ba ?
hazé
Parkhan dw’
rok ; dzd-o
Jag-11 kilche
Jig-rak song
sbal-wa
pid song
kyak
dbs-bu
budshing ; burtse
gdng
par-la
riddks
ts’ds-po
sqok
stago ; qydsqo
rukche
gu-lé-la
khyo-kyt nye’-pa yimpa ?
wa-tsé
dhol y&’
sarpa
tok-pu ; dzé-o
Jig-ték tin-pa
ngang-tak yo’
bé-ap
khyak-rum jhung
se’ ; kyak-pa
shing-gi de-wa
argol
tem-tem
p’drtsam
riddk
ts’al
| gok-pa
gye-geo
ts’ok-pa
ka-le
%
TER
MN
SRI
| REARIARIR
REAR I=
Gd
ByRARg
RRNA
QANT
WEA
ARR) BNE
REET
2 SAAT
Er
IE
RENE
Aya
"AAVINAVIOA NVIAGIL
*ATINTD—LINTd
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Get it!
Get, to
Gift
Ginger
Girl
Give, me!
Give, to
Give!
Give it up !
Give up, to
Given, was
Glacier
Glad, I am
Glass
Go, to
Goat
Go away!
God
Going, I am
Going to, was
Goitre
a’ t'ob tong
t’obche
chhak-ten
Jjdsga
bomo
ngd-la tong
tangche
tong ; sal
spang tong
spangche
tangspen
gdng
nga t'ad duk
shel
chhd-che
’ »
ra-ma
lon song!
Gonchhok
ngd chhen
bd-wa ; wo-d
dhe khyer shok !
t’obpa
nang-kye
cha-ga
pu-mo ; menshar
ngd-la ter-roch !
ter-pa ; mangwa ; p'ulwa
(hon.)
10’ chik ; mang ro nang
tong chk!
pang-pa
ter-pa-yin
| ghangchen
ngdrang gats’or jhe
shel
do-wa ; gyu-wa
rd-t'ong (masc.) ; ra-ma
(fem.)
hé-la gyuk!
Kinchhoa
ngd do-gi-yin
tap (added to verb root)
ba-wa
GT
zr
-
N51 §5%
¥H
9%
CE JAY
$a PR
NRG "(to renounce).
AAT
CRAR AR WE
qx
RFR
ost
SACOM
CRF
a
‘AUAVINGVOOA NVIAAIL
*HYLION ~~ NIAID
DE iil
ExcLisH.
LApaxkr.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Go round, to
Gold
Good (well) that 1s
Good (virtuous)
Good (of things)
Goose
Got, I have
Govern, to
Government
Grandchild
Grass
Grasp at, to
Grave
Grease
Greasy
Great
Greedy
Green
Grieve over, to
Grind to, (corn, &ec.)
Grill, to
kor-kor chhdache
ser
de jak-bo
zang-ba ; gyalla
gydlla
hang-tse
ngd-la t'ob song
wdng cho-che
gyalshrid
memé 8 dwo
sa
warmo gyapche
dur
snum
numchan
chhenmo
mugéchan
ljang-khw
ts’erka gyépche
t’ akche
shrakche
kora gyap-pa
ser
dhe ya’po re’
Sang-po
yd'po ; gdndé
ngang-pa
nge tsar yo’
gYur-wa
gye’~si
kuts'a
tsa
parmo gyakpa
dur-khung
num
numise
chhempo
hampachen
ngo-jang ; jangku
duk-ngdl jhye’pa
t'd-pa
lam-pa
MRR
Hind : khub.
Qac Ey
RAE
CR’ xz WE
ge
Fry
EFF
3
SAFE
=
SA
INR
A
SATS
=F
STR IRT
AFT
NRA
AUVINIVIOA NVIHAIL
TTI == SVU
Tr i ae.G
for
ExaurisH,
LADpAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Groan, to
Groaning, is
Groom
Ground
Grow, to (of plants)
Grow bigger, to
Grown, has
Grumble, to
Guard, to
Guide, a
Had, you
Hail
Hair
Hair-plait
Hair-ribbon
Half
kong-shuk donche
khun gyap-duk
stadzi
sa
ldanche
chheru chhache
sket song
nyerche
shrungche
lamkhan
chhukar
tubdk
gqundé
smaén
khyorang-la yodspen
serwa
shré ; spu
chuty
shram-dut
?
pet
shuk-nar p'ungwa
shuk-nar gyak-ghin-re’
tadz
sa; sashe
bo-wa ; yd kye-pa
chhe kye-wa
bo jhung
dhang khempa
shung-pa ; ta-kor tang-pa
lamkhen
p'ungpa ; dzdma
ménda
qumdd
medzé
khyorang la yi'pa yin-na
serwa
td
changlo
pd-lo; tinghu
chhye'kd
LatErARY TIBETAN.
PFINERIF
PINE IARI
5E
Ay
pn
AE
RA] YET
F/T
*AYVINAVIOA NVIHILL
*ITVH —=HVIROD
{Hg
{BN
EE eal ama a 3 a la pe Iu -
ENGLISH.
LADAKTI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LitErRARY TIBETAN.
Hammer
Hand
Handful
Handle, the
Hang up, to
Happened, has
Hard
Haste, make
Hasten to, to
Hat
Hate, to
Hay
Head
Health, good
Heap up, to
Hear, to
Heard
Heart
Hearthstones
_ Heat
Heaven
t’0bis
lakpa
warmo
kapza
skar tangche; chhds la
borche
Yong song
shrante
ts’ ts'a tong !
ring-pa tangche
. zha ; zhwd
ghe-zdangche
sa-kdm ; stswaskdm
go
kham zang-po
| pung-che
ts’orche
ts’ orpen
nyingkhd
gyed-po
tsante
namkha
to-a
lakpa ; chhydk
par-ra
Yyu-wa
kar-wa
jhung jhe’
t’dkmo
ts’a-tak che shik
turte gyuk-pa
shdmo
shé dé-pa
tsa-kampo
go
kham sangwa
sak-pa ; pung shik-pa
nyem-pa ; t01-pa
nyen jhung
nying ; lo-sem
gyea-po
tsem-mo
namkhd
qa
NAA] ZA)
ams
AREER
9). SEE
SAA | ARR
Q
4
FET
gH
AT
RRS IES
a
BT
aq
37
‘AAVINGVIOA NVIIAIL
"NIAVIH-—ULVH
TT a uN Aa i i a a
ExgLisH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerARY TIBETAN.
Heavy
Heel
Help, to
Help him! .
Help (assistance)
Hen
Herb
Herd, a
Herdsmen
Here
Heron
Hew, to
Hide, a
Hide, to (anything)
Hide oneself, to
Hiding-place
High
Hill
Hill-spur
Hill-side
chinte
sting-pa
rdm tagche ; yddo choche
kho-la kydp tong !
kyap
Jhémo
ts'odma
khyw
sok-khan
wre
. kydr-mo
sakche ; zokche
ko-wa
gonte borche ; wdste borche
ipche
1psd
t’onpo
ri-t'ok ; ri-ga
ri-bok
gad ; ri-ngos
chi-bu ; jichen
tingpa
ro-ram jhye’pa ; kyong-
dhdl jhye'-pa
rdm-td nang
kyong-dhal
jhamo
ngo-tsd
khyw
dokpa
der ; dipa
39
Be zy
FSR IRA
Raa
SRA
gH
Za) §
5
“wi
AFFINE
‘XY4VINAVOOA NVIIIIL
‘FAIS-TIIH = TUTH
a — iy ina hi
a
ExcLisH.
Hit, to (with a missile)
‘Hold, to
Hold fast!
Hole, a
Hole (in clothes)
‘Hollow (in ground)
Home
‘Honest
‘Honey
‘Hope, to
Hoof ,
Horn
Horse
Horse-shoe
Horse-dung
Hot
House
House-rent
How?
How much ?
khyelche, p’okche
zumche
tanpo znm tong
bi-dng
shekpa
ldups
khangpa
ddngpo
© rdngst
lo-dang rakche
rago
rucho
sta
mikchak
stalbang
ts’ante
khangpea
khdng-la
ghazuk
chi tsam ?
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTErRARY TIBETAN.
idea BNE (ith A)
dzinpa ; ju-wa
tempo par zim !
khung ; bhuga
te-khung
bubh
khyim ; mang
ts’eden
rangtst
lo-deng dzvnpa
td ; chhip (hon.)
dhdkha
ta-yr bang
ts'em-mo ; ts'd-po
khang-pa ; dim pa; nang
ndi-ld
ghdndé ARRAN
ghdts’v ; ghdtsam
REF
ABFA] AERA
AHF THRAEY
R=
SAE
Br
RE
FFT
x q
*AYVINGVOOA NVIHILL
"HOON MOH=-—IOOH
a ii
Eg
RR
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LitEraRY TIBETAN.
Hunger
Hungry, I am
Hunt, to
Husband
Ice
111, to fall
IIL I am
Illness, an
Image (idol)
w
Immediately
Important
Impure (religious sense)
Impure (of milk, &e.)
Incense
Including (prep.)
Increase, to (intr. v.)
Increase, to (fr. v.)
tokrs
nga tokri rak
ngonche
hyd ; Gh
dar
ndd yongche
ngd-la ndd yong or ngd-la
nadchan yong duk
nad
skunda
mdt'ok-ts'e ; ddksa
khakchen
ts’i-du
sokpo
kundurw
| t&un-na
bur-che
ndn-che -
tokpa ; téi-pa (hon.)
ngdrang-la tév'pa ; tok-gi
yin
khyira gyakpa
gdrok ; khyo-po
khy&-rum ; chhaprom
ne’kyi gyakpa (lit., tothrow
by illness)
ngdrang ne’kyi gyap jhung
ne’ ; ndts'a
kuten, kuts'ab
t'el-tel la; tap-te
to-gal ; khochen TAA;
kyuk-dho
hle'chen ; ma dhak
1 poi, dukpot
ts’ iin-la
| plel-wa
non-pa ; non jhe-pa
MAE
CREAMS
Esa
FRIFN F
BIN
SR HARRI
CREST
r
| aR] AES
FE
| FNS
Q=ARA appr Sev
| REA
| WT; INF
*X4V104V00A NVLALIL
HSVANONI == SST NTTL
Ha ip pu -
a a a tn S—
Le
Be er am oe A en A
REET ==
ExNcGrisH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTErARY TIBETAN.
India
Indian (Hindu)
Inform, to
Information
Injury
Injure, to
Ink
Ink-pot
Inn
Inquire, to
Insects
Inside
Instead of
Intend, to
Intention
Interference
Interpreter
Intestines
Intoxicated
Mon-yul
mon
hun tangche
hun
nod-khen
duk-ngdl tangche
che-sndk
siril or ndk-kong
ts'ug-khdng
di-che
bu-tsik
khog-ma
ts’ab-la
chhd-dukche (to be going
to)
kobta
kha t'al-khen
Gya-ghar
monpa
lon Serwa
lon a
no’ -pa
dukpo terwa
nak-ts'a
nak-pum
ndts'dng
§hip-chhd jhye’-pa (Hind.
darydft karna)
shik
bug-na ; khongla
ts’dp-la
do’-pa
sam=jor
kha jukpa
ke’-pa
gyu-ma ; nang-rol
rd-ro-chen
JA
aR zr
RYT
ar
al
ART
Tre
£5
x5 J
FRA] RAJA
QE; SHRAE
RARE
SYA) AER
AR
Xa
‘AYVINAVIOA NVIELIIL
'AALVIIXOLNI == ATIADNI
a Gi
ET Lt ES A LTR NRE NR SS a i a i a i Siu]
Excriss.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Invite, to
Iron (adj.)
Irritate, to
Itch
Ivory
Jackal
Jackdaw
Jar (clay soraz)
JESUS
Jewel
Join, to (fr. v.)
Joke
Journey
Joyful
Juice
Jump, to
Juniper-tree
Keep, to (retain)
Kettle
chdn rang-che
chék
gopnon tangche
za-bun
bdso
khyi-chdng
norbu
zarche
khd-shdk
lam
gé-mo
si
chhong-che
spdma
strung-ohe
plandil
chenden-pa
chdk (precedes noun)
nydm lempa ; nydm dru-
wa
8a-kong
bhaso
wa-chang
chung-kd
dzdma
Ye-shu
| Rorbhu
dik-pa
khé-sha
chhong-wa
Shuk-pa
kyong-wa
84ng- bu ; khok-tu
FRAT
FN
FHNAT
HE |
xr |
a
FT
Ea
wg
3g
34) Fr
FIN] gar
oy
FREE] FRA
E
NECN
§=3) }ET
CNT
‘AYVINIVOOA NVIAGIL
WILLA = THMEL
ES
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Key
Khatmandu (in Nipal)
Kick, to
Kick, a
Kill, to
Killed, are
Kind (sort)
Kindle, to
King
Kiss, a
Kitchen
Knife
Knot, a
Know, to
Know, will
Kunawar
Ladder
Lady
Lady, young
Lake
ku-lk (In Balti: le-mik)
dog-chong gyap-che
dog-chong
sdd tangche
sdd song
nd-so
duk-che
gydl-po
u
t'dab-ts’ang
di; dr
dudpa
she-che
she’ in
Khuanu
sher-ka
shéma
shem-chhung
chho
de-mik ; demak
on
Kho-bhom R AX’
tokt’o p'ulwa ; dung-gyak
Shu-wa
t a-shak
s6’-pa ; sok ché’pa
se’ jhung
rik ; dhdi TA
bar-wa
gydl-po (often gye’po)
kha-zor
sol-khang ; yo'-khdng
ti; ki-chhung
dii’-pa
shei-pa
she-yong
Khunu
kenza ; te-ka
lhacham
cham-chhung
ts’o
FET
MRE
Sw
RY ARRIW ES
RIFT
NR
85) XFrRss
s¥s
$= q
Ff
a
ARERR] AMSA
ay
NRA
po
NERS
Ed
NT
55] EN
INE
NE
‘AYVINEVI0A NVIFGLL
"AQVT—— NTHOLIX
ui HET ————
ee SB a i a
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTeErRARY TIBETAN.
Lake, salt
Lama, Grand
Lama, head (of larger
monasteries)
Lamb :
Lame
Lamed (he is)
Lamp, lantern
Lamp-wick
Land
Landlord
Landslip
Language, a
Large
Lark
Last (adj.)—latest
Last, the
Last, at
Last, to
Last-night
Last year
Late, (you) are
chhaka
Gyalwa Rimbochhe
khan-po
zha-wo cho duk
zum-ting
blang-pon
sa-rud
spé-ra
chhe-wa
ché-chir
t’dma
p'imo
37
t'a na
ts’o-che ; dukche
kha-ts’ an
nd-ning
gorte duk
ts’aka
Gye-wa Rimpochhe
khempo
lugu
§ha-wo
khong-ril jhung or kang-
dum jhung
ong-ku, gongshu
dong-kang ; ong-re
sa-ehha
nai-bo
sa-ri’
ke’ ; kha
chhempo
chokma
ting-juk
angky jema ; angki-juksho’
tar; juk-la
shu-pa
ddng-ts’en
khd-ning
gor song ; gyang jhe’ yo’
NRE
xT
gr
ET
IN Ka-gyur. § Mdo
; XXI1X.
SS!
TR ARE
ras
2h)
AFH
FA
EESEAT
Ng | NEAR
NREA"
*A4VINAVIOA NVIHEIL
"HLV T= qYOTANV'I
SE —————————
EE Ee
ExcGLisH.
Late (it is)
Laugh, to
Law, a
Lawsuit
Lazy
Lead (metal)
Lead, to
Leaf
Lean (on), to
Leap, to
Learn, to
Learned
Leather
Leather-strap
Leave, to (a thing)
Leech,
Left it, he
Left, to the
Left, has been
Leg
LApAKI.
pmo song
god-che
t’ims
shag ; t'vm-dzing
le-shol
rdnye
hrid-che
loma
nye-che (with la)
chhong-che
khaspa
ko-wa
rok-bu
lus chuk-che
tak-t'ung-bu
lus chuk song
yon nd
luspen
skang-pa
skyin tsalche ; skyin cho-che
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
p’imo yong
ke’mo ghe’pa; 9o’-pa
ka-t'im
t'im-shak
le-lo
Shdanye
t'i-pa
loma
nye-wa (with la)
chhong-wa
l6b-pa
khe-pa
ko-wa
ko-t'dk ; ko-rok
yuk-shak-pa
pii-po ; shrimpa
yuk-8hak song ; luv jhya
song
yon-ngo ld
yuk-8hdk dw’ ; lui-pa-re’
kang-pa
kyin nang-wa ; kyin jhepa
LirerArY TIBBTAN.
a
RNA
RNAS
AH
§y
BRE
aay
¥T
NECA
Saar
NRA
ma
Far
eri
Fay
RTE
REY
INF
wr
Free
NVIAILL
‘AYVINGVOOA
"ANH T= NIVI'Y
mm i i i —————————————
a
ExGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Let, to (permit)
Let down, to
Letter (epistle)
Lid
Lie, a
Lie down, to
Lift up, to
Light (subst.)
Light (not dark), it is
Light, to (kindle)
Light (in weight)
Lightning
Like (prep.)
Line, a
Lips
Listen!
Little
Little, a
Live, to (dwell)
Living, is he
Lizard
tang-che
p’dbche
yige
kha-kyep
shab-shob
nyal-che
tag-che
od ; otchan
nam t'ang duk
me dukche
yang mo
skam~hlok
zuk ; ts'okse
t'ik
khalpak
nyan tang !
nyung-ngu ; zd-zhik
nyung-nga rig ; ts'abik
dadche
sonte yin-nam ?
gakchik ; tang malala-tse
chuk-pa
t’eng-la nang-wa
chhak-dh:
khda-khep
dziin
nye-wa
seng-wa
wo’ -to
tang karpo re’
par chukpa
yang-mo, gangke
log-ka
dre; dandd-la
tik
chhu-t’o
nyen chk !
chhung-wa
tiktse chik ; éncham
né-pa, de’-pa
sonte yo'dhd ?
dhi-jhyi
RA] ZEA
RAR
ES
3A
AT
| FRAETE
WEE
3RT
FJ] AW
RAE
353
oa
IRENA
Tava) BRE
REE
SFR
*AUVINIVIOA NVIHAIL
‘AYVZIT=-—LHOIT
i S.A TTI | |
a
ENGLISH, LApaxr. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErRARY TIBETAN.
Load, a khal ; khur-ru khurbu ; khal AN [RA] al
Load, to (a gun) kongche dze gyang-pa
Loan skyin-po kar-kyin 35 a
Locket (charm-box) shrung-bu sung-bu ; gd "py"
3 ga-wo
i
Lodgings ddng-sd nd-ts’ ang QRH
Loiter, to gorche gor-wa RAR
. ~~
Long rNg-mo ring-po [RT
Look, to stdche | mk td-wa FI
proved v v
Loose lod-po the’ -Iho’ ; yang-hlup 3 a
Loosen, to | tol-che dol-wa RFA
mye er
Lose, to stor chuk-che lak-pa a9 g NN J
Loss, to suffer
Loss, a
Lost, is
Love, to
Lower down
Low ground
Lucky
Lynx
gun p’ok-che
gun, got-ma
stor yin
ydshd cho-che
man-chhad
smad sd ; mamo
sodéchan
yi ori
ghd’la do-wa ; pdm do-wa
ghii’ ; ghd’-ka
lak song ; me’-pa la song
dzd-o jhye’pa
men la ; mar la
men sd
tashi-chen
yi
nyompa jhung
ARIA
ARE
FX
FANE
HR
¢08
‘AUVINAGVOO0A NVIEAIL
‘AVI == HT S80'T
Hi
RT et Ep NSU OR SE ES —
oS
LT Te
Co
<<
ENGLisH.
Maidservant
Maitreya (the coming
Buddha)
Make, to
Man
Many
Map
Market-place
Marry, to
Master
Meaning, the
Means
Measure, to (length)
Measure it! (grain, &c.)
Meat
Meddle with, to
Meditate, to (religiously)
Meditation
Meet to
Mend, to
Merchandize
LADAKI.
yok-mo
Byampa
choche
MaAngpo
zing-kod
zok-krom
bhakston cho-che ; * dns
khur-che
| déakpo
don
t’ abs
ts’od zumche
shor tong
sha
drésche (with dang pre-
ceding)
sam-lo tangche
sgom ; semgom
t'ukche
lon-pa gydbche
ts’ong chhalak
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArRY TIBETAN.
shetdma
Jham-pa
Jhye’-pa (pr. chyipa); so-
wa
mi; men: mindd
mang-po ; dima
sa-t’a
tom
khyo-shuk jhung-wa ;
* chhungrok lenpa
pan-po
dhon
t'dab
ts'e’ jalwa
sher gyop
shi
dei-pa (with dhang)
tuk gom-pa
sam-ten ; teng-ngendzin
Jal-v'e’ ghye’pa
lhempa gyakpa
ts’ong-z0k
qs
REZ
3x zr
3
NE
St
Br
* spoken only of a man
taking a wife.
RFE
5
JIN] HIS
RENT
TARE
a
ajar
NN
AH
AFT
a
NVILIIIL
AYVIAGVIOA
"HZIANVHIY IN — DNINVIER
vii
Tm a ma i ES re.
ae
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LITERARY TIBETAN.
Merciful
Message
Messenger
Middle, the
Middle of, in the
Midnight
Midst, in the
Milk
Milk-vessel or bowl
Millet
Miry—boggy
Mischief
Miserable, to be
Mist
Mistake
Mistaken, (you) are
Monastery
Money
Mongol
Monkey
Month
nying-je-chen
prin; hun
hun khyer-khan
us; gung
qung-la
ts’an-p’ét
zhung-la
oma
0-20; o-skyan
tse-tse
| damts’ ok
| kagma
|
duk-ngal rakche
\ khug-nd ; rlangspa
nor-t’rul
tul-pen
gomba
hmui ; nak
Sokpo
shri; spryu-mo
lda-wa
nying-je-chen
pin-kur
mi-nd
kyil-tu
nam-ghung
Eong-su ; bug-la
woma
~ 7 JY
Wo-no
t'e-tse
dam-dzap ; dam-pak
kyon
duk-ngdl §irwa
mu’ -pa ; humpo
nor-t’ul
sem t'ul jhung ; t'ul-pa-re’
gompa
nd-kyang
Sokpo
te-ii ; shtrégo
ddwa
SE 5 5
25
iy
Sg
SR 3
AFIS
RRsry| gamer
CI
-
2
RINE
wT
saga
mara
RENE
RENER
ST zr
hl
-
. v
‘AIVINAVOOA NVIHEGILL
AUIN
‘HINORK
HH N
i a set Ee 1 i
A A SL TAA Rg
CC SER fi
ENGLISH.
Moon
More (some)
More than
Morning, in the
Morning, this
Morrow, to-
Most
Mostly
Moth
Mother
Mount, to
Mountain
Mountain-spur
Mountain-side
Moustache
Mouth
Move, to (a thing)
Move away, to (intrans.)
Moved, it has
Much
Mud
LADAKI.
lza
mang-ngd mang-ngd
t'okne (tognas) ; sang t'os
ngd-mo
dd-nang
t’ore
mang-chhé
mang-ngd
mung-ma
d-mda ; yum
zhonche
r1-ga
gang-khul
ri-ngok
kha ; kha-po
strulche
gulche ; nurche
gul-song
mang-nga
ka-ldk ; mer-mer
CENTRAL, TIBETAN.
dd-wa
yang-kydr ; dhdrung
lhak (with ablat :)
ndng-mo ; §ho-ge
dhd-rang §ho-ge
sang-nyin
mang-sho
p'dlchher
muk-dang
md ; yum (hon.)
§hinpa ; chhip-pa (hon.)
7
7’
gang
ghdd ; gdang-kha
yartsom ; Shalgyen (hon.)
Khi ; khd-tsul [AREA
yo-wa
qul-wa
kya’ jhung ; gul jhung
mang-po
nyokma
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
ral)
3x
JE
35 xT
THREE
NES
Fg
| WS
Rl Gx
AM
bid
NEE
REXEL
‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAILL
INNO
‘dnl
a Ll i i a a i a ——
EE ———
CE
pr
ENcrLisH.
LiApAxkI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN,
Mule
Mushroom
Mustard
Nail
Naked
Name
Named, to be
Narrow |
Near (prep.)
Near (adv.)
Necessary, it is
Neck
Neck-kerchief
Needle
Neglect, don’t
Net
Never
New
News
dyw ; driu
moksha
nyungskar
zer
cher-nydal ; chergok
ming
mang tagche
zheng-chhungse
ldén-la
nYE-1mo
qo-she yin
skye ; Jingpa
khdshre
khabrul
shol ma tob!
dol
namsang ma
soma
hun
tre-p’o ; tolok
shdamo
pe-king
seru
MAT-TUNG-PA
mang
mang-la tag-pa
tokpo ; p’dlmé
tsar
tsdndv; ta nyé-po
goi-gyu yi’ ; kho-che’ re’
kyé
koktt
ts’em-khab
qying ma nang
dhol
See pages : 69, 95
sarpa
lim
25
=
=
5
=
=
Z
Z
<
Qo
SS
b>
oI
od
=
>
=
4
‘4IadNyg —RNooy
a Ee
”
a
ER R
AA
EE
ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN.
Rule tims tim RAT
Rumour loplo Ser-ri; Ser-ke’ T/A
Run, to gyukche qyuk-pa ; gyuk-shd 15’pa J iad
Run away, to
Runner, a
Run out, to (of water)
Rupee
Saddle, a
Saddle, to
Safe
Salt
Salty
Same, the very
Sand
Satisfied
Save, to
Saviour
Savoury
Saw, a
Saw, to
shorche ; shorte chhache
gyuk-khan
dzak-che
gurmo
stdsga
stdsga takche
ts'dchan
de-rang
bé-ma
dhang-chen
kyapche
kyap-gon
zhimpo
gya-sok
gyd-sok shrulche
“tr == .
dot-pa QIN d
kyu-po
dol-wa
chhi-gor ; gyd-tam
td-ga
gd §hdkpa
sdrten
ts’d
ts'dchen
dhe-rang
Jhé-ma
ts’im-ts’im
kyong-wa
kyap-gon
dante
sok-le
sok-1é dek-pa
RET
BEE
Fy
4
& 3 3
Fy
IRE
SINHA
ANd] ARRY’
CE
*AMVINGVOOA NVIAGLL
‘MVS HAVE
ON VR
ee et
a
EE we
SESE LS
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Say, to
Said, he
Says, he
Say, will
Scales, pair of
Scatter, to
School
Scissors
Scorched
Scrape, to
Sea
Seal, to
Search for it!
Sedan-chair
See, go and
See, to
See, will
Seed
Seen, have
Seize, to
tah
zerche ; molche
zer song
zer duk
zer'in ; lab-bin
shrang
tamche
lob-khang
chhan-pa
rddche
gyats’o
dém-khd gydpche
ts’al tong !
gyok-chyang
song-la tos
t’ongche ; stache
t'ongin
brudok
t’ong-pen ; staspen
zumche ; 'amche
Serwa ; sungwa a | MYR
—
sung-wa yin 8 _
Ser; sung-gi-duw’
~ od - . .
Ser-qyu yo 2X a WN
No
tula
tor-wa ; torné gyap-pa THR
lob-dd ; lap-td NEE)
4
chemise ; dimise AFA
pe ene
se-8hop-pé NGS
de’pa a5
27.9 v ~s
gydts'o ND
ddmkha gyakpa ; tétse
gydkpa
ts’al ghyi sik! tsa-cho’ FRTR FAT
jhyt shik
p'ep-chyang ERAT REE
toi-shok FGA
t’ ongwa A
t'ong-gyu-yin ; mik td yong
~~ v
sabon N [4
t'ong-jhung
su t'op gyap-pa; nampa | AEF
8E¢
*XYVIAGVI0A NVLHALILL
‘HZIZS—— VAS
RGR
4
4
EJ
BRR SE SS (SH TE 3 he aT HE
ENGLISH,
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArRY TIBETAN.
Sell, to
Send, to
Send for, to
Send, word !
Sent, was
Sent, will be
Separate, to
Servant
Set out, to
Sew, to
Shake, to
Share
Sharp
Shave, to
Sheep
Sheep, flock of
Sheep-skin
Shelter (any)
Shoot, to
Short
Short cut, a
ts’ongche
kélche
boche
in tong !
khél-song ; kalpen
kallin
gdrte borche
kholpo ; kholmo
chhdche ; Tyotche
ts’emche
shrukche ; gulche
go-kal
nonpo
brekche
luk
luk-khyu
luk-lok
skyip
p’angche
t'ungse ; Yungan
t'ung-lam
ts’ong-wa
dzang-wa ; kur-wa ; tangpa
guk-pa
t'in ting!
tang-pa re’ ; dzang dw
tang-qyu yin
ghye’-pa ; kha telwa
§hdl-tapa, ; She-tama
dul-wa
is’empa
zob-20p jhe-pa
go-kal ; goké
nompo
§har-wa
luk
luk-khyu
Tuk-pdk
yap-sd ; gyam
p'empa ; menda gyap-pa
Pung-ngu
gyok-lam
REET
ah
RERET
SES
SS
Azar
HR
AERA
RANE
oye
*AUVIAGYDOA NVIFILL
‘LAO LIOHS-—AAVHS
Yap VAR ae 1 Ve
RD A
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArRY TIBETAN.
Shoulder
Shout out, to
Shovel
Shut, to
Sick, I am—he is—
Side, the
Side of, on the
Sight, in
Sikkim
Silent
Silver
Sin
Sin, to be cleansed from
Sinful
Sink, to
Sinner
Sir
Sister
Sister, elder
Sit, to
bisra tangche
khyem
kagche
ndd-kyi zir duk
ldo
deb-la
tong khor-la
Das-jong
chhem-chhem
mul
dikpa
dikpa salche
dikchan
horche
dikpa-po
Sab; d-jo
shringmo
a-she
dadche (impera. dod.) or
dukche
t'rakpa
boi-da gyakpa ; ke’tangpa
khyem
kak-pa ; ts'umpa
(nga-la, kho-la) nd-ts’d
gyak-ght yi’
ne '.
lo; $ho FN" (hon.)
der-la
t'ong khor-la
Dénjong
chhem-mer
ngul
dikpa
dikpa salwa—jang-pa
dik chen
nerwa
dikpo ; me dikchen
kusho ; tha
stngmo
a-chhe
khar-wa ; de’-pa
er
YI
al
RAFAT
ZasyAgE
)
mpg
2
2
RGNERSr
RA
a
Bers
Rage
Te
1S
3A] RIS
EF
WE
x
)
NH) I
n
$Y
ot
a
ere
}
i i Sl EN I ET,
*A9VINGVOOA NVLHEILL
LNATIS
“LIS
eve
ENGLISH.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Size
Sleep, to
Slip down, to
Slipping, I am
Slope, a
Slowly
Smell, a
Smell, to
Smoke
Snake
Snow
Snow-storm
So, (i. e., “like that”)
Soap
Soft
Softly
Some (adj. § pron.)
Somebody
Something
Son
Song
ts’éd
nyid-la chdche
ded-de gyelche
ded-de shor duk
ngok
gul-gul
dry
ar snumche
dudpa
rul ; sbrul
khé
khad-ts’up
a’zuk
sabon
bolmo
guléla ; s@dmsum
re-sqd
chigchik
cha-tong
bu-tsd ; shras
lu
chhe-chhung khye
nyt-lokpa
shorné gyel-wa
de’-ték shor-ghi yin
ghad ; khad-pa
ngang-ghy ; gor-po
t
tr nom-pa
tu-d ; dhii’pa
dul
khau-d
ghang-ts'ub
dhende
shukpa ; lang-le’
bolpo
ghale ; samsum
khd-she
la-la Shik ; su-Shik
chi Shik
bhu ; se-bhu
lu; lu-yang
BY
pp
= 3) RIA q
ARF TGR AFR
ERA
qu
x
Sa
sw
=
RN] FR
R&S
CINCY
RENE
RNRTR | AFR’
SE
J] AW
ql
~~
*AYVINGVOOA NVILHEIIL
‘ONOS — MONS
)
lu
— so"
eh i ONAL Td Le TS
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArRY TIBETAN.
Sorry for, to be
Sort, what
Soul
Sound
Speak, to
Speak of, to (mention)
Spoilt, is
Sportsman
Squeeze it !
Stand up, to
Stag (Cervus Thoroldr)
Steep
Step (of ladder)
Stick, a
Stick, to (of a cart, &c.)
Stone
Stomach
Stop, to
Straight (adj.)
Straight (adv.)
Strayed, has
dukngdal yodche
che nats’ ok
nam-shes
ra
zerche
zhodche
khakpo song
khyi-ra-khan
cher cher tong!
lang-te dadche
sha-wa-ru-lep
zdng-zong
shral-dang
berka
jarche
do-wa ; do-it
dodpa
kagche
dang-po
kyang-kyang
yan song
sem dukpa
ghang rik
sem-nyi ; nam-sher
da-ke’
lap-pa
jo’ pa
sang 9 hung
khyi-ra-pa
lem-né cher
[wa.
lang-né do-pa ; kyére sheng-
shau-a-ru-chu
sarpo
te-ka ; t’emso
yukpa
kharwa
do
to-ko; dhi’pa
kik-pa
dong-po ; shrangpo
t'é-kang-la ; kha-du
yar song
NFAT
3wg
PRN] MN
5
=2T
5 zy
SAI
ATE
ATZAE
NRE
NRy
3X
ARYA
3
35 <4
RIS
RT
AUAVINIVIOA NVIHILL
PVILS
"THAVULS
i a aI ET
faba
ExcGrisH.
LADAEKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LaTErRARY TIBETAN.
Strong
Stupid
Stupid-fellow
Such as this
Suddenly
Suffer, to
Substitute, a (Hind. badl?)
Sugar
Sun
Support, to
Sure
Surface, on the
Swallow, to
Sweep, to
Sweet
Sweets
Swim, to
Sword
Syllable
Syphilis
rempa ; remrem
len-nak
bong-gqutsok
1-2ug-g¢ (before noun)
hurpo
sir-che ;
ts’aps
guram
nYi-ma ; nYoma
kyarche
tanpo
kha-la
smidche
chhakdar gyapche
ngarmo
zhamazak
kydl gyapche
ral-gye
ts’ekwar
parang nad
shegchen ; $he’-mo
lempa
hliimpo
dinddwe (before object)
har-ghyi ; tap-tap-la
Sir-wa ; narwa
ts’dp-po
chéma-kara
nyi-ma
kyong-wa
t’dkchho
khd-t ok-la
khyur m?’-pa
chhakdar gyakpa
nYarpo
Shim-8him
kyal gyak-pa
ra-gyt
ts’eqbhar
rekduk ; khulu
A535
| 5 ar
FA
Hay
RANA
ET
_—-
Sar
Ea
ga ES
FRI
NE
AEN
I
XA
Aaya
‘AUVINAVDOA NVIFIIL
‘STTIHd AS ~~ LI0dd As
A RE HS Teste 4
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTerArY TIBETAN.
Table
Tail
Tailor
Take away, to
Take away
Take, to
Take off (clothes, &c.), to
Take out!
Take out from, to
Talk (subst.)
Tall
Taste (flavour)
Tax
Tea
Tea-pot
Teach, to
Teacher
Tear up, to
Tell, to
Temple
Tent
choktsé ; sol-stak
shngama
ts'empa ; ts’emkhan
khyerche
khur khyer !
kyelche
p’udche!
p’ings tong
tonche
spéra
go-ring
dob-lak
pya-t'ang
ja
tibril
lab-tangche
lab khan
shralche
shadche
Lha-khang
qur
sol-chok ; t oktse
ngdma ; Shu-gi
ts’empa
khur do-wa
khur song !
kyalwa
pipe AYNE
yung song !
|
|
|
jo'pa ; lap-chha
ringpo ; jong-jong
dho-wa
pya-t’al
ghd ; so’-jha
ghambing ¢ khok-t':
lob-pa
lo-pon
hralpa
she’pa ; tam Serwa
lha-khang
da-ghur
FE
Ear
INA
aE
SN
qa
23
Far
THN] SA
olay
Sar
5s
agar
HA
TRE
r
*AMVINAVOOA NVLULLL
i Re... = i }
ATM We Hg (PANTY Lf ORB TIL 11 EVAR A
po RE
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
Tent-pole
Terrific deity
Than
Thank-you much
Thank, to
Then
Thick
Thick (of fluids, &c.)
Thickness, the
Thief
Thigh
Thin
i |
© Thin (of fluids, mist, &e.)
Thing |
Think, to (imagine)
Think about, to
Thirsty, I am
Throat
Throw, to
Throw away, to
Thumb
gur-ber
dak shed
simg (following word gov-
erned)
kd-din chhe!
tang-rak p’ulche
de-la ; de-ts’e-la
TOMPO
skante
shrapt'uk
skunma
lisha
| shrdp-mo
sing-sing ; linte
| chha-lak
| sdmche
| sam-lo tangche
| ngd-la skom-ri rik
par
| gyapche ; tibche
| p’angche ; drimche
|" t’é-bong
ghur-shing
jik-jhe thi; Th t o-wo
le (ditto)
£u’-je-chhe ! kd-din-chhe !
lésol p’ulwa
dhe-tsa-na
bompo
gdrpo ; mongpo (of mist)
sap-t'uk
kiimpo ; kium-ma
vlad
t’d-mo ; simbhu
STM-SVM ; SENGPO
chhi-la; chha-kha
nyampa ; mik-la tangpa
sam-lo tangpa
ngdrang-la kom yo
wokma
yuk-pa ; gyak-pa
bhor-wa ; yung-wa
t'ebbo ; t'ebchhen
aka
BE
AN] J
MARRY
RR] Rar
RA
ge
SRG
M AN
SE
NR
(=
x
RRR
Chl
Aas
53] ARNE
AREA] RARE
NA
*ANVTIAIVIOA NVLHILL
HHIHL
*HWAHL
TE _ = " |
I ay.
I TRA vay YUP TTT O hh.
Tg TE By
ENGLISH.
LIADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
Literary TIBETAN.
Thunder
Thus (like this)
Tibet
Tibetan, a
Tibetan tongue
Tie, to
Tight
Time (period)
Time, the (for anything)
Tinder
Tired, are you
Tobacco-pipe
To-day
Toes, the
Tongue
Too; too much
Tooth
Torn, has been
Touch, to
Touch, don’t
Towards
bruk ; bluk
v-2uk
Bodyul
Bod-ma
Bodkad ; Bot
chhingche
£ angmo
dus ; yun
skabs
tsa
khyod-la ngdl song ?
gang zk
di-ring ; alta
kangsor
leche
mang-drak
shral-song
nywkche ; t'wkche
ma tuk!
gan-du
dug-ke’
finda RNRIA
Bhi’ -yil (Po’-yil)
Bhi’pa (Pipa) ; Pi’ky: ma
Bhi’-ke’
khyik-pa
t'ang-t’ang
dhii ; dhue
ren 2; kap
shrd-wa
khyorang tang chhe’po re’
ghang-§ak
dhe-ring
kangsor
che ; ja (hon).
hachang ; drakne
so; ts'em (hon).
ral jhung ; zhik jhung
nyukpa ; chhang-pa
ma chhang ; ma wyuk !
te’-la
AZTHY
RYE
Fryar
Ra
FHS
RARE
RN
ST
5
BR ENgRES
*XUVINAVOOA NVIZELL
*SAYVMOI — dIILL
a A 50 A A HRs MA
RMA ge
ES
ENGLISH.
LADAKT.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTErARY TIBETAN.
Town
Trade, to
Trafficker
Translate, to
Translation
Transmigration
Trap
Tree
Trial of, to make
Trousers
True
Truth
Try, to (endeavour)
Turn, to (to right, left,
&e.)
Turn over, to (wood, &c.)
Turn round, to (wheel, &c.)
Turn-by-turn
Umbrella
Unable, is
Under
gyal-sa
zong qyapche
khe-pa
kad p’abche
qYUrwe
khor-lam
dem ; nyvng-ngu
shing
ts’od stache
dorma ; kangsndm
rdenpa
denpa
badche
chhyokche
bubche
korche
’
rémos chos la
chhar-rib
mi nyan duk
yok-la
dhong-khyer
ts'ong gyakpa
khe-ts’ong-pa
da p’abpa
qyurwa
khor-wa
nyt ; gal dong)
shing (tree-trunk: shing-
ts’’ lenpa
dhorma
dempa ; 1go-0
dempa ; nge-pa
dhondhu nyerpa ; tson-dus
jhe’pa
kyokpa
pub-pa ; lok-pa
kor jhe-'pa ; kor gyappa
ts'irla ; ts'vr ts'ir
wu-d
chok ma re’ ; chokpa me’
wok-la ; kha-wak
TES
Ear
QRF Ar
CR
Ras
1 ay
jar
RFR
x5
“ART
SRR
*AUVIAIVOOA NVIEIIL
I i Oe
BB
b
ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN.
oP -.
hd-go-che ¢-la zin-pa ; hd-gho-wa | J] q
EY
Understand, to
Unfinished t'é-rel ma ts’ang-ma
va
Unroll, to tolche lok til-wa
Unripe jenpa ma ts’oschen
tukpa ; pen
Sl
Until ts’ ukpa
a
t'ukpa ; kam-la
*XYVIQIVO0A NVIHIIL
Up to ts'ukpa
Upon kha-tod-la ; teng-na tang-la
Upper, the gyenchhad yagi; t0’-ky
Upward, Up (adv.) gyen-la ; yar-la gyen-la ; yar
Urge on, to nanche be’ -pa
Useful
Useless, it 1s
Use, to
Usual
Usually
Vacant (untenanted)
Valley
Valuable
Very
Vexod, to be
p’andoks
chhon-la duk
lob-khyad choche
p’alpe (before noun)
mangché
stong
lungpa
konmo
zhe-sun rakche
| plen-t’o
dhon-me’ re’
chyd’-pa ; kyel-wa
tal; tinmong
chyi-la ; tin-chywr
yempa
lungpa
kompa
hdchang (preceding adj.)
or t'dk-chho (after it)
gongpa ts'wmpa
JF
SCEAC,
Sh) Zr
A
gr
QRZ
SUEY Zr
Hy
SHRM ENA
Tadasn
‘TAXHTA
cp
1
ov
ENGLISH.
LADAKI.
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiterARY TIBETAN.
Victorious, to be
Village
Virgin
Vomit, to
Wages
Walk, to
Walk, to take a
Wall
Want, I
Wanted, not
Want to (would like to)
War
Warm one’self, to
Warm
Wash, to
Watch, a
Watch, to keep
Water
Water-tub
gyalche
yults’o ; yul
zhon-numa
kyukche
p'oks ; la-cha
dulche
gom tangche
sik-pa
ngd-la gos
kho-che met
t'ad (following other verb)
rmak-hruk
lde-che
don-mo
tuche
qukte dadche
chhu
chhu-zem
gye-wa
dhong-qu
pumo sarpa ; ménshdr
kyuk-pa
| plok
dulwa
ghom dowa
tsikpa ; bharkya
ngdrang-la kho-jhe yo’
mingo
ga-ki-dw’ (ditto)
mdk-t’ ap
de-wa
dhion-mo
t'ui-pa
chhuts’o’ khorlo
shrung-wa ; sorang jhe’'pa
chhu ; chhap (hon.)
chhu-shong
Sg
TR
TRF
Tr
RIE
A EAR
Xr
RRRFAr
x SA Jw 5
SFR IFAT
SRETRST
7
X%
ag
FERRER
wa
~
No
098
*AYVINIVOOA NVIHGLL
AAL~dILVM = LNVM
19€
cc 2 arr
aE IIIT.
y —
ExGrisH.
Way, the
Way of doing
Way, to open a
Weak (of soup, wine)
Weak
Wear, to
Wear out, to
Weary, to feel
Wearied of, am
Weary, to
Weigh, to
Weight, the
Well, a
Well (properly)
Well! very
West, the
Wet
What
Wheat
Wheel
lam
shul
skabs borche
sing ; lante
shedchhung
gonche
gokpo choche
sunna rakche
sunna rak song
ngal chukche
chalche
shrang ts’ad
khronpa
lak-mo ; nmantdn
dik dik!
nup
rlanchan
cha ?
dro
khorlo
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
lam
t'ab ; tsil
t’ab jhye’-pa
FT
la-po N A
she-chhung ; kyar-ra-kyor-
re
ghon-pa
—
sen-pa
siim-po §irwa
sem sin jhung
AR
FREE
QZIER
aya
REY zr
TE
Jz
siin-jhe’pa
shrang-la jalwa ; tulad tek-
pe
shrang-ts'o ; dek-kha
chhu-mik
le-mo
yd’po !
nup
sherpo ; sher
ghang ?
dho
khorlo
RQ Sa
LITERARY TIBETAN.
‘AAVINIVOOA NVILALILL
THHHM — X4VEM
AC —————————————— i
pr
ExGLisH.
LADAEKT,
CENTRAL TIBETAN.
LiTERARY TIBETAN.
While
Whip
Whistle, a
Whistle, give a
White
White wash, to
Whose
Whole, the
Whole (undivided)
Whole day, the
Why
Wide
Width
Wife
Wild
Willing, are you
Wind, the
Window
Wing
Winter
Wish, to
zdna (after verb of sen-
tence)
chdk
shug-ra
hu hu tong !
karpo
markarlaga tangche
SU-1
ts’ angpo
son-te
nyin t'ak-t’ok
chi-la ? or chi-p’i-a?
zhang-zhang ; hel-hel
zhangts’ad
ane ; chhungma
rgod
khyod t'ddkhan yin-na ?
lungpo
kdrkhung
shokma
gunkha
t’adche
la-la (after verb of sen-
tence
ta-chak
shuk-da
shuk-da gyak!
karpo
kartsi gyakpa
so-kyi
tsangma ; lip
lingpo ; ghdngmo
Ryin ghang
ghang-gu ton-la ?
yang-po ; sheng-chen
sheng-kha
kyemen ; nangma ; chhung-
di
ngarma ; go’
gong-pa nang-ngd
lung ; hlakpa
gyd-kar ; gi-khung
shokma
gtinka
do’-pa ; ts’alwa
3
PFI
T=
TRINH
EF
HY
ARAr
WEATH | G35
EF
EH RY
TN
RARER EA
FARR
TFET
TT
RRFEr
NVIAIILL
*AYVINGVIOOA
‘HSIM— AHM
ENGLISH. LApAkT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LaTERARY TIBETAN.
. -~
Witch khddoma khddhoma NRA
NN
Witness (in law-court) mar-pang mi-pdng NAAR
Wolf shangku chyang-ku FT
~
Woman bomo bhii-me’ ; kye-men NN] NARS
TR) ~ . ne
Wonderful yats’amchan yats’empo Ww NES 9]
. oN
Wood shing shing I=
Wool bal bhal JA
SN
Woollen balchan bhdalchen Ar qr
. TS .
Word ts'ik ts'ik a9)
Work (labour) le-kd le-kd ; So AN
Work, to le-kd choche leka jhe’pa ; So-wa AN INA
Work, the (manufacture) | zo So qx
World Jik-ten Jikten REA
Worth, what is it ri-che chi yinnd khoské ghd ts'o ? Rgds
Wound, a
Wrap up, to
Write, to
Writing materials
Written, have
Written, anything
Wrong
sma-kha
rilche
driche
drispen
yi-ge
osmed
’
ma
shub-su dilwa
yige di-wa
di-we yo-che’
di jhung
yi=ge
~ . ~ .
WOL-MmAn ; ML-01-Pa
I
wT
FREAK
AAR
SRA
99¢
*X4VINgvO0A NVIAFLL
*OPNOYM =—HAJOM
L986
3 i a ————
d . A rr Ce tg
2 de
E—— _n
aS LF sigur te a TE _—
4
| 368 TIBETAN VOCABULARY.
3
Be
: APPENDIX.
BE
MONGOL- TARTAR WORDS AND PHRASES.
= . . ic kr [Mongol traders and pilgrims are constantly encountered in N -E. Tibet
he WU Vv“ Wr 3 Lc pom and at Lhésd. These mostly speak Tibetan, but give to many letters a
i \er & AL Ac i i) peculiar pronunciation. Thus gy is usually sounded j, and khy and ky as chh |
and ch; while d and t, ts and ch are often interchanged. It was probably
this distorted pronunciation which influenced the American traveller, Mr.
2 Rockhill, to adopt his extraordinary system of transliteration for Tibetan
= place-names in his, otherwise, most reliable narrative of exploration. The
& IY Jama who taught Mr. Rockhill at Peking was evidently a Mongol ; and the
Ee S curious syllabary in his Appendix, wherein he sets forth the phonies of |
= 3 Lhdsd, was plainly founded on ‘Mongol information. As a possible aid to
: 2 . travellers, T have thought it well to annex a few useful words and phrases in
5 i. 3 8, Mongolized Tibetan as well as in the genuine Mongol language, the latter
iy S & 3 S the colloquial idiom of the South. N.B.—In Monzol words, the vowels mark-
co & % T= "= ed long, thus a, #, &c., have a greatly prolonged and somewhat guttural
intonation, being sounded deep in the throat. TkLe h is likewise guttural,
being identic with the Persian C in such words as khabar, Khuda, &c. The
Mongol adjective, unlike the Tibetan, precedes its noun. ]
3 ENGLISH. MoNGOL-TIBETAN. MoNGOL~TARTAR.
a « Good Jdg-po sain
= ? 3 Bad wdg-po mdgo (often md)
= “3 3 Not good ma le-mo sain bishe
> = S < 3 Great chhembo iké
3S, 2 S $ z S = Small chhung bhdga
Much mangbo olon
Little alich titsiin
All; the whole kun ; gangmo kdmuk ; bu-hid
Thin t’dmo narin
. Strong she’mo hiitsin |
= Good enongh saishik | |
3 New sarba shind
= ro g North chang buguk
EB » g 4 8 South he | Bree
I be bm bei be I bn White y karbo tsdghan
4
E————
370 APPENDIX.
ENGLISH. MoNGOL-TIBETAN.
Black ndgpo
Red mdrbo
Blue ombo
Yellow serbo
Man mi-bo
Woman, wife pwme’
Boy potso
House nang ; khim
Tree shing
Road ; path lam
Land sdchhd
Ground, the sd
Stone do
Town dron-chher
River sangpo
Mountain 71
Lake chho
Plain tang
Mountain Pass la
Wood shing
Fire mé
Water chhu
Sand Jéma
Salt ts'a
Butter mdr
Milk homa
Bird syd
Marmot chhipt
Sheep fuk
Ox hldng
Camel ngamon(y
Horse tapo
Horses, herd of td-chho (or td-khyo)
Dog chha
Bear demo
Old man ganbo
One—two—three chig=—nyi—sum
Four—five—six zhi=——g dm druk
Seven—eight—nine
Ten—hundred
dun-—gydt—gu
chu-tamba—gyd
Which ?—What >~Who ? kang /—kang su
2
Cl il i Co da
MoNGOL-TARTAR.
hdra
wldng
ko-ko
shdra
kumiin ; ere
eme
hubiin
ger
modo
jdm; mur
gadzar
shéré
chulin
hoton
gul
ula
nur
tala
hutul
modo
gal
08SU
elesun
tabsun
tosun
sdga
shubin
tarbdga
huni
imé
temén
Morin
adan
nohoy
itigo
obgon
nige—khojdr—gurban
dorbon—tdbun—zhorgon
tolon—naimdn—yissiin
arbdn—dzin
aly ?—jun ?=ken ?
ENcrisH.
Eternal life
Come here
Go further off
Begin this
Clean that
Get up
Run away
Take it to them
Go inside the tent
He took it
Come in five days
Write a letter
Lift the pack on the horse = ————
Go after the goats
The man has come
Your camels have gone
This was given me
Give me water
Speak to them
Dig the ground here
Cut up the sheep
I will taste the butter
Are you at peace?
Reverence be (to you)
Are your herds well ?
Eemain in peace
Is there tranquility in your a
country :
Is the grass plentiful there :
Have you seen our horses :
Who is this man:
He is my elder brother :
APPENDIX,
MoNGOL-TIBETAN. MoNGOL-TARTAR.
ts'e t'd-ye mong-ho dmin
dirw shok !
p’drchham song !
dika go-dzuk !
dhega tsangwa chi!
entur irten !
kholo ydbu !
ene 6goskho
tere arche !
langne dod ! bostan !
hd-la gyuk niss ydabu
de-ts’o-la di khur song! ene teden-tur bdri !
gur nangdw song kabidka-in dotoro ydbu
kho len-pa-re’ tere ene dbd
shak ngd shuk-la shok tdbun édiir khoino irten
bichik bichi
morin dero acha da
yige dri chik
ydman-w arda ddga
mibo lep-pa-re’ Kiimun vrdzu
tanu temén ydbulds
- ene ndadwr ugkiiksen but
nga-la chhu nang chik ossu nadur ik
de-ts’o-la ke lap teden-tur tgule
gadzar-dur ende eri
luk tub chik hunin dnzhdla
’ ” ” ’ . ’, -
nga mdr dho-wa td yong bd tosun-i amkurkuw bo
amwr bhaino ?
sollo ! mand !
khyod-kyi khyo le-sam ? tdnw sirik sain bhaino
kdle zhu! amurli!
tanw gddza-dwr dmuguldng
bhaino ?
tende ebusun olon bii-it ?
tdn-anu manw morid-i odzon ?
ene kiimiin ken bui ?
ene minw akhd bua.
BE —————
ERRATA AND ADDENDA.
ERRATA AND ADDENDA. -
Page 22, line 24: lak should be omitted from list of sub-
stantives invariably monosyllabic.
Page 27, lines 7 & 25: fsdna is correct, but tsine is the usual
form.
Page 37, line 8: for t'o-wa read t’o-a.
line 20 : for Dhiid-do read Tiin-do.
9
Page 41, line 30: for Chupgu read Chu-gu.
Page 44, line 18: for “to arrive” read “to depart.”
Page 58, line 9: Tibetan idiom requires that this sentence
should be turned “I observed the body of
the ox dying,” 1. e., Nge lang-qghi ro shi-wa
t’ong jhung.
Page 66, lines 3 & 4: dhin-dhdk-la is ordinarily sounded tin-
da-la.
Page 97, line 23: for foi shik read to shok.
Page 103, line 13, &c: for bhdmo read bhdchu.
Page 119, line 4: for §hdak read gung-shdk.
Page 131, line 12: for “often as” read ‘‘as often as.”
ws sy 15: for tang read tang.
Page 132, line 9: for “is!” read “is?”
yw ss ss 24: for “broad” read “bread.”
Page 136, lines 2, 5, 7, 10 & 34: for ke and ké read ke’.
., 5 lines 35 & 36: for jé read je'.
Page 164: Tdkpa is the name for any white-flowered rhododen-
dron, and Tdkma for red-flowered varieties: the
Tibetan idea being that all the former are male
trees and the latter female.
Page 168: To list of deer, add the Cervus Thoroldi ; in Tibetan
shau-é-ru-chu (not shoa-u-chu, as in Captain Bower's
narrative) meaning ““ The ten-antlered stag.”
Page 171: line 1: for Ghong-sek read Ghong-shig ; and in line
3, omit ‘“ Sekpa: partridge.”
Page 192: another name for a Mendang is Mdni-ringpo.
Page 198: The chief emanations of the goddess Dolma are
Dol-jang and Dol-kar, the Green and the White
Dolma, respectively.
Page 213, line 3: for “snow” read ‘stone.’
’
PIRI
PHE MASTER NEGATIVE
'S STORED UNDER Type
SERVICE, Room 20.
BERKELEY | CALIF
, FROM WHICH THIS REPRODUCT 10N WAS MADE
SUPERV IS TON OF THE LIBRARY PHOTOGRAPH |
MA IN LIBRARY UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
ORNIA 9 4 7 9 0
FOR ADDITIONAL, RIZP
RODUCT TON REQUEST MAS
TER NEGATIVE NUMBER